BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building

Volume 1 │ Divisions 00-05

Project Manual
August 25, 2014
BID SET

CRSA Project # 11-026-03

BYU Idaho Approvals

Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

Division Section Title Pages

VOLUME 1

Procurement and Contracting Requirements Group

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Table of Contents 1

Invitation to Bid 2

Notice to Bidders 1

Form of Proposal 5

Instructions to Bidders 3

Form of Contract 4

General Conditions (Fixed Sum) 13

Supplementary Conditions 7

Special Inspections General Conditions (DO NOT BID) 3

Blank Schedule of Values 1

Blank Pay Application 1

Geotechnical Evaluation Report 55

Geotechnical Addenda #1 2

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

General Requirements Subgroup

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY 5
012200 UNIT PRICES 2
012300 ALTERNATES 2
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 3
012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 4

013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 9
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 7
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 4
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 10
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 8
014200 REFERENCES 15
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 9
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 4
017300 EXECUTION 9
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 4
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 6
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 5
017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 4
017900 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING 3
019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 34
019115 BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 6
019117 BUILDING ENCLOSURE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS 5

Facility Construction Subgroup

Division Section Title Pages

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033300 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033600 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
042000 UNIT MASONRY
042113 BRICK MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING
053100 STEEL DECKING
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
055100 METAL STAIRS
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
057310 WET GLAZED GLASS RAILING SYSTEM

END VOLUME 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS

BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY-IDAHO

STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

I. INVITATION TO BID

II. NOTICE TO BIDDERS

III. FORM OF PROPOSAL

IV. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

V. FORM OF CONTRACT

A. LONG FORM

VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

A. GENERAL CONDITIONS

B. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

C. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS CONDITIONS

VII. APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT-MONTHLY ESTIMATE

A. SCHEDULE OF VALUES

10/6/99 Table of Contents

Blank Page
Contractor

Re: Invitation to Bid – Science & Technology Building

Project No. 10533

Dear Jessica,

You are invited to bid on the above referenced project. This project consists of building a new Science &
Technology Building for the BYU‐Idaho campus. The approximate square footage is 106,000 Sq./Ft. The
building contains classroom space, a commercial kitchen, teaching laboratories, electronics laboratories
and other animal, food and plant science type spaces for the Animal & Food Science, Applied Plant
Science, Computer Science & Electrical Engineering, and Computer Information Technology
Departments. The project will commence January 2015 and be complete by July 31, 2016. The Opinion
of Probable cost for this project is $34 million.

A mandatory pre‐bid has been scheduled for September 2, 2014 from 2:00‐3:30PM, in the “Green
Room” 104A of the BYU‐Idaho Center. You are invited to bring a Project Manager, Superintendent and
Estimator.

Pre‐Bid Meeting Agenda:

 2:00‐2:15 Introductions
 2:15‐2:30 Review of bid procedures and policies
 2:30‐3:00 Project Presentation and question period
 3:00‐3:30 Site Tour

Bids will be submitted using Masterworks, BYU‐Idaho’s project management software on September 30,
2014 by 2:00PM by accessing https://byui.masterworkslive.com. (Login instruction for Masterworks will
be distributed by Neihlee Muir in the coming days.) Bid results will be distributed via email on October 7,
2014 by 2:00PM. A performance bond and a labor and materials payment bond for 100% of the
contract will be required for this project.

For further inquiries related to bid submission using Masterworks for this project, please direct your
questions to the Contract Administrator Neihlee Muir at 208‐496‐2651, muirn@byui.edu.

Please acknowledge receipt of this invitation to bid, by emailing: Jeff Nielsen, jnielsen@crsa‐us.com and
Neihlee Muir, MuirN@byui.edu. Your email should include an acceptance or declination of the bid

1
invite as well as a name, phone number and email address for the person who will be a direct contact
for the representation of your company.

We look forward to meeting with you on September 2, 2014.

Sincerely,

Jeff Nielsen
CRSA

2
 NOTICE TO BIDDERS

SECTION 1--PROJECT: Science & Technology Building

Project Number: 10533

SECTION 2-- LOCATION: BYU-Idaho

SECTION 3--OWNER: BYU-Idaho

SECTION 4--DESIGNER: CRSA-- Jeff Nielsen

SECTION 5 --STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS:

The bidder is directed to the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Brigham Young University-Idaho
Standard Contract Requirements (January 2011). This volume is an integral part of the contract
documents and is hereby made a part of the contract.

SECTION 6-- TIME OF COMPLETION:

A. Date: July 31, 2016

SECTION 7--PREBID CONFERENCE

A. Prebid Conference will be:

Date: September 2, 2014

Time: 2:00 PM

Place: BYU-Idaho Center "Green Room" 104A

SECTION 8--RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS:

A. Bids will be received:

Date: September 30, 2014

Time: 2:00 PM

Place: Online

By: https://byui.masterworkslive.com

B. The Owner reserves the exclusive right to release all publicity relating to the proposals and the project.

SECTION 9--GENERAL CONTRACTORS:

A. Bidding by General Contractors will be by invitation only.

SECTION 10--DRAWINGS:

A. Drawings are available at the following plan room locations:

CRSA- Jeff Nielsen
https://byui.masterworkslive.com

8/22/2014 Notice to Bidde

Blank Page
 BYU-Idaho
FORM OF PROPOSAL

NAME OF PROJECT Science & Technology Building

PROJECT NUMBER 10533

NAME OF CONTRACTOR _________________________________________________________________________

DATE OF PROPOSAL_____________________________________________________________________________

The undersigned, hereinafter referred to as the Bidder, certifies that the following facts and/or circumstances have occurred or
exist relating to the proposed work for __________________were prepared by _______________________

l. That Bidder has received the contract documents for the above entitled project.

2. That Bidder has received The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints BYU-Idaho Standard Contract
Requirements, revised October 6, 1999.

3. That Bidder is familiar with such documents, has examined the site of the proposed work, including availability of
access, utilities, and other similar items relating to performance of the work and is thoroughly familiar with all
general and local conditions which could in any way affect this work.

4. That no verbal agreements or representations with or by any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner exist or have
been made to the Bidder and the Bidder in submitting this proposal is in no way relying thereon.

5. That if this proposal is accepted, Bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner in substantially the form contained
in the contract documents, and will provide the bonds, insurance coverage and all other items required by the
contract documents.

6. The term "base bid" shall be understood to include all work contained in the contract documents excluding any
substitutes or alternates. The Owner will have the right to accept Alternates in any order, combination or
independent of any Alternates, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and
Alternates accepted.

Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, transportation, services, licenses and permits
necessary for the completion of all the work set forth in the contract documents for the sum of:

Base Bid $___________________________

Add Alternate #1: $___________________________

600 South Parking. Remove existing parking lot. Provide new parking lot, sidewalks, ramps and landscaping as shown on the
drawings.

Add Alternate #2: $___________________________

North Parking lot. Provide new parking lot, sidewalks, stairs and landscaping as shown on the drawings.

8/2014 1 Form of Proposal

AS FURTHER CONDITIONS OF THIS PROPOSAL:

l. The Bidder agrees to complete the work on or before _______________.

2. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of addenda No. (s) .

3. The Bidder’s contractor’s license number is .

4. Is your bonding capacity adequate for this job? Yes No___

5. For verification call .

Telephone Number .

6. Is your license limit adequate for this job? Yes No___

PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS

The total sum of the Bidder's proposal shall include the furnishing and installing of all materials, equipment, and labor as called for
in the contract documents as a base bid.

Hereafter give the total amount to be added or deducted for a complete installation of equipment or materials other than those
specified and those approved by addendum are submitted for the Owner's consideration. All materials and equipment proposed for
substitution shall be listed below and must meet the requirements of the contract documents. During the time of consideration of the
proposals, complete information shall be submitted immediately to the Architect and Owner's Representative. The Contractor is
referred to Page 3 of the Instructions to Bidders, Section 9, prior approvals and substitutions for requirements relative to proposed
substitutions.

Proposed Manufacturer and

Substitute Catalog Numbers $ Add $ Deduct
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |

8/2014 2 Form of Proposal

TYPE OF BIDDER'S ORGANIZATION:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Official Name of Organization

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Corporation, Co-partnership, Individual, or Other

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Address

Name of Individual Members of Firm:

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of President of Corporation:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of Secretary of Corporation:

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Corporation is organized under the laws of the State of:

Signature

( ) Title or Office
)Seal(
( ) Legal Address

SUBCONTRACTOR BID BREAKDOWN FORM

Provide a base bid breakdown of Sub-Contractor pricing by entering the amounts in the below provided form. Combine pricing of
trade work if specified in multiple divisions, falling under the same sub-trade. List multiple division’s if needed. Do not include
alternate pricing.

8/2014 3 Form of Proposal

 SUB-CONTRACTOR SUB-CONTRACTOR PRICES INCLUDED
DIVISION(S)
TRADE NAME IN BASE BID

ELECTRICAL
$_____________

MECHANICAL
$_____________

PLUMBING
$_____________

STEEL
$_____________

EARTHWORK
$_____________

ROOFING
$_____________

FIRE PROTECTION
$_____________

CONTROLS
$_____________

LANDSCAPING
$_____________

BIDDER'S LIST OF SUBCONTRACT BIDS USED IN PROPOSAL

8/2014 4 Form of Proposal
 (LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS NOT INCLUDED IN ABOVE FORM)

PROJECT NAME: Science & Technology Building

PROJECT NUMBER: 10533

OWNER'S NAME: BYU-Idaho

DIVISION

SUBCONTRACT CLASSIFICATIONS SUBCONTRACTOR USED AMOUNT

8/2014 5 Form of Proposal

Blank Page
 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

SECTION 1 -- BIDDING BY INVITATION

A. Bidding shall be by written invitation only. Those wanting to be considered for such invitation shall apply to:
Facility Planning and Construction Department
BYU-Idaho University Operations Building
283 University Operations
Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205

B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids.

SECTION 2 -- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract documents may be obtained by contractors from:

Facility Planning and Construction Department
BYU-Idaho University Operations Building
283 University Operations
Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205

A website may also be set up by the architect where plans can be viewed and downloaded. If so, web information can be
obtained through the general contractors or by contacting BYU-Idaho Facility Planning and Construction.

B. Subcontractors and suppliers who want to obtain Contract documents (plans and specifications) may do so by contacting
those general contractors invited to bid.

C. All Contract documents must be returned within ten (10) days after the bid opening.

SECTION 3 -- CONTRACT METHOD

A. All work specified is to be done under one general contract. Bids will be accepted by the Owner from prime contractors
only.

SECTION 4 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. If any Bidder doubts the true meaning of any of the Contract documents, or finds errors, discrepancies or omissions, he
shall request a clarification from the Architect in writing. Any interpretations or corrections will be made only by written
addenda duly issued by the Owner. All addenda will be e-mailed to each person receiving a set of the Contract
documents. Requests for clarifications must be submitted to the Architect at least five (5) days before bid opening.
Unwritten instructions or interpretations will have no validity.

B. Should discrepancies appear in the Contract documents that are not resolved by an addendum, it is expressly understood
that the Contractor has used the most expensive method and/or material in the bid.

SECTION 5 -- REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SUBMITTING BIDS

A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site and structures located there (if any). The Contractor shall
thoroughly examine all Contract documents in relation to all conditions that might directly or indirectly affect the contract
work. The bid amount shall reflect all such conditions.

SECTION 6 -- PREPARING AND SUBMITTING BIDS

A. To receive consideration, a bid must be made according to the following instructions:

1. Bids shall be prepared on BYU-Idaho Form of Proposal. All pages, including subcontractor list shall be
submitted at the time of bid.
2. Bids shall have all items or blanks filled. Numbers shall be stated both in writing and in figures. If there is a
discrepancy between the two, the written number shall govern.

4/2014 1 Instructions to Bidders

 3. Bids shall be without interlineations, alterations or erasures.
4. Signatures shall be by those authorized to execute the Contract.
5. The Bidder's legal name, business address and telephone number shall be stated.
6. Neither oral bids nor modifications shall be considered.
7. Faxed or emailed bids will be accepted if the bidder (1) contacts the Construction Department before faxing or
emailing the bid, (2) sends the bid with sufficient time to be received and delivered to the bid opening location
before bid time, and (3) calls the Construction Department before bid time to confirm that the bid was received
and delivered to the bid opening location. The option to submit bids via email or fax is only available if the
project is not bidding in MasterWorks.
8. It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that the bid is received at the proper time. Any bid received after the
scheduled bid opening time will be returned unopened to the Bidder.
9. Bidders shall accept proposals from only those subcontractors who are approved by the Owner. It will be
assumed that the question of bonding subcontractors, where considered desirable or necessary by the
Contractor, including the cost of such bonds, has been resolved before bids have been submitted.
10. In order for the bid to be considered valid, two or more Bidders bidding as a "joint venture" must have the
written approval of the Owner before submitting a bid. All members of a joint venture shall sign the bid and an
official representative of the joint venture shall be designated in the proposal.
11. The term "base bid" shall be understood to include all work contained in the Contract, excluding any alternates
or substitutes. The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination, and to determine
the awarded contractor based on the sum of the base bid and alternates accepted.
12. Substitutes or alternates accepted by the Owner may be included in the Contract or added by Change Order. In
determining the awarded contractor, the Owner will not consider substitutes.
13. Bids may be withdrawn by the Bidder, either in person or by a written request before bid opening. Once a bid
summary is distributed to all Bidders, the Bidders will have 24 hours to review and withdraw their bids. After
the 24-hour period, the bids may not be withdrawn and must remain fixed as submitted for 45 days after
opening. Envelopes must contain nothing but the proposal and bid breakdown forms if required. Envelopes
shall be opaque, sealed and bear the Bidder’s name. Bids must contain nothing but the proposal and bid
breakdown forms, if required.
14. Contractor shall submit all project documentation and correspondence using the owners Project Management
Software, MasterWorks by Aurigo®. Including, but not limited to; RFI’s, payment applications, inspection
requests, logs, minutes, submittals; or any and all documentation as directed by owner.

SECTION 7 -- APPROVAL OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS

A. As soon after the bid opening as is practicable, the Owner will interview the awarded contractor and if deemed necessary,
the second or third Bidders. The Owner will also examine the list of subcontractors submitted with the bids. The Owner
reserves the right to accept or reject any subcontract proposal.

B. If a Bidder doubts the correctness or acceptability of any subcontract proposal, the Bidder may submit the names and
amount of other competing subcontractors for consideration, making sure that he clearly states which one he has used
in formulating his proposal.

SECTION 8 -- FACTORS AFFECTING AWARD OR REJECTION OF BID

A. The Bidder's and subcontractor's past performance, organization, equipment and ability to perform and complete their
contract as specified will be vital elements, as well as the amount of their bids, in the award of the Contract.

B. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, or to waive any irregularities or informalities in bids received. The
Owner reserves the right to accept the bid that will, in the Owner's opinion, best serve the interests of the Owner
regardless of whether such bid is the lowest.

SECTION 9 -- PRIOR APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Several acceptable brands of equipment, manufactured articles or methods of construction may have been identified in
the Contract. It is not intended to close the Contract against other brands, articles, or methods that may warrant
consideration. However, unspecified materials must have prior approval by the Owner to be considered.

B. Prior Approvals: Requests for approval of unspecified materials must be made to the Architect at least five days before

4/2014 2 Instructions to Bidders

 bid opening. The requests for prior approval shall be considered by the Architect if time permits and if properly
documented. The Architect is not bound to consider these items despite their apparent validity.

C. Fully detailed technical data, references and other information shall be furnished simultaneously with the requests for
prior approval items.

D. Such requests shall be reviewed by the Architect and the Owner. If accepted, the approved requests will be included in
an addendum.

E. The Contractor's "base bid" shall include the furnishing of only those items that are explicitly specified or which have
received prior approval by addendum.

F. Substitutions: Besides the "base bid," any equipment or material supplier and any contractor or subcontractor may, at his
option, submit a substitute price and product for any item specified which he feels warrants consideration by the Owner.
This proposed substitution is to be listed where indicated on the bid form.

G. Any proposed substitute submitted by a Bidder shall include the amount by which the "base bid" would be increased or
decreased.

H. The Owner may accept or reject any substitute proposed. In determining the low Bidder, the Owner will not consider
substitutes.

I. If requested, the Contractor shall furnish information or data concerning the substitute. The Owner may request the
Contractor, at his own expense, to have the substitute tested by an approved testing laboratory.

SECTION 10 -- FORM OF CONTRACT

A. Copies of the form of the Contract that the successful Bidder will be required to execute are included in this specification.

SECTION 11 -- ADDENDA

A. All addenda issued before bid opening shall be included in the bid and shall be a part of the Contract.

SECTION 12 -- REQUIREMENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER SIGNING THE CONTRACT

A. Immediately after signing the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the following to the Owner:
1. Executed performance, labor and material payment bonds, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the
contract sum as specified in the General Conditions.
2. Insurance certificates as specified in the General Conditions.
3. A cost breakdown of the work that may, as approved by the Owner, serve as a basis for making monthly
payments to the Contractor.
4. A project schedule as to how he intends to construct the project. This must be, in the opinion of the Owner, a
realistic method of analyzing and scheduling each component of the work. It must show when all trades or
crafts start and finish their work. This schedule must be reviewed at least biweekly and updated as required. A
critical path method of scheduling is preferred. If the Contractor cannot produce and maintain such a schedule,
this service must be obtained from an outside consultant. The schedule must be approved by the Owner's
Representative before the Contractor submits the first payment request.

B. The Contractor shall issue subcontracts as mutually agreed between the Owner and the Contractor. A complete list of
subcontractors and major suppliers including names, addresses and telephone numbers are required within fourteen (14)
days of the Owner’s subcontractor review.

SECTION 13 -- DISQUALIFICATION

A. If the above requirements are not satisfied, the bid may be disqualified at the discretion of the Owner.

4/2014 3 Instructions to Bidders

Blank Page
LONG FORM CONTRACT Date

Project No: 10533

Account No: 7201-31-0146

THIS CONTRACT, made and executed as of the ?? day of ???, by and between BRIGHAM YOUNG

UNIVERSITY-IDAHO, a non-profit Utah corporation of Rexburg, Idaho (hereinafter referred to as

"Owner"), and ???. (hereinafter referred to as "Contractor").

WITNESSETH:

That for and in consideration of the payments hereinafter specified to be paid by the Owner to the

Contractor and the covenants and agreement herein contained to be kept and performed by the parties

hereto, the Contractor agrees to the Science & Technology Building at BYU-Idaho in Rexburg, Idaho

(hereinafter referred to as the "Project"), and to furnish and deliver all materials, and perform and

supervise all work as required herein and by the contract documents hereinafter identified, all of which

shall collectively constitute the contract, and shall hereinafter be referred to collectively as the "Contract".

ARTICLE I. THE IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Plans entitled "???” were prepared by ??? and approved by Rulon

Nielsen, Facilities Planning and Construction on ???

B. The Specifications entitled "???" were prepared by ???, and approved by

Rulon Nielsen, Facilities Planning and Construction Director at BYU-Idaho on ???

C. Addendum Number One, dated ???

D. Addendum Number Two, dated ???

E. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints Standard Contract

Documents

are a part of this Contract, including the Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE II. THE CONTRACT SUM
The Owner agrees to pay to the Contractor, in accordance with the terms hereof,

the following: ??? ($).

Base Bid $???

Alternate #1

Alternate #2

Total $???

The Contractor agrees to accept a total ??? ($) as full compensation for

performing his obligation under the contract.

ARTICLE III. DATE OF COMPLETION

The Contractor agrees to complete the work required by the Contract on or

before midnight ???. Time is hereby expressly declared to be of the essence of the contract.

ARTICLE IV. THE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE

The Contractor's Representative is ???

ARTICLE V. THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

The Owner's Representative is Rulon Nielsen

ARTICLE VI. AUDIT

The Owner reserves the right to audit financial transactions between the

Owner and the Architect regarding this project.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner has caused this instrument to be signed by its President, attested

by its Secretary, and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed, and the Contractor has hereunto affixed his

signature as of the day and year above written.

ATTEST: BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY-IDAHO

____________________________________________
Kim B. Clark, President – BYU-Idaho

____________________________________________
Charles N. Andersen, University Resources Vice President

____________________________________________
Wayne N. Clark, University Operations Managing Director

____________________________________________
Date

CONTRACTOR: ???

____________________________________________
Name

____________________________________________
Print Name

____________________________________________
Title

____________________________________________
Address

____________________________________________

____________________________________________
Fed. I.D. # or SSN

____________________________________________
License Number
____________________________________________
Date
 GENERAL CONDITIONS
For a FIXED SUM (U.S.)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 2 OWNER
SECTION 3 CONTRACTOR
SECTION 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE
CONTRACT
SECTION 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
SECTION 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR
BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
SECTION 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
SECTION 8 TIME
SECTION 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Agreement: the document entitled "Agreement Between
Owner and Contractor for a Fixed Sum (U.S.), executed by
Owner and Contractor for performance of the Work.
B. Architect: the entity identified as such in the Agreement.
C. Change In The Work: a modification to the requirements of
the Contract Documents or a delay in Substantial Completion
resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect to
Contractor or from another event or circumstance.
D. Change Order: a written instrument prepared by Architect and
signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their
agreement upon the following: (1) the occurrence of a
Change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment, if any,
in the Contract Sum as a result of the Change in the Work;
and (3) the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract
Time as a result of the Change in the Work.
E. Construction Change Directive: a written order prepared by
Architect and signed by Architect and Owner which: (1) orders
a Change in the Work if the terms of a Change Order cannot
be agreed upon prior to performance of a Change in the Work
described in Section 7.1 or after occurrence of an event or
circumstance described in Section 7.2; and (2) states a
proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum,
the Contract Time, or both, resulting from the Change in the
Work.
F. Contract Documents: the documents identified as such in the
Agreement.
G. Contract Sum: the total amount set forth in the Agreement
payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work.
H. Contract Time: the period of time set forth in the Agreement
for the Substantial Completion of the Work.
I. Contractor: the entity identified as such in the Agreement.
J. Day: calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.
K. Direct Costs: actual costs for labor, materials, equipment,
insurance, bonds, subcontract costs and onsite supervision
relating to the Project. They do not include labor costs for
project managers or other off-site administration.
L. Drawings: the documents identified as such in the
Agreement.
BYU-Idaho Revision 02
SECTION 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
SECTION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND
PROPERTY
SECTION 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
SECTION 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF
WORK
SECTION 13 RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
SECTION 14 TERMINATION
SECTION 15 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
M. Field Change: a written order prepared by Architect and
signed by Architect and Contractor for a minor Change in
the Work consistent with the general intent of the Contract
Documents costing $1,000 or less, resulting in no time
extension, and which is necessary to avoid delaying the
Work.
N. Modification: a written amendment to the Contract
Documents in the form of a:
1. Change Order;
2. Construction Change Directive; or
3. Field Change.
O. Owner: the entity identified as such in the Agreement.
P. Project: the total construction designed by Architect of
which the Work performed under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part.
Q. Product Data: standard illustrations, schedules, perfor-
mance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other
information furnished by Contractor to illustrate details
regarding materials or equipment to be used in the Work, or
the manner of installation, operation, or maintenance of
such materials or equipment.
R. Project Manual: the document identified as such in the
Agreement.
S. Samples And Mock-ups: physical examples that illustrate
materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish stan-
dards by which the Work will be judged.
T. Shop Drawings: drawings, diagrams, illustrations, sched-
ules, performance charts, fabrication and installation
drawings, setting diagrams, patterns, templates, and other
data which illustrate some portion of the Work and confirm
dimensions and conformance to the Contract Documents
specially prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor,
manufacturer, supplier, or distributor.
U. Specifications: the documents identified as such in the
Agreement.
V. Subcontractor: any entity supplying labor, materials,
equipment, construction or services for the Work under
separate contract with Contractor or any other
Subcontractor.
W. Submittals: Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and
Mock-ups and any other documents or items furnished by
Contractor or its Subcontractors to Owner or Architect to
June 2013 Page 1 of 13
 demonstrate how any portion of the Work will be
accomplished or the type of materials or products that will be
used in the Work.
X. Substantial Completion: Completion of the Work to a point
where the local building official issues a Certificate of
Occupancy. The date of Substantial Completion is the date
certified as such by Architect in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
Y. Work: all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and
services required by the Contract Documents.
Z. Written Notice: notice in writing given from one party to the
other at the addresses or facsimile numbers listed in the
Agreement, or at such other addresses or facsimile numbers
as the parties will designate from time to time by Written
Notice, and will be effective at the earliest of:
1. The date of personal delivery to the other party with
signed acknowledgment of receipt; or
2. The date sent by facsimile transmission to the other party
provided receipt of the facsimile is verified by an
electronic confirmation report by the party sending the
facsimile transmission and further provided that a
confirmation copy is sent to the other party by courier or
by registered or certified mail within twenty-four (24)
hours after the time and date of the facsimile
transmission; or
3. The date of receipt by the other party as stated on the
return receipt if sent by registered or certified mail, or by
courier.
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS
A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to require Contractor
to provide all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and
services necessary for the proper execution and completion of
the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary and
what is required by any one will be as binding as if required by
all. Contractor will perform the Work in accordance with the
requirements expressly set forth in or reasonably inferable
from the Contract Documents.
B. The organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to
control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors
or to establish the extent of the Work to be performed by any
trade.
C. Words used in the Contract Documents that have well known
technical or trade meanings are used therein in accordance
with such recognized meanings.
D. In the interest of brevity, the Contract Documents may omit
modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as
"the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is
absent from one statement and appears in another is not
intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Drawings, the Project Manual, and copies thereof are the
property of Owner. Contractor will not use these documents
on any other project. Contractor may retain one copy of the
Drawings and the Project Manual as a contract record set and
will return or destroy all remaining copies following final
completion of the Work.
SECTION 2 - OWNER
2.1 OWNER’S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE
Owner will designate in writing a representative who will have
express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters
requiring Owner’s approval or authorization.
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER
A. Owner will be responsible for establishment of property
lines and benchmarks for grading.
B. Owner will furnish to Contractor any information or services
it is required to furnish under the Contract Documents with
reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly
progress of the Work.
C. Owner will furnish to Contractor a reasonable number of
copies of the Drawings, the Project Manual, and the
Addenda.
2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO INSPECT THE WORK
Owner and its representatives will have the right to inspect
any portion of the Work wherever located at any time.
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
If Contractor fails to carry out the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents or fails to correct Work which is not
in accordance with the Contract Documents in a timely
manner, Owner may order Contractor in writing to stop the
Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for that order
has been eliminated.
SECTION 3 - CONTRACTOR
3.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD
CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
A. By executing the Agreement, Contractor represents that it
has visited the Project site, familiarized itself with the local
conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and
correlated its own observations with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Contractor will carefully review and compare the Contract
Documents and any other available information relating to
the Project prior to commencing and during performance of
each portion of the Work and will immediately report to
Architect any errors, inconsistencies, and omissions it
discovers.
C. Should Contractor or any of its Subcontractors become
aware of any question regarding the meaning or intent of
any part of the Contract Documents prior to commencing
that portion of the Work about which there is a question,
Contractor will request an interpretation or clarification from
Architect before proceeding. Contractor proceeds at its own
risk if it proceeds with the Work without first making such a
request and receiving an interpretation or clarification from
Architect. If neither Contractor nor its Subcontractors
become aware of the question until after work on the
relevant portion of the Work has commenced, then the
following precedence will govern for purposes of
determining whether resolution of the question constitutes a
Change in the Work:
1. The Agreement takes precedence over all other
Contract Documents.
2. The Supplementary Conditions take precedence over
the General Conditions.
3. The General Conditions and Supplementary
Conditions take precedence over the Drawings and the
Specifications.
4. An Addendum or a Modification take precedence over
the document(s) modified by the Addendum or
Modification.
5. The Specifications take precedence over the
Drawings.
6. Within the Drawings, larger scale drawings take prece-
dence over smaller scale drawings, figured dimensions
over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over
graphic indications.
Page 2 of 13

D. Contractor will give Architect notice of any additional
drawings, specifications, or instructions required to define the
Work in greater detail, or to permit the proper progress of the
Work, sufficiently in advance of the need for information so as
not to delay the Work.
E. It is not Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the
Contract Documents are in accordance with requirements of
applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules
and regulations. However, if Contractor observes that
portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with those
requirements, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in
writing. Contractor will not proceed unless Owner and/or 3.3
Architect effects Modifications to the Contract Documents
required for compliance with such requirements. Contractor
will be fully responsible for any work knowingly performed
contrary to such requirements and will fully indemnify Owner
against loss and bear all costs and penalties arising
therefrom.
F. Contractor will take field measurements and verify field
conditions and will compare such field measurements and
conditions and other information known to Contractor with the
Contract Documents before ordering any materials or
commencing construction activities. Contractor will
immediately report errors, inconsistencies, and omissions that
it discovers to Architect. If Contractor orders materials or
commences construction activities before taking field
measurements and verifying field conditions, Contractor will
not be entitled to any compensation for additional costs to
Contractor resulting from field measurements or conditions
different from those anticipated by Contractor which would
have been avoided had Contractor taken field measurements
and verified field conditions prior to ordering the materials or
commencing construction activities.
G. If site conditions indicated in the Contract Documents or other
information provided by Owner or Architect to Contractor differ
materially from those Contractor encounters in performance of
the Work, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing
of such differing site conditions.
3.2 SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor will supervise and direct the Work. Contractor will
be solely responsible for all construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating
all portions of the Work. All loss, damage, liability, or cost of
correcting defective work arising from the use of any
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures will be borne by Contractor, notwithstanding that
such construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures are referred to, indicated or implied by the
Contract Documents, unless Contractor has given timely
notice to Owner and Architect in writing that such means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are not safe
or suitable, and Owner has then instructed Contractor in
writing to proceed at Owner’s risk.
B. Contractor will utilize its best skill, efforts, and judgment to
provide efficient business administration and supervision, to
furnish at all times an adequate supply of workers and
materials, and to perform the Work in an expeditious and
economical manner consistent with the interests of Owner.
C. Contractor will be responsible for:
1. The proper observance of property lines and set back
requirements as shown in the Contract Documents;
2. The location and layout of the Work as shown in the
Contract Documents with respect to the position of the
Work on the property and the elevation of the Work in
relation to grade; and
3. Setting and maintaining construction stakes.
D. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for the acts and
omissions of its employees and Subcontractors as well as
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
persons either directly or indirectly employed by
Subcontractors.
E. Contractor will not be relieved of its obligation to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as a
result of any tests, inspections, or approvals by Owner,
Architect or their consultants.
F. Contractor will be responsible for inspection of portions of
the Work already completed to determine that such portions
are in proper condition to receive subsequent portions of
the Work.
LABOR AND MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
Contractor will provide and pay for all labor, materials,
equipment, tools, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and
other facilities and services necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Work.
B. Contractor will at all times enforce strict discipline and good
order among those performing the Work and will not permit
employment of any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the
tasks assigned to them.
C. Contractor is fully responsible for the Project and all
materials and work connected therewith until Owner has
accepted the Work in writing. Contractor will replace or
repair at its own expense any materials or work damaged or
stolen, regardless of whether it has received payment for
such work or materials from the Owner.
D. Contractor will remedy all damage or loss to any property
caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor,
or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
E. Contractor will be responsible for determining that all
materials furnished for the Work meet all requirements of
the Contract Documents. Architect may require Contractor
to produce reasonable evidence that a material meets such
requirements, such as certified reports of past tests by
qualified testing laboratories, reports of studies by qualified
experts, or other evidence which, in the opinion of Architect,
would lead to a reasonable certainty that any material used,
or proposed to be used, in the work meets the requirements
of the Contract Documents. All such data will be furnished
at Contractor’s expense. This provision will not require
Contractor to pay for periodic testing of different batches of
the same material, unless such testing is specifically
required by the Contract Documents to be performed at
Contractor’s expense.
F. Contractor will coordinate and supervise the work performed
by Subcontractors so that the Work is carried out without
conflict between trades and so that no trade, at any time,
causes delay to the general progress of the Work.
Contractor and all Subcontractors will at all times afford
each trade, any separate contractor, or Owner, reasonable
opportunity for the installation of Work and the storage of
materials.
G. Contractor warrants to Owner that the materials and equip-
ment furnished for the Work will be new unless otherwise
specified by the Contract Documents, and that the Work will
be free from defects, and will conform with the requirements
of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these
requirements, including substitutions not properly approved
and authorized, may be considered defective in the
discretion of Owner. If required by Architect, Contractor will
furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of the
materials and equipment used in performing the Work.
H. Owner may elect to purchase materials required for the
Work. In that event, Contractor will comply with the
procedures set forth in the Contract Documents relating to
such materials.
Page 3 of 13

3.4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
Contractor will comply with all applicable laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations, and orders of any public authorities relating
to performance of the Work.
3.5 TAXES
A. Contractor will pay all sales, use, consumer, payroll, workers
compensation, unemployment, old age pension, surtax, and
similar taxes assessed in connection with the performance of
the Work.
B. Owner will pay all taxes and assessments on the real property
comprising the Project site.
3.6 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Owner will obtain and pay for all zoning and use permits and
permanent easements necessary for completion of the Work.
B. Contractor will obtain and pay for the building permit, and all
other permits, governmental fees, licenses and inspections
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the
Work.
C. Contractor will secure any certificates of inspection and of
occupancy required by authorities having jurisdiction over the
Work. Contractor will deliver these certificates to Architect
prior to issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion
by Architect.
3.7 CONTRACTOR'S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE
Contractor will employ a competent representative acceptable
to Owner to supervise the performance of the Work. This
representative will be designated in writing by Contractor prior
to commencement of work and will not be changed prior to
Final Inspection of the Work without prior written consent of
Owner. This representative will represent Contractor for all
purposes, including communication with Owner.
3.8 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
A. Contractor will prepare and submit for Owner's and Architect's
information Contractor's construction schedule for the Work in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor will prepare and maintain a Submittal schedule
which is coordinated with Contractor's construction schedule
and sets forth specified times for Architect to review
Submittals.
3.9 DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS AT THE SITE
Contractor will keep at the Project site for use by Owner,
Architect, or their representatives, a record copy of the Project
Manual, the Drawings, all Addenda, and all Modifications.
These documents will be maintained in good order and
currently marked to record changes and selections made
during construction. In addition, Contractor will keep at the
Project site one copy of all Submittals.
3.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are not Contract Documents and do not alter the
requirements of the Contract Documents unless incorporated
into the Contract Documents by a Modification.
B. Contractor will review, approve, and submit to Architect
Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. By
approving Submittals, Contractor represents that it has
determined and verified field measurements, field
construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar
data, and that it has checked and coordinated each Submittal
with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
Documents or will make such determination, verification,
check, and coordination prior to commencing the relevant
portion of the Work. In reviewing Submittals Architect will
be entitled to rely upon Contractor’s representation that
such information is correct and accurate.
C. Contractor will inform Architect in writing at the time of
submission of any Submittal or portion thereof which
deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Contractor will provide Architect with documentation
demonstrating to Architect that the Submittal is equal to or
better than the specified product or work. Contractor will
not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the
requirements of the Contract Documents by Architect’s
acceptance of a Submittal unless Contractor has informed
Architect in writing of the deviation and Architect has
incorporated the deviation into the Contract Documents by a
Modification.
D. Contractor will not perform any portions of the Work
requiring Submittals until the respective Submittal has been
reviewed and accepted in writing by Architect.
E. When professional certification of performance criteria of
materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract
Documents, Owner will be entitled to rely upon such
certifications, and neither Owner nor Architect will be
expected to make any independent examination with
respect thereto.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be
returned to Contractor without action.
3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Contractor will be responsible for any cutting, fitting, and
patching that may be required to complete the Work and
make its parts fit together properly.
3.12 ACCESS TO WORK
Contractor will permit Owner, Architect their representatives
and consultants access to the Work wherever located at
any time.
3.13 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
Contractor will pay all royalties and license fees required by
the Work or by Contractor's chosen method of performing
the Work. Contractor will defend and hold Owner harmless
from all suits or claims for infringement of any patent,
license or other intellectual property rights or any loss on
account thereof.
3.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Page 4 of 13
 A. Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless Owner and 4.2
Owner's representatives, employees, agents, architects, and
consultants from and against any and all claims, damages, A.
liability, demands, costs, judgments, awards, settlements,
causes of action, losses and expenses (collectively “Claims”
or “Claim”), including but not limited to attorney fees,
consultant fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses,
arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,
attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to
injury to or destruction of real or personal property, including
loss of use resulting therefrom, except to the extent that such
liability arises out of the negligence of Owner, its
representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity
includes, without limitation, indemnification of Owner from all
losses or injury to Owner’s property, except to the extent that
such loss or injury arises out of the negligence of Owner, its
representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity B.
applies, without limitation, to include Claims occurring both
during performance of the Work and/or subsequent to
completion of the Work. In the event that any Claim is caused
in part by a party indemnified hereunder, that party will bear C.
the cost of such Claim to the extent it was the cause thereof.
In the event that a claimant asserts a Claim for recovery
against any party indemnified hereunder, the party
indemnified hereunder may tender the defense of such Claim
to Contractor. If Contractor rejects such tender of defense and
it is later determined that the negligence of the party
indemnified hereunder did not cause all of the Claim,
Contractor will reimburse the party indemnified hereunder for
all costs and expenses incurred by that party in defending
against the Claim. Contractor will not be liable hereunder to D.
indemnify any party for damages resulting from the sole
negligence of that party.
B. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will be liable to defend
Owner in any lawsuit filed by any Subcontractor relating to the
Project. Where liens have been filed against Owner's
property, Contractor (and/or its bonding company which has
issued bonds for the Project) will obtain lien releases and E.
record them in the appropriate county and/or local jurisdiction
and provide Owner with a title free and clear from any liens of
Subcontractors. In the event that Contractor and/or its
bonding company are unable to obtain a lien release, Owner
in its absolute discretion may require Contractor to provide a F.
bond around the lien or a bond to discharge the lien, at
Contractor's sole expense.
C. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will indemnify and hold
Owner harmless from any claim of any other contractor
resulting from the performance, nonperformance or delay in
performance of the Work by Contractor.
D. The indemnification obligation herein will not be limited by a
limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or
benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor under
worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other
employee benefit acts.
3.15 PROJECT MEETINGS
Contractor will attend and participate in meetings as required
by the Contract Documents. G.
SECTION 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ARCHITECT H.
In the event that Owner terminates its contractual relationship
with Architect, Owner will appoint in writing another architect,
whose status under the Contract Documents will be that of the
former Architect in all respects.
I.
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
Architect will make frequent visits to the site to familiarize
itself generally with the progress and quality of the Work
and to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance
with the Contract Documents. Although Architect is
required to make periodic inspections, it is not required to
make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections. On the
basis of its observations while at the site, Architect will keep
Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will
endeavor to guard Owner against defects and deficiencies
in the Work. Architect’s failure to observe a defect or
deficiency in the Work will not relieve Contractor of its duty
to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Docu-
ments.
Architect will review Contractor's payment requests and
determine the amounts due Contractor in accordance with
Section 9.
Communications between Contractor and Owner relating to
the Work will be through Architect. Communications
between Owner or Contractor with Architect’s consultants
relating to the Work will be through Architect.
Communications between Owner or Architect and
subcontractors relating to the Work will be through
Contractor. Communications between Contractor and any
separate contractor will be through Architect, except as
otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
Architect will have the right to condemn and require removal
of the following at Contractor's expense:
1. Any portion of the Work that does not meet the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Any portion of the Work damaged or rendered unsuit-
able during installation or resulting from failure to
exercise proper protection.
Architect will have authority to stop the Work, with
concurrence of Owner, whenever such stoppage may be
necessary in its reasonable opinion to insure the proper
performance of the Work.
Architect will review Contractor’s Submittals and will accept
or take other appropriate action regarding the Submittals.
Architect's review of the Submittals will be for the limited
purpose of checking for general conformance with the
Contract Documents and will not be conducted for the
purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of
details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substan-
tiating instructions for installation or performance of
equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility
of Contractor. Architect's review of Submittals will not
relieve Contractor of its obligations under the Contract
Documents. Architect's review of Submittals will not
constitute acceptance of safety precautions or construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures.
Architect's acceptance of a specific item will not indicate
acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a compo-
nent.
Architect has authority to order Construction Change
Directives and Field Changes in accordance with Section 7.
Architect will conduct inspections to determine the dates of
Substantial Completion and final completion, will receive
and review written guarantees and related documents
required by the Contract and assembled by Contractor, and
will review and certify or reject Contractor's final payment
request.
Architect will be the interpreter of the performance and
requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect's
interpretations will be in writing or in the form of drawings.
Page 5 of 13
 J. Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be
final if consistent with the Contract Documents.
SECTION 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE
WORK
A. Contractor will enter into contracts with Subcontractors to
perform all portions of the Work that Contractor does not
customarily perform with its own employees.
B. Contractor will not contract with any Subcontractor who has
been rejected by Owner. Contractor will not be required to
contract with any Subcontractor against whom it has a
reasonable objection.
C. If Owner refuses to accept any Subcontractor proposed by
Contractor, Contractor will propose an acceptable substitute
to whom Owner has no reasonable objection.
D. Contractor will not make any substitution for any Subcon-
tractor that has been accepted by Owner and Architect without
the prior written approval of Owner and Architect.
5.2 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
A. Contractor's responsibility for the Work includes the labor and
materials of all Subcontractors, including those recommended
or approved by Owner. Contractor will be responsible to
Owner for proper completion and guarantee of all
workmanship and materials under any subcontracts. Any
warranties required for such work will be obtained by
Contractor in favor of Owner and delivered to Architect. It is
expressly understood and agreed that there is no contractual
relationship between Owner and any Subcontractor, and
under no circumstances will Owner be responsible for the
non-performance or financial failure of any Subcontractor or
any effects therefrom.
B. Contractor agrees to pay the Subcontractors promptly upon
receipt of payment from Owner for that portion of the funds
received which represents the Subcontractor's portion of the
Work completed to Contractor's satisfaction for which Owner
made payment.
C. Contractor will require each Subcontractor to:
1. Be licensed by the state in which the Project is located
where such licensing is required by the governing
authority;
2. Be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as far
as they are applicable to the Subcontractor's work;
3. Assume toward Contractor the same obligations
Contractor has assumed toward Owner, including the
prompt payment of its Subcontractors;
4. Submit its applications for payment to Contractor in time
to permit Contractor to make timely application to Owner;
5. Execute claim or lien releases or lien waivers for
payments made by Contractor; and
6. Make all claims for Changes in the Work to Contractor in
the same manner as Contractor is required to make such
claims to Owner.
SECTION 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR
BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK OR AWARD
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. Owner reserves the right to perform work itself or to award
separate contracts in connection with the Project.
B. When separate contracts are awarded, "Contractor" in the
Contract Documents in each case will mean the contractor
who signs each separate contract.
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
BYU-Idaho Revision 02
A. Contractor will afford other contractors reasonable
opportunity to place and store their materials and equipment
on site and to perform their work and will properly connect
and coordinate its Work with theirs where applicable.
B. If any part of Contractor's Work depends upon the work of
any separate contractor for proper performance or results,
Contractor will inspect and promptly report to Architect any
apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render
it unsuitable for proper performance and results. Failure of
Contractor to so inspect and report will constitute an
acceptance of the work of the separate contractor as fit and
proper to receive Contractor's Work, except as to defects
not then reasonably discoverable.
C. Contractor will promptly remedy damage caused by
Contractor or any Subcontractor to the completed or
partially completed work of other contractors or to the
property of Owner or other contractors.
6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
If a dispute arises among Contractor and separate contrac-
tors as to the responsibility under their separate contracts
for maintaining the Project free from waste materials and
rubbish, Owner may clean the Project, allocate the cost
among those responsible as Owner and Architect determine
to be just, and withhold such cost from any amounts due or
to become due to Contractor.
SECTION 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN
INSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR ARCHITECT TO
CONTRACTOR
A. If Owner or Architect gives Contractor an instruction that
modifies the requirements of the Contract Documents or
delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled
to an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract
Time. If compliance with the instruction affects the cost to
Contractor to perform the Work, the Contract Sum will be
adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in
cost subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1,
Paragraphs B through G. If compliance with the instruction
delays Substantial Completion, the Contract Time will be
extended for a period of time commensurate with such
delay subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1,
Paragraphs B through G and Section 7.3, Paragraph A and
Contractor will be paid liquidated damages for the delay as
set forth in Section 7.3, Paragraph B.
B. If Contractor receives an instruction from Owner or Architect
that Contractor considers to be a Change in the Work,
Contractor, before complying with the instruction, will notify
Architect in writing that Contractor considers such
instruction to constitute a Change in the Work. If Architect
agrees that compliance with the instruction will constitute a
Change in the Work, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a
Modification in accordance with Section 7.1, Paragraphs C.
and D. within ten (10) days.
C. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the
Contract Sum (including without limitation costs related to a
time extension) as a result of an instruction by Owner or
Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change
Order containing a price breakdown itemized as required by
Owner. The breakdown will be in sufficient detail to allow
Owner to determine any increase or decrease in Direct
Costs as a result of compliance with the instruction. Any
amount claimed for subcontracts will be supported by a
similar price breakdown and will itemize the Subcontractor’s
profit and overhead charges. Profit and overhead will be
subject to the following limitations:
June 2013 Page 6 of 13
 1. The Subcontractor’s profit and overhead will not exceed
twelve (12) percent of its Direct Costs.
2. Contractor's profit and overhead on work performed by
its own crews will not exceed ten (10) percent of its
Direct Costs.
3. Contractor's profit and overhead mark up on work per-
formed by its Subcontractors will not exceed five (5)
percent of the Subcontractors’ charges for such work.
4. Amounts due Owner as a result of a credit change will be
the actual net savings to Contractor from the Change in
the Work as confirmed by Architect. On credit changes,
profit and overhead on the originally estimated work will
not be credited back to Owner. If both additions and
credits are involved in a single Change in the Work,
overhead and profit will be figured on the basis of net
increase, if any, related to that Change in the Work.
D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the
Contract Time as a result of an instruction from Owner or
Architect, Contractor will include in its proposal justification to
support Contractor's claim that compliance with the instruction
will delay Substantial Completion.
E. Upon receipt of Contractor’s proposal for Modification,
Architect and Owner will determine whether to proceed with
the Change in the Work. If Architect and Owner determine to
proceed with the Change in the Work, they will issue a
Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field
Change as appropriate.
F. Contractor agrees that if it complies with an instruction from
Owner or Architect without first giving written notice to
Architect as provided in Section 7.1., Paragraph B, and
receiving a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or
Field Change, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment
in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as a result of the
instruction and waives any claim therefor.
G. If Contractor is instructed to perform work which it claims
constitutes a Change in the Work but which Owner and
Architect do not agree constitutes a Change in the Work,
Contractor will comply with the instruction. Contractor may
submit its claim for adjustment to the Contract Sum, the
Contract Time, or both as a dispute pursuant to Section 13
within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction.
Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for
resolution pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days after
compliance with the instruction, then Contractor will not be
entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim
therefor.
7.2 CHANGE IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN EVENT OR
CIRCUMSTANCE
A. If an event or circumstance other than an instruction from
Owner or Architect affects the cost to Contractor of performing
the Work or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may
be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the
Contract Time. If the circumstance or event affects the cost to
Contractor to perform the Work and is caused by a willful or
negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, the Contract
Sum will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or
decrease in Contractor’s cost to perform the Work resulting
from the event or circumstance, subject to the conditions set
forth in Section 7.2, Paragraphs B through F. If the event or
circumstance delays Substantial Completion and is described
in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, the Contract Time will be
extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay
subject to the conditions set forth in such section. If the
circumstance or event delays Substantial Completion and is
caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or
Architect, then Contractor will be compensated for costs
incident to the delay in accordance with Section 7.3,
Paragraph B. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment
to the Contract Sum or other damages from Owner as a result 7.3
of any event or circumstance unless the event or
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
circumstance results from a willful or negligent act or
omission of Owner or Architect.
B. If a Change in the Work results from any event or
circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or
omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will give Owner
Written Notice of such event or circumstance within twenty-
four (24) hours after commencement of the event or
circumstance so that Owner can take such action as is
necessary to mitigate the effect of the event or
circumstance. Contractor will not be entitled to any
adjustment in either the Contract Time or the Contract Sum
based on any damages or delays resulting from such event
or circumstance during a period more than twenty-four (24)
hours prior to Contractor giving such Written Notice to
Owner.
C. Contractor will submit in writing any claims for an
adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Contract Sum
resulting from an event or circumstance within the time
limits set forth below. In the event that Contractor fails to
submit its claim in writing within the time limits set forth
below, then Contractor agrees it will not be entitled to any
adjustment in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum or to
any other damages from Owner due to the circumstance or
event and waives any claim therefor.
1. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time due to
inclement weather will be made by the tenth (10th) of
the month following the month in which the delay oc-
curred.
2. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or
the Contract Sum due to any other circumstance or
event will be submitted within seven (7) days after the
occurrence of the circumstance or event.
D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the
Contract Sum (including without limitation costs related to a
time extension) because of an event or circumstance
resulting from the willful or negligent act or omission of
Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a
Change Order containing a price breakdown as described
in Section 7.1, Paragraph C. Any amount claimed for
increased labor costs as a result of the event or
circumstance must be supported by a certified payroll. Any
claim for rented equipment or additional material costs must
be supported by invoices.
E. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the
Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance,
Contractor will include with its claim copies of daily logs,
letters, shipping orders, delivery tickets, Project schedules,
and other supporting information necessary to justify
Contractor’s claim that the event or circumstance delayed
Substantial Completion. If Contractor is entitled to an
adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or
circumstance caused by the wilful or negligent act or
omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will be compen-
sated for all costs related to the delay in accordance with
Section 7.3, Paragraph B.
F. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of Contractor's claim,
Architect will either deny the claim or recommend approval
to Owner. If Owner approves the claim, the adjustment in
the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum will be reflected in a
Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5 or a Construction
Change Directive pursuant to Section 7.6. If Owner or
Architect denies Contractor's claim, Contractor may submit
its claim as a dispute pursuant to Section 13 within thirty
(30) days of receipt of the denial of the claim. If Contractor
fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13
within the thirty (30) day time period, then Contractor agrees
it is not entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time and/
or Contract Sum or any other damages as a result of the
event or circumstance and waives any claim therefor.
EXTENSIONS OF TIME
Page 7 of 13
 A. If Substantial Completion of the Project is delayed because of
any of the following causes, then the Contract Time will be
extended by Change Order for a period of time equal to such
delay:
1. Labor strikes or lock-outs;
2. Inclement weather;
3. Unusual delay in transportation;
4. Unforeseen governmental requests or requirements;
5. A Change in the Work resulting from an instruction by
Owner or Architect to Contractor subject to the
conditions set forth in Section 7.1.; or
6. Any other event or circumstance caused by the willful or
negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect.
B. Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for delay
described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 1, 2, 3
and 4. For each day of delay in Substantial Completion
described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 5 and
6, Contractor will be paid liquidated damages in the amount
per day set forth in the Supplementary Conditions to
compensate Contractor for all damages resulting from any
delay including but not limited to damages for general
conditions costs, additional job site costs, additional home
office overhead costs, disruption costs, acceleration costs,
increase in labor costs, increase in subcontract costs, in-
crease in materials costs, and any other costs incident to the
delay. Contractor will be entitled to no other compensation
relating to the delay.
7.4 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGES IN THE WORK
Every Change in the Work will be documented by a Change
Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change. If
Owner, Architect and Contractor reach agreement regarding
the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and the
adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, resulting from a
Change in the Work, then the parties will execute a Change
Order pursuant to Section 7.5. If Owner, Architect and
Contractor cannot reach agreement regarding the adjustment
in Contract Sum or the adjustment in Contract Time resulting
from a Change in the Work, then Owner and Architect will
issue a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section
7.6. Field Changes require the agreement of Architect and
Contractor only.
7.5 CHANGE ORDERS
Contractor's signature upon a Change Order is Contractor's
acknowledgment that it is not entitled to any additional
adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time or any
other damages or compensation as a result of the Change in
the Work other than that provided for in the Change Order,
irrespective of whether a subsequent claim for additional
compensation or time extensions relating to the Change in the
Work is described as a change in the requirements of the
Contract Documents, a delay, a disruption of the Work, an
acceleration of the Work, an impact on the efficiency of
performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment, or other
claim and irrespective of whether the impact of the Change in
the Work is considered singly or in conjunction with the impact
of other Changes in the Work.
7.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
A. Contractor will promptly comply with all Construction Change
Directives.
B. Pending final resolution of any adjustment in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time relating to a Construction Change
Directive, the amounts proposed by Owner in the Construction
Change Directive may be included in Contractor's payment
requests once the work relating thereto is completed.
C. If after the work described in the Construction Change
Directive is completed, Owner, Architect, and Contractor
reach agreement on adjustments in the Contract Sum,
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
Contract Time, or both, such agreement will be reflected in
an appropriate Change Order.
D. If the parties do not reach agreement regarding an adjust-
ment to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both relating to
the Construction Change Directive within thirty (30) days of
the completion of the work described therein, then
Contractor may submit its claim for an adjustment pursuant
to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of the completion of
such work. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its
claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30)
days of completion of the work described in the
Construction Change Directive, then it will not be entitled to
an adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting
from such work except as set forth in the Construction
Change Directive and waives any claim therefor.
7.7 FIELD CHANGES
Architect and Contractor will sign a Field Change order
listing the Change In The Work and the Contract Sum
including markups before Contractor proceeds with the
Field Change.
7.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
Except as set forth in Section 7, Contractor will not be
entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time or for any damages of any kind whatsoever
resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect, any
event or circumstance, or any act or omission of Owner or
Architect and Contractor expressly waives any and all
claims therefor.
SECTION 8 - TIME
8.1 TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE
A. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the
essence. By executing the Agreement, Contractor confirms
that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing
the Work. Contractor will proceed expeditiously with
adequate resources and will achieve Substantial
Completion within the Contract Time.
8.2 COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK
Contractor will not commence work on the Project site until
the date set forth in the Written Notice to proceed.
However, Contractor may enter into subcontracts and
secure material for the Project after receipt of the Agree-
ment with Owner's authorized signature. Owner will issue
the Written Notice to proceed within forty-five (45) days after
Owner receives acceptable bonds and evidence of insuran-
ce pursuant to Section 11 unless Owner earlier terminates
the Agreement pursuant to Section 14.
8.3 DELAY IN COMPLETION OF THE WORK
A. For each day after the expiration of the Contract Time that
Contractor has not achieved Substantial Completion,
Contractor will pay Owner the amount set forth in the
Supplementary Conditions as liquidated damages for
Owner's loss of use of the Project and the added adminis-
trative expense to Owner to administer the Project during
the period of delay. In addition, Contractor will reimburse
Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys’ fees,
expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other
expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay.
Owner may deduct any liquidated damages or reimbursable
expenses from any money due or to become due to
Contractor. If the amount of liquidated damages and
reimbursable expenses exceeds any amounts due to
Contractor, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner
within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request from
Owner for payment.
Page 8 of 13

B. At the time Architect certifies that Contractor has achieved
Substantial Completion, Architect will identify the remaining
items to be completed for final completion of the Work and will
establish with Contractor a reasonable time for completion of
those items. Architect will set forth the items to be completed
and the time established for their completion in a Certificate of
Substantial Completion. For each day that Contractor
exceeds the time allowed for completion of the items set forth
in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor will
pay to Owner as liquidated damages for additional
administrative expenses the amount set forth in the
Supplementary Conditions. In addition, Contractor will
reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys’
fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other
expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay in
completing such items.
SECTION 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Contractor will submit to Architect a schedule of values which
allocates the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work.
The schedule of values will be supported by such data to C.
substantiate its accuracy as required by Architect. This
schedule, when accepted by Owner and Architect, will be
used as a basis for reviewing Contractor's payment requests.
9.4
9.2 PAYMENT REQUESTS
A. Not more than once a month, Contractor will submit a A.
payment request to Architect for Work completed, materials
stored on the site, and for materials stored offsite as of the
date of the payment request. The amount of the payment
request will be based upon the schedule of values and will be
equal to the value of the Work completed:
1. Less retention amounts specified in Supplementary
Conditions;
2. Less all prior amounts paid by Owner to Contractor as
part of the Contract Sum; and
3. Less offsets allowed under Section 9.4.
The payment request may include Changes in the Work that
have been performed by Contractor and authorized by Owner
and/or Architect pursuant to Section 7. If a payment request
includes materials stored offsite, Contractor will include with
the payment request a list of the materials, the location where
they are stored and the written request of Contractor and its
performance bond surety that payment be made for such
materials.
B. Contractor warrants and guarantees that upon the receipt of
payment for materials and equipment, whether incorporated in
the Project or not, title to such materials and equipment will
pass to Owner free and clear of all liens, claims, security inter-
ests, or encumbrances. Notwithstanding this payment and
passage of title, Contractor will remain responsible for all such
materials and equipment until actual delivery to the project
site, incorporation into the Work, and final acceptance by
Owner. Contractor further warrants that no material or equip-
ment covered by a payment request is subject to an
agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbran-
ce thereon is retained by the seller or any other person or
entity.
9.3 PAYMENT REQUEST CERTIFICATION
B.
A. Architect will, within seven (7) days after receipt of
Contractor's payment request, forward to Owner the payment
request certified for such amount as Architect determines is
properly due. If Architect certifies less than the full amount of
the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and
Owner of Architect's reasons for withholding certification of
the full amount requested.
B. The certification of the payment request will constitute a
representation by Architect to Owner based upon Architect's
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
observations at the site and the data comprising the
payment request, that the Work has progressed to the point
indicated and that, to the best of Architect's knowledge,
information, and belief, the quality of the Work is in
accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing
representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for
conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial
Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections,
to minor deviations from the Contract Documents
correctable prior to completion, and to specific qualifications
expressed by Architect. However, the certification of the
payment request will not constitute a representation that
Architect has:
1. Conducted exhaustive or continuous on-site inspec-
tions to check the quantity or quality of the Work;
2. Reviewed construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures;
3. Reviewed copies of requisitions received from
Subcontractors or other data requested by Owner to
substantiate Contractor's right to payment; or
4. Made examination to ascertain how or for what
purpose Contractor has used money previously paid
on account of the Contract Sum.
In taking action on Contractor’s payment request, Owner will
be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of the
information furnished by Contractor.
DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION AND
PAYMENT
Architect may withhold certification of a payment request in
whole or in part to the extent reasonably necessary to
protect Owner if, in the opinion of Architect, the
representations to Owner required by Section 9.3,
Paragraph B cannot be accurately made. If Architect is
unable to certify payment in the amount of the payment
request, Architect will notify Contractor and Owner as
provided in Section 9.3, Paragraph A. If Contractor and
Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, Architect will
promptly certify a payment request for the amount for which
Architect is able to make such representations to Owner.
Architect may also decide not to certify payment or, because
of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent
observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a payment
request previously certified, to such extent as may be
necessary in Architect's opinion to protect Owner from loss
because of:
1. Defective work not remedied;
2. Third-party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat-
ing probable filing of such claims;
3. Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to
Subcontractors for labor, materials, equipment,
construction or services;
4. Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be
completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
5. Damage to Owner or another contractor for which
Contractor is responsible;
6. Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com-
pleted within the Contract Time and that the unpaid
balance will not be adequate to cover the cost of
completing the Work and damages for the anticipated
delay; or
7. Contractor's persistent failure to carry out the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Owner reserves the right to withhold payments to
Contractor, subsequent to Architect's certification of any
payment request, in order to protect Owner from loss due to
any condition described in Section 9.4, Paragraph A,
Subparagraphs 1 through 7. Upon satisfactory resolution of
any such conditions, payments so withheld will be made.
Page 9 of 13
9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the
parameters of Section 9.2 within fifteen (15) days after:
1. Contractor has submitted a progress payment request;
2. Contractor has submitted Conditional Waiver and
Release Upon Progress Payment documents (in content
complying with Utah Code § 38-1-39(4)) executed by
each of the subcontractors performing work and/or
providing materials covered by the Contractor’s progress
payment request; and
3. Owner receives the certified payment request from
Architect.
B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion and
submits its payment request for retained funds and delivers to
the Architect Owner’s form entitled “Contractor’s Substantial
Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety” fully executed by
Contractor and its surety, if any, and provides statutory
Conditional Waiver and Release documents executed by all
subcontractors and suppliers having claim against the
retained funds, Owner will pay any unpaid retention less any
amounts withheld pursuant to Section 9.4 within forty-five (45)
days from the later of (a) the date Owner received
Contractor’s payment request for retained funds and fully
executed Contractor’s Substantial Completion Affidavit and
Consent of Surety, (b) the date a certificate of occupancy is
issued; (c) the date that a building inspector having authority
to issue its own certificate of occupancy does not issue that
certificate but permits occupancy.
. Contractor will immediately notify Architect of such
C. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the
payments in the United States mail addressed to Contractor
or by electronic transfer at Owner’s discretion.
D. Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay
to each Subcontractor the amount paid to Contractor on
account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.
E. Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at
the Project site for review by the Subcontractors.
F. No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in
whole or in part, will be construed to be an acceptance of
defective or improper materials or workmanship.
G. In addition and notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner will also
withhold and retain 5% of payments made to Contractor.
9.6 FINAL PAYMENT
A. Owner will make full and final payment of the Contract Sum
within twenty-one (21) days of the completion of all of the
following requirements:
1. Contractor has submitted its final payment request;
2. Architect has declared to Owner in writing that the Work
is complete; and
3. Architect has received conditional releases or releases
or waivers of lien from all Subcontractors.
B. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcontrac-
tor will constitute a waiver of claims by the payee except for
those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 7
and identified by Contractor in its affidavit as still pending.
C. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner
exceeds the amount due Contractor, Contractor will reimburse
the difference to Owner.
SECTION 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND
PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
Contractor will be responsible to Owner for initiating and
supervising all safety programs in connection with the
performance of the Work.
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A. Contractor will take reasonable precautions to prevent
damage, injury, or loss to:
1. All persons on the site;
2. The Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo-
rated into the Work; and
3. Other property at the site or adjacent to it.
B. Contractor will give notices and comply with applicable laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations, and other lawful require-
ments of public authorities bearing on the safety or protec-
tion of persons and property.
C. Contractor will designate a responsible member of its
organization at the site whose duty will be the prevention of
accidents. This person will be Contractor's onsite
representative unless otherwise designated in writing by
Contractor to Owner and Architect.
10.3 EMERGENCIES
In case of an emergency endangering life or threatening the
safety of any person or property, Contractor may, without
waiting for specific authorization from Architect or Owner,
act at its own discretion to safeguard persons or property.
emergency action and make a full written report to Architect
within five (5) days after the event.
SECTION 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
A. Contractor will obtain the following insurance and provide
evidence thereof as described below prior to
commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days after
signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier:
1. Workers Compensation Insurance.
2. Employers Liability Insurance with minimum limits of
the greater of $500,000 per accident/disease or as
required by the law of the state in which the Project is
located.
3. Commercial General Liability Insurance - ISO Form
CG 00 01 (10/93) or equivalent Occurrence Policy
which will provide primary coverage in the event of any
Occurrence Claim, or Suit, with:
a. Limits of not less than:
1) $2,000, 000 General Aggregate;
2) $2,000, 000 Products - Comp/OPS Aggre-
gate:
3) $1,000, 000 Personal and Advertising Injury:
4) $1,000, 000 Each Occurrence;
5) $50,000 Fire Damage (any one fire); and
6) $5,000 Medical Expense (any one person).
b. Endorsements attached thereto including the
following or their equivalent:
1) ISO Form CG 25 03 (10/93), Amendment Of
Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or
Premises), describing the Agreement and
specifying limits as shown above.
2) ISO Form CG 20 10 (10/93), Additional In-
sured -- Owners, Lessees, Or Contractors
(Form B), naming Owner and Architect as
additional insureds.
4. Automobile Liability Insurance, with:
a. A minimum limit of $1,000,000 Combined Single
Limit per accident; and
b. Coverage applying to "Any Auto."
B. Contractor will provide evidence of such insurance to Owner
as follows:
Page 10 of 13
 1. Deliver to Owner a Certificate of Insurance, on ACORD
25-S (3/93) Form, or equivalent:
a. Listing Owner as a Certificate Holder and Additional
Insured on general liability and any excess liability
policies;
b. Attaching the endorsements set forth above. (Note:
If forms other than ISO forms are used, copies of
the non-ISO forms will be attached to this certifi-
cate);
c. Identifying the Project by specifying individual
project name, on said certificate;
d. Containing a cancellation clause of the certificate
amended to read: “Should any of the above
described policies be cancelled before the
expiration date thereof, the issuing insurer will mail
30 days prior written notice to the certificate holder
names to the left”;
e. Listing the insurance companies providing
coverage (All companies listed must be rated "B+
Class VII" or better in the A.M. Best Company Key
Rating Guide-Property-Casualty, current edition);
and
f. Bearing the name, address and telephone number
of the producer and an original signature of the
authorized representative of the producer.
C. Contractor will maintain, from commencement of the Work,
Insurance coverage required in Section 11.1 as follows:
1. Commercial General Liability Insurance through
expiration of warranty period specified in Section 12.2,
Paragraph B. including completion of any warranty
repairs; and
2. All other insurance through Final Payment.
D. Owner reserves the right to reject any insurance company,
policy, endorsement, or certificate of insurance with or without
cause.
E. The cost of insurance as required above will be the obligation
of Contractor. Contractor will be responsible for payment of
all deductible amounts under all insurance.
F. Owner will provide builders risk insurance for the cost of the
Project. The policy will be written on an all risk basis with
coverage for perils of wind, flood, earthquake, and terrorism,
with exclusions standard for the insurance industry. The
policy will be subject to a $20,000 deductible per occurrence
which will be the responsibility of Contractor and will not be a
reimbursable expense. Owner will provide a copy of the
terms and conditions of the builders risk policy to Contractor
upon Contractor’s request. Contractor will comply with terms,
conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy. The
terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy
shall govern coverage. In addition, when there is a loss which
may be covered by the builders risk insurance policy,
Contractor will comply with the following:
1. Contractor will report the loss immediately to
builders risk commercial insurer by calling 1-877-NEWLOSS
(639-5677) and shall make such further written submissions
as required and otherwise comply with all requirements of the
builders risk policy.
2. Contractor will report the loss immediately to the
Owner.
3. Contractor will immediately notify its general
liability insurance carrier of the loss.
4. Contractor will take all necessary and appropriate
actions to protect the property and individuals from further
loss, harm, and injury. In the event there are damages
resulting from fire or water, restoration shall be performed
only by a certified restoration contractor.
5. To the extent possible, Contractor will preserve
and not disturb the evidence of the loss until after the builders
risk commercial insurer and all interested parties and their
insurance carriers have had the opportunity to view and
investigate the site and loss.
6. Contractor will cooperate with Owner and the
builders risk commercial insurer in the investigation,
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
documentation, and settlement of loss claims, including
without limitation promptly responding to all requests for
information and documentation from the builders risk
commercial insurer and/or Owner.
11.2 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL
PAYMENT BOND
A. Prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days
after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier, Contractor
will furnish to Owner a performance bond and a labor and
material payment bond each in an amount equal to one
hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum as security for
all obligations arising under the Contract Documents. Such
bonds will:
1. Be written on Form AIA Document A312 (1987).
2. Be issued by a surety company or companies licensed
in the state in which the Project is located and holding
valid certificates of authority under Sections 9304 to
9308, Title 31, of the United States Code as
acceptable sureties or reinsurance companies on
federal bonds.
3. Have a penal sum obligation not exceeding the
authorization shown in the current revision of Circular
#670 as issued by the United States Treasury
Department, i.e. “Treasury List”.
4. Be accompanied by a certified copy of the power of
attorney stating the authority of the attorney-in-fact
executing the bonds on behalf of the surety.
B. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety company,
performance bond, or labor and material payment bond with
or without cause.
C. The cost of the bonds as required above will be the
obligation of Contractor.
SECTION 12 - UNCOVERING AND COR-
RECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
Contractor will notify Architect at least twenty-four (24)
hours in advance of performing work that would cover up
work or otherwise make it difficult to perform inspections
required by the Specifications or by applicable governing
authorities. Should any such work be covered without
proper notification having been given to Architect,
Contractor will uncover that work for inspection at its own
expense.
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
A. Contractor will promptly correct any portion of the Work that
is rejected by Architect or which fails to conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed
before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not
fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor will bear the
cost of correcting such rejected Work, including additional
testing and inspection costs, compensation for Architect's
services, and any other expenses made necessary thereby.
B. Contractor will remedy any defects due to faulty materials,
equipment, or workmanship which appear within a period of
one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or
within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by
law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty
required by the Contract Documents. Contractor will pay all
costs of correcting faulty work, including additional
Architect's fees, attorneys’ fees, expert fees, consultant
fees, copy costs, and other expenses when incurred.
C. Nothing in the Contract Documents will be construed to
establish a period of limitation within which Owner may
enforce the obligation of Contractor to comply with the
Contract Documents. The one-year period specified above
Page 11 of 13
 has no relationship to the time within which compliance with
the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to
the time within which proceedings may be commenced to
establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's
obligations.
12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
A. If Owner prefers to accept any portion of the Work not in
conformance with the Contract Documents, Owner may do so
instead of requiring removal and correction of the
nonconforming Work. In that event, the Contract Sum will be
reduced by an amount agreed upon by the parties that reflects
the difference in value to Owner between the Work as
specified and the nonconforming Work. Such adjustment
may consider increased maintenance costs, early replace-
ment costs, increased inefficiency of use, and the like and will
be effective whether or not final payment has been made.
Such adjustment will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant
to Section 7.5.
B. Temporary or trial usage by Owner or Architect of mechanical
devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment, or other work or
materials supplied under the Contract Documents prior to
written acceptance by Architect, will not constitute Owner's
acceptance.
SECTION 13 - RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
13.1 SUBMITTAL OF DISPUTE
In the event there is any dispute arising under this Agreement
which cannot be resolved by agreement between the parties,
either party may submit the dispute with all documentation
upon which it relies to Director of Project Construction,
Physical Facilities Department, 50 East North Temple, 11th
Floor, Salt Lake City, Utah 84150, who will convene a dispute
resolution conference within thirty (30) days. The dispute
resolution conference will constitute settlement negotiations
and any settlement proposal made pursuant to the conference
will not be admissible as evidence of liability. In the event that
the parties do not resolve their dispute pursuant to the dispute
resolution conference, either party may commence legal
action to resolve the dispute. Any such action must be
commenced within six (6) months from the first day of the
dispute resolution conference or be time barred. Submission
of the dispute to the Director as outlined above is a condition
precedent to the right to commence legal action to resolve any
dispute. In the event that either party commences legal action
to adjudicate any dispute without first submitting the dispute to
the Director, the other party will be entitled to obtain an order
dismissing the litigation without prejudice and awarding such
other party any costs and attorneys fees incurred by that party
in obtaining the dismissal, including without limitation copy
costs, and expert and consultant fees and expenses.
13.2 CONTRACTOR TO PROCEED WITH DILIGENCE
Pending final resolution of a dispute hereunder, Contractor
will proceed diligently with the performance of its obligations
under this Agreement.
SECTION 14 - TERMINATION
14.1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR
In the event Owner materially breaches any term of the
Contract Documents, Contractor will promptly give Written
Notice of the breach to Owner. If Owner fails to cure the
breach within ten (10) days of the Written Notice, Contractor
may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to
Owner and recover from Owner the percentage of the
Contract Sum represented by the Work completed on the
Project site as of the date of termination together with any out
of pocket loss Contractor has sustained with respect to
materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
completion of the Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not
be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation or
damages as a result of the termination and hereby waives
any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all
warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out
documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its
possession or control at the time of termination. Without
limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under
section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications
relative to Work provided through the date of termination
survive a termination hereunder.
14.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE
Should Contractor fail to provide Owner with the bonds and
certificates of insurance required by Section 11 within the
time specified therein, make a general assignment for the
benefit of its creditors, fail to apply enough properly skilled
workmen or specified materials to properly prosecute the
Work in accordance with Contractor’s schedule, or other-
wise materially breach any provision of the Contract
Documents, then Owner may, without any prejudice to any
other right or remedy, give Contractor Written Notice
thereof. If Contractor fails to cure its default within ten (10)
days, Owner may terminate the Agreement by giving
Written Notice to Contractor. In such case, Owner may, in
Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of
subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor
and/or take possession of the premises and all materials,
tools, equipment, and appliances thereon, and finish the
Work by whatever method Owner deems expedient.
Contractor will not be entitled to receive any further payment
until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the
Contract Sum exceeds the expense of finishing the Work,
including compensation for additional administrative,
architectural, consultant, and legal services (including
without limitation attorneys fees, expert fees, copy costs,
and other expenses), such excess will be paid to
Contractor. If such expense exceeds the unpaid balance,
Contractor will pay the difference to Owner. Contractor will
provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other
close out documents as well as materials that Contractor
has in its possession or control at the time of termination.
Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations
under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the
specifications relative to Work provided through the date of
termination survive a termination hereunder.
14.3 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
Notwithstanding any other provision contained in the
Contract Documents, Owner may, without cause and in its
absolute discretion, terminate the Agreement at any time.
In the event of such termination, Contractor will be entitled
to recover from Owner the percentage of the Contract Sum
equal to the percentage of the Work which Architect
determines has been completed on the Project site as of the
date of termination together with any out of pocket loss
Contractor has sustained with respect to materials and
equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion
of the Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled
to unearned profits or any other compensation as a result of
the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor.
Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built,
inspection, and other close out documents as well as
materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at
the time of termination. Owner may, in Owner’s sole
discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other
contractual rights of Contractor. Without limitation,
Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under section 3.14
as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to
Work provided through the date of termination survive a
termination hereunder.
SECTION 15 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
Page 12 of 13
15.1 GOVERNING LAW
The parties acknowledge that the Contract Documents have
substantial connections to the State of Utah. The Contract
Documents will be deemed to have been made, executed,
and delivered in Salt Lake City, Utah. To the maximum extent
permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters
related to their creation and performance will be governed by
and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Utah,
excluding conflicts of law rules; and (ii) all disputes arising
from or related to the Contract Documents will be decided
only in a state or federal court located in Salt Lake City, Utah
and not in any other court or state. Toward that end, the
parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and
federal courts located in Salt Lake City, Utah and waive any
other venue to which they might be entitled by virtue of
domicile, habitual residence, place of business, or otherwise.
15.2 NO WAIVER
No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect, or Contractor
will constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under
the Contract Documents, nor will such action or failure to act
constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach
thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
15.3 RULE OF CONSTRUCTION
Owner and Contractor agree that the Contract Documents will
be deemed to have been drafted by both Owner and
Contractor and will not be construed against either Owner or
Contractor because of authorship.
15.4 ENFORCEMENT
In the event either party commences legal action to enforce or
rescind any term of the Contract Documents, the prevailing
END OF DOCUMENT
BYU-Idaho Revision 02 June 2013
party will be entitled to recover its attorneys fees and costs,
including without limitation all copy costs and expert and
consultant fees and expenses, incurred in that action and
on all appeals, from the other party.
15.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Owner and Architect have the right to have tests made
when they deem it necessary. Tests conducted by Owner
or Architect will be paid for by Owner. Should a test reveal
a failure of the Work to meet Contract Document
requirements, the cost of the test as well as subsequent
tests related to the failure necessary to determine
compliance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by
Owner, with the cost thereof deducted from the Contract
Sum by Modification.
B. Tests will be made in accordance with recognized stan-
dards by a competent, independent testing laboratory.
Materials found defective or not in conformity with Contract
Document requirements will be promptly replaced or
repaired at the expense of Contractor.
C. Owner and Architect have the right to obtain samples of
materials to be used in the Work and to test samples for
determining whether they meet Contract Document require-
ments. Samples required for testing will be furnished by
Contractor and selected as directed by Architect. Samples
may be required from the sample's source, point of
manufacture, point of delivery, or point of installation at
Architect's discretion. Samples not required as a Submittal
in the Specifications will be paid for by Owner. Should tests
reveal a failure of the Sample to meet the Contract
Document requirements, Contractor will provide other
Samples that comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Page 13 of 13
Blank Page
 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
FIXED SUM (U.S.)

ITEM 1 - GENERAL

1. Conditions of the Contract apply to each Division of the Specifications.

2. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to Divisions 02 through 33 of the Specifications.

ITEM 2 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGE AMOUNTS:

1. The amount of liquidated damages to be paid to the Contractor for delays under General
Conditions Section 7.3, Paragraph B is $2,000 per day.

2. The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in
Substantial Completion of the Work under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph A is $2,000
per day.

3. The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in
completing work itemized on the Substantial Completion Certificate under General Conditions
Article 8.3, Paragraph B is $300 per day.

ITEM 3 - PERMITS

1. Section 3.6, Paragraph B add the following:

B. Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of the permits by submitting a copy of the receipt
to the Owner. Payment shall be made by check to the Contractor without processing a
Change Order.

ITEM 4 - MISCELLANEOUS CHANGES IN GENERAL CONDITIONS

1.1 - COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION & COMPLETION OF THE WORK

A. The Contractor shall be required to commence work January 1, 2015 or promptly after receipt of
the contract from the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall prosecute the work diligently so as to complete it within the time limit allowed
in this document.

C. The Contractor agrees to complete this work required by the Contract on or before midnight
July 31, 2016.

D. Time is hereby expressly declared to be of the essence of the Contract.

2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER

D. Contractor shall submit all project documentation and correspondence using the owners Project
Management Software, MasterWorks by Aurigo®. Including, but not limited to; RFI’s, payment
applications, inspection requests, logs, minutes, submittals; or any and all documentation as
directed by owner.

THE FOLLOWING ADDS TO SECTION 3.7 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS:

3.7 – CONTRACTOR’S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE

B. The Superintendent shall be present full-time at the Project site during the progress of the work.
BYU-Idaho Rev 02 August 2014 Page 1 of 7
THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SECTION 7.1 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS:

7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN INSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR

ARCHITECT TO CONTRACTOR

A. The contract language contained in the Supplementary General Conditions take precedence over
all other change order pricing contract provisions in the contract documents. It is understood that
these contract provisions will govern the pricing and administration of all change order proposals
to be submitted by the General Contractor and/or the Trade Contractors and/or the Subcontractors
and/or all other lower tier sub-subcontractors (all referred to as “Contractor”). In the event of a
conflict between the other contract documents used for the project, these change order pricing
contract provisions shall govern.

B. Contractor agrees that it will incorporate the provisions into all agreements with lower tier
Contractors. It is understood that these change order pricing provisions apply to all types of
contracts and/or subcontracts specifically including lump sum (or fixed price contracts), unit price
contracts, and/or cost plus contracts. It is further understood that these change order provisions
will apply to all methods of change order pricing specifically including lump sum change order
proposals, unit price change order proposals, and cost plus change order proposals.

C. Whenever change order proposals to adjust the contract price become necessary, the Owner will
have the right to select the method of pricing to be used by the contractor in accordance with the
pricing provisions. The options will be (1) lump sum change order proposal, (2) unit price change
order proposal, or (3) cost plus change order proposal as defined in the following provisions.

1. Lump Sum Change Order Proposals: The Owner will require itemized change
orders on all change order proposals from the Contractor, subcontractors, and sub-
subcontractors regardless of tier. Details to be submitted will include detailed line
item estimates showing detailed materials quantity take-offs, material prices by
item and related labor hour pricing information and extensions (by line item or by
drawing as applicable.)

2. Labor: Estimated labor hours shall include hours only for those workmen and
working foremen directly involved in performing the change order work.
Supervision above the level of working foremen (such as general foremen,
superintendent, project manager, etc.) is considered to be included in the Markup
Percentages as outlined in paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7.

3. Labor Burden: Labor burden allowable in change orders shall be defined as

employer's net actual cost of payroll taxes (FICA, Medicare, SUTA, FUTA), net
actual cost for employer's cost of union benefits (or other usual and customary
fringe benefits if the employees are not union employees), and net actual cost to
employer for worker's compensation insurance taking into consideration
adjustments for experience modifiers, premium discounts, dividends, rebates,
expense constants, assigned risk pool costs, net cost reductions due to policies
with deductibles for self-insured losses, assigned risk rebates, etc. Contractor
shall reduce their standard payroll tax percentages to properly reflect the effective
cost reduction due to the estimated impact of the annual maximum wages subject
to payroll taxes.

4. Material: Estimated material change order costs shall reflect the Contractor's
reasonably anticipated net actual cost for the purchase of the material needed for
the change order work. Estimated material costs shall reflect cost reductions
available to the Contractor due to “non-Cash” discounts, trade discounts, free
material credits, and/or volume rebates. Price quotations from material suppliers
must be itemized with unit prices for each specific item to be purchased. "Lot
pricing" quotations will not be considered sufficient substantiating detail.

5. Equipment: Allowable change order estimated costs may include appropriate

BYU-Idaho Rev 02 August 2014 Page 2 of 7

 amounts for rental of major equipment specifically needed to perform the change
order work (defined as tools and equipment with an individual purchase cost of
more than $750). For contractor owned equipment, the "bare" equipment rental
rates allowed to be used for pricing change order proposals shall be 75% of the
monthly rate listed in the most current publication of The AED Green Book divided
by 176 to arrive at a maximum hourly rate to be applied to the hours the equipment
is used performing the change order work. Further, for contractor owned
equipment the aggregate equipment rent charges for any single piece of
equipment used in all change order work shall be limited to 50% of the fair market
value of the piece of equipment when the first change order is priced involving
usage of the piece of equipment. Fuel necessary to operate the equipment will be
considered as a separate direct cost associated with the change order work.

6. Maximum Markup Percentage Allowable on Self-Performed Work: With

respect to pricing change orders, the maximum Markup Percentage Fee to be
paid to any Contractor (regardless of tier) on self-performed work shall be a single
markup percentage not-to-exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the net direct cost of
(1) direct labor and allowable labor burden costs applicable to the change order
or extra work; (2) the net cost of material and installed equipment incorporated
into the change or extra work, and (3) net rental cost of major equipment and
related fuel costs necessary to complete the change in the Work.

The markup computed using the above formula shall be considered to be

allocated 2/3 to cover applicable overhead costs directly attributable to the field
overhead costs related to processing, supervising and performing, the change
order work, and the remaining 1/3 to cover home office overhead costs and profit.

7. Maximum Markup Percentages Allowable on Work Performed by Lower Tier

Contractors: With respect to pricing the portion of change order proposals
involving work performed by lower tier contractors, the maximum Markup
Percentage Fee allowable to the Contractor supervising the lower tier contractor's
work shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the net of all approved change order
work performed by all subcontractors combined for any particular change order
proposal.

The markup computed using the above formula shall be considered to be allocated
2/3 to cover applicable overhead costs directly attributable to the field overhead
costs related to processing, supervising and performing the change order work,
and the remaining 1/3 to cover home office overhead costs and profit.

8. No Markup on Bonds and Liability Insurance Costs: Change Order cost

adjustments due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if
applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage Fee.

9. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further

clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage Fee is intended to cover the
Contractor's profit and all indirect costs associated with the change order work.
Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage Fee include, but are not
limited to: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense
of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating,
engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting,
data processing or other administrative expenses; shop drawings; permits; auto
insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; and warranty expense
costs. The cost for the use of small tools is also to be considered covered by the
Markup Percentage Fee. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment
(power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750.

10. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the
markup percentages referenced in the preceding paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7 will apply
to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change
order, the credit will be computed by applying the sliding scale percentages as

BYU-Idaho Rev 02 August 2014 Page 3 of 7

 outlined in paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7 so that a deductive change order would be
computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances
where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and
deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied
to the net amount.

11. Contingency: In no event will any lump sum or percentage amounts for
"contingency" be allowed to be added as a separate line item in change order
estimates. Unknowns attributable to labor hours will be accounted for when
estimating labor hours anticipated to perform the work. Unknowns attributable to
material scrap and waste will be estimated as part of material costs.

12. Change Order Proposal Time and Change Directives: The Contractor's
proposals for changes in the contract amount or time shall be submitted within
seven (7) calendar days of the Owner's request, unless the Owner extends such
period of time due to the circumstances involved. If such proposals are not
received in a timely manner, if the proposals are not acceptable to Owner, or if the
changed work should be started immediately to avoid damage to the project or
costly delay, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the changes
without waiting for the Contractor's proposal or for the formal change order to be
issued. In the case of an unacceptable Contractor proposal, the Owner may direct
the Contractor to proceed with the changed work on a cost-plus basis with an
agreed upon "not-to-exceed" price for the work to be performed. Such directions
to the Contractor by the Owner shall be confirmed in writing by a "Notice to Proceed
on Changes" letter within seven (7) calendar days. The cost or credit, and or time
extensions will be determined by negotiations as soon as practical thereafter and
incorporated in a Change Order to the Contract.

THE FOLLOWING ADDS SECTION 7.9 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS:

7.9 Owner’s Right to Audit

A. Liability Insurance and Bonds: In the event the Contractor has been required to furnish
comprehensive general liability insurance and/or performance and/or payment bonds as
part of the base contract price, a final contract change order will be processed to account
for the Contractor's net increase or decrease in comprehensive general liability insurance
costs and/or bond premium costs associated with change orders to Contractor's base
contract price.

B. Accurate Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor (subcontractor or sub-sub

contractor) agrees that it is responsible for submitting accurate cost and pricing data to
support its Lump Sum Change and/or Cost Plus Change Order Proposals or other contract
price adjustments under the contract. Contractor further agrees to submit change order
proposals with cost and pricing data which is accurate, complete, current, and in
accordance with the terms of the contract with respect to pricing of change orders.

C. Right to Verify Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor, subcontractor and sub-
sub-contractor agrees that any designated Owner's representative will have the right to
examine (copy or scan) the records of the Contractor, subcontractor or sub-sub
contractor’s records (during the contract period and up to three years after final payment
is made on the contract) to verify the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data
used to price all change order proposals and/or claims. Contractor agrees that if the Owner
determines the cost and pricing data submitted (whether approved or not) was inaccurate,
incomplete, not current, or not in compliance with the terms of the contract regarding pricing
of change orders, an appropriate contract price adjustment will be made. Such post-
approval contract price adjustments will apply to all levels of contractors and/or
subcontractors and to all types of change order proposals specifically including lump sum
change orders, unit price change orders, and cost-plus change orders.

BYU-Idaho Rev 02 August 2014 Page 4 of 7

D. Requirements for Detailed Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor,
subcontractor agrees to provide and require all Subcontractors and sub-subcontractors to
provide a breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost information as outlined in
this Exhibit "A". This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and
labor burden related to change order work. It is intended that this information represent an
accurate estimate of the Contractor's actual labor and labor burden cost components. This
information is not intended to establish fixed billing or change order pricing labor rates.
However, at the time change orders are priced, the submitted cost data for labor rates may
be used to price change order work. The accuracy of any such agreed upon labor cost
components used to price change orders will be subject to later audit. Approved change
order amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor cost
components if the agreed upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate.

THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SECTION 9.5 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS:

9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the parameters of Section 9.2 within fifteen (15)
days after:
1. Contractor has submitted a progress payment request;
2. Contractor has submitted Conditional Waiver and Release Upon Progress Payment documents
executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by
the Contractor’s progress payment request; and
3. Owner receives the certified payment request from Architect.

B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion and submits its payment request for retained
funds and delivers to the Architect Owner’s form entitled “Contractor’s Substantial Completion
Affidavit and Consent of Surety” fully executed by Contractor and its surety, if any, and provides
statutory Conditional Waiver and Release documents executed by all subcontractors and suppliers
having claim against the retained funds, Owner will pay any unpaid retention less any amounts
withheld pursuant to Section 9.4 within forty-five (45) days from the later of (a) the date Owner
received Contractor’s payment request for retained funds and fully executed Contractor’s Substantial
Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety, (b) the date a certificate of occupancy is issued; (c) the
date that a building inspector having authority to issue its own certificate of occupancy does not
issue that certificate but permits occupancy.

C. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the payments in the United States mail
addressed to Contractor or by electronic transfer at Owner’s discretion.

D. Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay to each Subcontractor the amount
paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.

E. Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at the Project site for review by the Subcon-
tractors.

F. No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in whole or in part, will be construed to be
an acceptance of defective or improper materials or workmanship.

G. In addition and notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner will also withhold and retain 5% of payments
made to Contractor. These retention funds will be held in an interest bearing account.

THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SECTION 9.6 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS:

BYU-Idaho Rev 02 August 2014 Page 5 of 7

9.6 FINAL PAYMENT

A. Owner will make full and final payment of the Contract Sum within thirty (30) days of the completion
of all of the following requirements:
1. Contractor has submitted its final payment request;
2. Contractor has submitted Waiver and Release Upon Final Payment documents executed by
each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the
Contractor’s final payment request; and
3. Architect has declared to Owner in writing that the Work is complete.

B. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcontractor will constitute a waiver of claims by
the payee except for those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 7 and identified by
Contractor in its affidavit as still pending.

C. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner exceeds the amount due Contractor,
Contractor will reimburse the difference to Owner.

THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SUB-SECTION F OF SECTION 11.1 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS:

11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

F. Owner will provide builders risk insurance for the cost of the Project. The policy will be written on an
all risk basis with coverage for perils of wind, flood, earthquake, and terrorism, with exclusions
standard for the insurance industry. The policy will be subject to a $17,000 deductible per
occurrence which will be the responsibility of Contractor and will not be a reimbursable expense.
Owner will provide a copy of the terms and conditions of the builders risk policy to Contractor upon
Contractor’s request. Contractor will comply with terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders
risk policy. The terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy shall govern coverage. In
addition, when there is a loss which may be covered by the builders risk insurance policy, Contractor
will comply with the following:
1. Contractor will report the loss immediately to builders risk commercial insurer by calling 1-877-
NEWLOSS (639-5677) and shall make such further written submissions as required and otherwise
comply with all requirements of the builders risk policy.
2. Contractor will report the loss immediately to the Owner.
3. Contractor will immediately notify its general liability insurance carrier of the loss.
4. Contractor will take all necessary and appropriate actions to protect the property and individuals
from further loss, harm, and injury. In the event there are damages resulting from fire or water,
restoration shall be performed only by a certified restoration contractor.
5. To the extent possible, Contractor will preserve and not disturb the evidence of the loss until after
the builders risk commercial insurer and all interested parties and their insurance carriers have had
the opportunity to view and investigate the site and loss.
6. Contractor will cooperate with Owner and the builders risk commercial insurer in the investigation,
documentation, and settlement of loss claims, including without limitation promptly responding to all
requests for information and documentation from the builders risk commercial insurer and/or Owner.

THE FOLLOWING ADDS SECTION 11.2 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS:

11.2.A PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

5. BYU-Idaho does not require Labor, Material Payment and/or Performance Bonds on Bid
Proposals under $40,000.

BYU-Idaho Rev 02 August 2014 Page 6 of 7

THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SECTION 15.1 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS:

15.1 GOVERNING LAW

A. To the maximum extent permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters related to their
creation and performance will be governed by and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State
of Idaho, excluding conflicts of law rules; and (ii) all disputes arising from or related to the Contract
Documents will be decided only in a state or federal court located in Pocatello, Idaho and not in any
other court or state. Toward that end, the parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and
federal courts located in Pocatello, Idaho and waive any other venue to which they might be entitled
by virtue of domicile, habitual residence, place of business, or otherwise.

END OF DOCUMENT

BYU-Idaho Rev 02 August 2014 Page 7 of 7

Blank Page
 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1

TESTING FIRM’S SRVICES

1.1 ESSENTIAL SERVICES REQUIRED:

1.1.1 Services will consist of field and laboratory quality control testing services on
BYU-Idaho Projects as circumstances, special qualifications, or Building Codes
(Chapter 17) may require.

1.1.2 The types of services required may be anticipated to be soils tests pertaining to
compaction, concrete, quality control, special masonry inspection, visual welding
inspection, structural steel and bolting inspection, spray on fireproofing, and
asphalt paving quality control and all other tests that may become necessary and
as listed in your proposal.

1.1.3 The ability to respond to calls for testing, with 24 hours notice, is required.

1.2 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES:

1.2.1 The TESTING FIRM agrees to endeavor to strictly conform to and be bound by
budgetary considerations and memoranda of policy furnished to it by the
OWNER and further agrees to perform work in strict compliance with all
applicable laws, codes and industry standards.

1.2.2 The TESTING FIRM agrees to provide qualified and/or certified technicians for
the performance of the work under this agreement.

1.2.3 The TESTING FIRM will produce written test results and distribute them per
OWNER instructions. Test results shall be available within 24 hours of the test
performed.

1.2.4 The TESTING FIRM will provide general liability insurance in the amount of
$1,000,000.

1.2.5 All testing requested by the Contractor for his use and convenience is not part of
the Agreement.

1.2.6 The TESTING FIRM will furnish to the OWNER documentation for all failed
tests and their associated costs.

4/2009 Special Inspections General Conditions

 ARTICLE 2

THE OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

2.1 The OWNER shall provide full information regarding the testing requirements for
each project. Testing Services will be described for each separate project,
including the name and location of the project, the testing services’ budget, and
the testing services’ schedule, and the name of the OWNER’s representative, in
an Authorization to Proceed, issued by the OWNER.

2.2 The OWNER shall designate a representative authorized to act in his behalf with
respect to the project. Coordinate your testing services through the contact person
listed on the Authorization To Proceed.

2.3 The OWNER shall furnish required information required as expeditiously as

necessary for the orderly progress of the work and the TESTING FIRM shall be
entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness thereof.

ARTICLE 3

PAYMENTS TO THE TESTING FIRM

3.1 Payments under this agreement shall be made bi-monthly upon presentation of the
TESTING FIRM’s statement of services rendered.

3.2.1 The TESTING FIRM’s statement of services shall follow the outline of the
Proposal including any amendments to the proposal. Submit one (1) original.
Include an itemized statement including names of employees, hours worked and
hourly rates, and/or the amount of each test.

ARTICLE 4

TESTING FIRM’S ACCOUNTING RECORDS

4.1 Records of the TESTING FIRM’s time, consultants, and reimbursable expenses
pertaining to the project shall be kept on a generally recognized accounting basis
and shall be available to the OWNER upon request.

4/2009 Special Inspections General Conditions

 ARTICLE 5

TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT

5.1 This Agreement may be terminated by either party upon ten (10) days’ written
notice should the other party fail substantially to perform in accordance with its
terms through no fault of the other. In the event of termination due to fault of
others than the TESTING FIRM, the TESTING FIRM shall be paid for its time,
cost of materials, plus allowable expenses for services performed to termination
date.

ARTICLE 6

SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

6.1 The OWNER and the TESTING FIRM, respectively, bind themselves, their
partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party to this
Agreement and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of
such other party with respect to all covenants of this Agreement. Neither the
OWNER nor the TESTING FIRM shall assign, sublet or transfer any interest in
this Agreement.

4/2009 Special Inspections General Conditions

Blank Page
 SOV

SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Job: Science & Technology Building
Date:
Scheduled Revised Previous This Total Balance to
Spec # Description % Comp. Change Order
Value Contract Months Month Earned Complete

Totals

Page 1 of 1
Blank Page
APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT Page one
TO :
PROJECT: APPLICATION NO.:
APPLICATION DATE:
PERIOD TO:
FROM: REVISION NO:
REVISION DATE:
CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Application is made for Payment, as shown below.

CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY Continuation sheet attached.

Change Orders approved in previous months: 1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM $0
TOTAL: 2. NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDER $0

Approved this Month ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 +/- 2) $0
$ - $ - 4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE $0
5. LESS RETENTION @ 5% $0
Net change by C.O. this month $ - $ - 6. TOTAL COMPLETED LESS RETENTION 0

The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the 7. LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS
Contractor's knowledge, information & belief, the work covered 8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE (Line 6 less Line7) $0
by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance 9. BALANCE TO FINISH (Line 3 less line 4) $0

with the Contract Documents, and that all amounts have been paid
by the contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for
Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and
that current payment shown herein is now due.
CONTRACTOR APPROVAL
BY: (DATE)

ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT AMOUNT CERTIFIED

In accordance with the contract Documents based on on-site (Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied for.)
observations and the data comprising the above application, ARCHITECT:
the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the BY: DATE:
Architect's knowledge, information and belief the Work has
progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to
accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are
is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract.
OWNER APPROVAL
BY: DATE:
Blank Page
 Table of Contents

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .............................................................................................................1

INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................................................3
AUTHORIZATION .........................................................................................................................3
PROJECT DESCRIPTION, PURPOSE OF EVALUATION, AND SCOPE OF WORK..............3
DESIGN CRITERIA .......................................................................................................................4
SITE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................................4
FIELD STUDY ................................................................................................................................6
SUBSURFACE WATER AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS...................................................6
LABORATORY TESTING.............................................................................................................7
FINDINGS AND RESULTS ...........................................................................................................7
RECOMMENDATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS ..........................................................................8
General .....................................................................................................................................8
Temporary Excavations ............................................................................................................8
Utility Trenches ........................................................................................................................9
Site Grading ..............................................................................................................................9
Site Preparation .................................................................................................................9
Structural Fill ....................................................................................................................9
Wet Weather/Soil Construction ......................................................................................11
Exterior Grading .............................................................................................................11
Foundations ............................................................................................................................12
Bearing Strata..................................................................................................................12
Design Criteria ................................................................................................................13
Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade ...........................................................................................13
Exterior Concrete Slabs on Grade (Sidewalks, Curbs, Gutters, Misc.)..................................14
Sliding Resistance of Soils .....................................................................................................14
Lateral Earth Pressures ...........................................................................................................15
Seismic Hazard Concerns, Liquefaction, Seismicity, and Faulting .......................................16
Water Soluble Sulfates ...........................................................................................................17
Topsoil ....................................................................................................................................17
LIMITATIONS ..............................................................................................................................17
REFERENCES ..............................................................................................................................18
APPENDIX ....................................................................................................................................19

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 1

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Mr. Jedd A. Walker Campus Architect December 28, 2012

Brigham Youg University - Idaho Project ID Number: IF12060A
450 S. Physical Plant Way #213
Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205
Phone: (208) 496-2663
RE: Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation
Agriscience Facility
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg, Idaho
Dear Mr. Walker:

Strata, A Professional Services Corporation (STRATA), is pleased to present our authorized

Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation for the proposed Brigham Young University – Idaho (BYU-I)
Agriscience Facility to be located on Sage Street in Rexburg, Idaho. Our Geotechnical Engineering
Evaluation’s purpose was to explore the subsurface conditions in the proposed development area and
provide geotechnical recommendations to assist project planning, design and construction. The
following report summarizes our field and laboratory test results and presents our geotechnical
engineering opinions and recommendations.

The proposed development area was previously developed for recreational use and, as such,
was underlain by surficial fill and topsoil. Prior to geotechnical exploration surficial fill was removed to
bedrock in the building footprint areas. The following report provides specific geotechnical
recommendations for preparing the site, including, earthwork activities, foundation design and
construction

The project design, owner, and construction team must read, understand and implement this
report in its entirety. Portions of the report cannot be relied upon individually without the supporting text
of remaining sections, appendices and plates. Our opinion is the success of the proposed construction
will depend on following the report recommendations, good construction practices, and providing the
necessary construction monitoring, testing and consultation to verify that work has been constructed as
recommended. We recommend STRATA be retained to provide monitoring, testing, and consultation
services to verify our report recommendations are being followed.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 3
INTRODUCTION

Strata, A Professional Services Corporation (STRATA), is pleased to provide our Geotechnical

Engineering Evaluation for the proposed BYU-I Agriscience Facility planned to be constructed on the
BYU-I campus in Rexburg, Idaho. The proposed development site is located between Center Street
and First West Street, running parallel to Sage Street. Our Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation’s
purpose was to explore the subsurface soil conditions at the project site and to prepare geotechnical
recommendations to assist the project team in project planning, design and construction. We
accomplished our services referencing our authorized geotechnical Proposal dated November 20,
2012.

AUTHORIZATION

On December 10, 2012 we received authorization from Mr. Kehl Murray to proceed with exploration
scheduled to begin on December 11, 2012.

PROJECT DESCRIPTION, PURPOSE OF EVALUATION, AND SCOPE OF WORK

We understand BYU-I plans to construct an Agriscience facility, consisting of 2 buildings, a large

animal building and an academic building. The large animal building and academic buildings are
planned to be have an approximate 35,000 and 32,000 square foot footprint, respectively. Both
buildings are planned to be supported by shallow spread footings with concrete slab-on-grade. The
academic building is planned to be 3 levels, with the lower level partially below grade. The large animal
building is planned to be a single level.

To accomplish our evaluation, STRATA performed the following services:

1. Coordinated exploration with the Digline Utility Notification Center to help reduce the potential for
damage to existing utilities. We also coordinated exploration with BYU-I.

2. Observed 10 exploratory borings, 5 within the footprint of each new building (See Plate 1).
Exploratory borings extended 10.5 to 16.0 feet below existing grades. A minimum of ten feet of
rock coring was accomplished for each boring. Our field engineer visually described, classified and
logged rock encountered referencing the International Society of Rock Mechanics classification
methods for rock.

3. Performed laboratory tests with reference to ASTM International (ASTM) procedures. We utilized
these laboratory results to help characterize engineering parameters used in our design.

4. Performed engineering analyses in order to provide geotechnical design and earthwork construction
recommendations. We worked with BYU-I development staff and the project design team to

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 4
coordinate necessary elements of design and construction into a specific discussion of the related
soil and geologic conditions. Our engineering analyses provides geotechnical recommendations
for:

Temporary Excavations
Utility Trenches
Site Grading
Foundations
Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade
Exterior Concrete Slabs on Grade
Sliding Resistance of Soils
Lateral Earth Pressures
Seismic Hazard Concerns, Liquefaction, Seismicity, and Faulting
Water Soluble Sulfates
Topsoil

5. Prepared and provided 3 copies of our final report of geotechnical findings and opinions including
exploration logs and laboratory test results.

DESIGN CRITERIA

Based on information provided by BYU-I, we understand that wall loads will be a maximum of
10,000 pounds per linear foot and column loads will be a maximum of 425,000 pounds. We understand
that the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) will be used as the governing building code for design
and construction. We also understand that no additional parking will be constructed as part of this
project as outlined in the Request for Proposal – Addendum #001, as such no, recommendations have
been provided.
We understand that Interior concrete slabs on grade are planned to be 4 inches thick and
constructed without control or construction joints and are reinforced with #4 bars at 18 inches on center
each way or 7.5 lbs of high volume synthetic fibers per cubic yard of concrete. We also understand that
typically a 15 mil vapor retarder is placed directly under the concrete with 4 inches of aggregate base
below the vapor retarder.
Field and laboratory testing has been completed referencing applicable ASTM standards.

SITE CONDITIONS

The proposed construction area is located on the BYU-I campus in Rexburg, Idaho (43° 48’
52.08” N. 111° 47’ 6.83” W., EL. 4,943 feet). The project site is located immediately south of Sage
Street, between First West Street, to the west, and Center Street, to the east. The site is bordered to
the south by an existing parking lot and a soil stockpile.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 5
The proposed construction site had been previously occupied by athletic fields. Prior to
exploration, the athletic fields were removed and the construction site was stripped of soil and
vegetation to bedrock in the structure footprint areas. At the time of exploration, the site consisted
primarily of exposed basalt bedrock including cobble and boulder sized fragments. Due to previous soil
removal significant topsoil and vegetation was not observed.
The project site slopes from east to west with an elevation change of approximately 35 feet.
Generally site storm water will migrate to the northwest corner of the site. The project site is not in a
flood plain. During exploration no shallow groundwater was evident and local well data indicates
groundwater will not be encountered during construction. Local guidelines for frost depth are 36
inches below grade. We provide a site plan of the project site on Plate 1, Boring Location Plan. The
following photograph exhibits existing site conditions at the time of our exploration:

Photograph 1: View of northwest corner of site.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 6
Geologic research indicates the project site is composed of the lava flows of the Snake River
Group. The lava flows consist of basalts with minor amounts of interlayered coarse to fine grained
sediments and basaltic pyroclastic deposits. Deposits originate from the Pleistocene and Pliocene
epochs (Mitchell, 1979).

FIELD STUDY

STRATA accomplished subsurface exploration on November 11, 2012 via 10 exploratory

borings extending 10.5 to 16.0 feet below the existing ground surface (BGS). The approximate
exploration locations are illustrated on Plate 1 which also delineates the proposed development as
currently designed by BYU-I and the project team. Borings were established in the field by a handheld
GPS unit.
We performed the exploratory borings using a CME 850 track mounted drill, equipped with
hollow stem augers and rock coring bit. Hollow stem auguring was not necessary due to the exposed
bedrock surface. We collected rock samples from borings using wireline coring methods. Rock core
samples were visually described and logged during exploration. Our field engineer visually evaluated,
described rock encountered in each boring and logged the subsurface profile referencing The
International Society of Rock Mechanics classification methods for rock and ASTM standards.
We provide individual boring logs and a brief USCS explanation in Appendix A to help
interpret the terms on the boring logs. At the conclusion of our subsurface evaluation, borings were
backfilled level with the existing ground surface with soil cuttings and bentonite.

SUBSURFACE WATER AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

We advanced 10 total borings, 5 in the footprint of each building. At the boring locations, we
generally observed, basalt rock from the surface to the extent of exploration. The basalt ranged from
slightly vesicular to scoraceous. Soil inclusions, highly weathered sections and iron staining were also
encountered during exploration.
Rock quality designation (RQD) was estimated in the field in general accordance with ASTM
methods. RQD ranged between 26% and 94%, indicating rock qualities ranging from poor to excellent.
The majority of RQD values, however, indicated rock quality of being fair to excellent. Further, the intact
basalt rock is generally strong to very strong, with compressive strength ranging from 5,400 psi to 7,875
psi.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 7
We did not encounter groundwater during exploration. In the project vicinity, groundwater levels
are influenced primarily by development in the project vicinity, stormwater and local aquifers. Although
groundwater was not encountered a review of local well log data indicates groundwater is unlikely to be
encountered during construction. It should be noted, however, that groundwater can become perched
on impermeable layers of basalt.
Significant subsurface variations may exist between exploration locations and in the proposed
development area. Specifically, although not encountered during our exploration, significant voids may
exist within the basalt rock. Boring exploration only allow us to observe a small portion of the site
subsurface conditions. Subsurface variations in the proposed development area may not be apparent
until construction. Where such variations exist, they may impact the opinions and recommendations
presented in this report, as well as construction timing and costs. We provide specific soil descriptions
and contacts on the boring logs in Appendix A, Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) & Exploratory
Boring Logs.

LABORATORY TESTING

We returned samples collected in the field to our laboratory for further classification and testing
and accomplished laboratory testing referencing ASTM International procedures. We developed our
laboratory testing program for this project to evaluate basalt rock uniaxial compressive strength since
our exploration did not encounter significant amounts of soil.
We present index laboratory test results on boring logs in Appendix A and the laboratory testing
summary and engineering testing is presented as Appendix B. We will retain soil samples for 90 days
and discard after this time period unless we are notified to store the samples for an extended period of
time.

FINDINGS AND RESULTS

From the field exploration results, laboratory testing and engineering analysis, we have
identified the primary geotechnical issues associated with the planned BYU-I Agriscience Facility as the
basalt bedrock. Excavation of basalt will be difficult and may require blasting if design grades require
greater depths for foundations and utility trenches. Irregular bearing surfaces will require structural fill
placement and leveling to facilitate concrete placement and to provide a uniform bearing surface.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 8
Our report specifically outlines our opinions and recommendations regarding these soil
conditions and relies on geotechnical continuity, communication between project team members
specific to risk and cost-based decisions, and good construction practices to achieve the desired
project outcome for BYU-I.

RECOMMENDATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS

General
We present the following geotechnical recommendations to assist planning, design and
construction of the proposed BYU-I Agriscience facility in Rexburg, Idaho as illustrated on Plate 1
attached to this report. This report also provides specific foundation and other geotechnical design
criteria for the building development which the structural and civil design and construction teams must
review to verify the applicability to the planned structure. We base our recommendations on the results
of our field evaluation, laboratory testing, our experience with similar soil conditions and our
understanding of the proposed construction. If design plans change or if the subsurface conditions
encountered during construction vary from those observed during our field evaluation, we must be
notified to review the report recommendations and make necessary revisions.

Temporary Excavations
Based on exploration results, it appears the near surface basalt bedrock encountered in
exploratory borings will be extremely difficult to excavate with conventional equipment. If excavations
are performed in the existing bedrock they should comply with Occupational Health and Safety Act
(OSHA) guidelines.
Excavations in any subsequent fill placement can cave and slough and must be sloped back in
accordance with Occupational Health and Safety Act (OSHA) guidelines. Excavation through any fill
placement should be temporarily sloped at 1.5H:1V (horizontal to vertical). Due to the potential for
varying soil conditions at the time of construction, we recommend earthwork contractors evaluate each
excavation configuration specific to OSHA guidelines and to seek appropriate professional guidance to
ensure excavation safety and stability.
The earthwork contractor should be prepared to perform rock excavation and/or blasting. It would
be advisable that a unit rate be established between the contractor and the owner for rock excavations
and/or blasting if these services become necessary.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 9
Utility Trenches
Structural fill for backfilling utility trenches and all bedding should conform to section 305.21
Type I bedding material in the Idaho Standards for Public Works Construction (ISPWC), except that all
trench backfill must be placed and compacted to the structural fill requirements presented herein.
Loose soil must be removed from the base of utility trenches prior to placing pipe bedding. In addition,
if water is encountered, it must be removed from the base of the utility trench before placing pipe
bedding. We recommend utility pipes be placed on at least 4 inches of bedding conforming to section
305.3 of the ISPWC placed over undisturbed native bedrock, structural fill or otherwise supported
according to the pipe manufacturer’s specifications and ISPWC requirements.
After bedding the pipe, place structural fill and compact it from the pipe invert to 1 foot above the
top of the pipe with tamping bars and/or plate compactors to render the backfill in a firm and unyielding
condition. Thoroughly place and compact bedding below pipe haunches or the zone between the pipe
invert and the spring line. To accomplish backfilling, the distance between the side of the pipe at the
spring line and the trench wall should be at least 12 inches. The remainder of the utility trench should
be backfilled in accordance with the Structural Fill section of this report.

Site Grading

Site Preparation
The majority of the site has been stripped to expose basalt rock. However, in many areas,
loose basalt rubble is present. Therefore, prior to placement of structural fill, the site should be
prepared as follows:

1. In existing soil areas, remove topsoil and vegetation.

2. Excavate subgrade in foundation and slab areas to sufficient depth to expose competent basalt
bedrock.
3. In areas where basalt rock is present, any loose debris or rubble must be removed.

Following preparation of project subgrades, as described above, structural fill may be placed to
achieve design elevations.

Structural Fill
All fill placed must be placed as structural fill. Structural fill should be placed on basalt bedrock.
Prior to fill placement loose cobble and boulder sized material or any undocumented fill that may be
encountered should be removed. The structural fill requirements described in Table 1 below, in
general, correlate to ISPWC material specifications:

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 10
Table 1. Structural Fill Specifications and Allowable Use

Structural Fill
Allowable Use Material Specifications
Product
• Soil must be classified as silt, sand, or gravel (GP,
GM, GW, SP, SM, SW or ML) according to the
USCS.
General General site grading, • Soil may not contain particles larger than 6-inches
Structural Fill utilities and fill placement in median diameter.
• Soil must consist of inert earth materials with less
than 3 percent organics or other deleterious
substances (wood, metal, plastic, waste, etc).
• Soil must be classified as sand or gravel (GP, GW,
Over-excavations, SP, or SW) according to the USCS.
Granular
temporary haul roads, • Less than 10% passing No.200 sieve.
Structural Fill
temporary platforms, • Soil may not contain particles larger than 6–inches
(Granular
Granular subbase, in diameter.
Subbase)
general structural fill • Soil meeting the latest requirements in ISPWC1
Section 801 - Uncrushed Aggregates.
Foundation and slab
support, soil
Aggregate Base • Soil must meet granular structural fill requirements.
improvements, asphalt
Course • Soil meeting the latest requirements in ISPWC1
pavement section
Section 802 – Type 1 Crushed Aggregate for Base.
aggregate, general
structural fill
1
Idaho Standards for Public Works Construction

All structural fill must be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density of
the soil referencing ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor). Fill placed outside any building or pavement
envelope can be placed as non-structural fill (i.e. landscape fill) providing there are no structures
(sidewalk, curbs, signs, etc.) planned directly above the landscape fill. We recommend landscape fill
be compacted to a minimum of 85 percent of the maximum dry density of the soil according to ASTM
D1557.
Any structural fill products must be moisture-conditioned to near optimum moisture content and
placed in maximum 10-inch-thick, loose lifts. The above assumes large, appropriate compaction
equipment with drum energy of at least 10 tons or greater is used to attempt compaction. If smaller or
lighter compaction equipment is provided, the lift thickness may have to be reduced to meet the
compaction requirements presented herein.
No testing of proposed fill sources has been performed. On site soils meeting the specifications
given above may be used as fill during construction.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 11
Wet Weather/Soil Construction
We strongly recommend earthwork construction take place during dry weather conditions.
While the near-surface is typically rock, Subsequent soil used for backfill and site grading may contain
sufficient fines to be susceptible to pumping or rutting from heavy loads such as rubber-tired equipment
or vehicles when the soil is above optimum moisture content. Earthwork should not be performed
immediately after rainfall or until soil can dry sufficiently to allow construction traffic without disturbing
the subgrade. During and after achieving subgrade elevation, the contractor must take precautions to
protect the subgrade from becoming disturbed or saturated. We recommend the contractor limit
construction traffic to any prepared subgrade and reduce exposure to precipitation and water.
Specifically, the contractor should:
Grade subgrades to aggressively direct surface water away from construction areas that
could be adversely affected by infiltration.
After adequate moisture conditioning efforts have failed, remove exposed subgrade soil that
becomes soft or begins to pump to firm soil and replace it with structural fill as described
above for over-excavations.
Never attempt structural fill placement during or immediately following a significant
precipitation event.
Never allow subgrades to freeze or become saturated prior to fill placement.

The final subgrade conditions and careful construction procedures are critical to the long-term
project performance. We recommend earthwork specifications specifically identify the contractor’s
responsibility to protect and maintain prepared subgrades. It may improve project economy to retain
STRATA to observe the subgrade preparation activities to identify techniques or construction activities
that may be attributing to unstable subgrades and contributing to the need for over-excavations.

Exterior Grading
We recommend the ground surface outside of any structure be sloped a minimum of 5 percent
away for 10 feet to rapidly convey surface water or roof runoff away from foundations. Remaining
landscapes should slope at least 2 percent away from structures. Roof downspouts must be provided
and connected to a solid pipe placed away from structures and not allowed to infiltrate into the
structural fill underlying the structure. Stormwater should be routed away from the structures and
should be disposed of in stormwater disposal facilities located at least 20 feet from the proposed
building. Irrigation adjacent to or within 10 feet of the buildings is discouraged.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 12
Foundations
Based on the shallow basalt rock, we recommend all foundations for the project be constructed as
shallow spread and strip foundations bearing on aggregate base course placed over competent basalt
bedrock. However, as noted earlier in this report, the existing basalt rock may exhibit voids which were not
exposed during our investigation. Therefore, we recommend the following to evaluate the potential for
voids below the surface of the basalt bedrock:

1. Following excavation to foundation subgrade, advance supplemental borings at approximate 5 foot

spacing within foundation areas.
2. Borings should be advanced a minimum of 10 feet below planned foundation bearing elevation.
3. Borings should be advanced by an air-rotary drill rig (air-track rig) which is capable of detecting the
presence of voids. In our experience the air rotary drill rig is economical and can typically advance
up to 80 to 100 borings per day.

Exterior footings must extend at least 36 inches below the final exterior ground surface to help
protect against frost action. Interior foundations must extend at least 18 inches below final slab-bearing
elevations and maintain at least 4 inches of gravel between slabs and the top of the footing to reduce the
reflective cracking potential. Foundations must be structurally designed to conform to the latest edition of
the International Building Code (IBC). The foundation bearing pressures presented below can be
increased 30 percent to account for transitory live loads such as seismic and wind. In our opinion, long-
term live loads such as equipment, fixtures, furniture, files, etc. should be considered in the total dead
structural loads for the project. Our analysis utilizes a factor of safety against bearing capacity failure of
3.0 or greater. Settlement estimates and other design criteria are unfactored. Based on the reported
foundation loading conditions, the text below provides recommended design and construction criteria.
Based on the reported foundation loading conditions, the text below provides recommended design and
construction criteria.
We recommend STRATA be retained to observe the foundation system installation including
reviewing structural fill compaction prior to placing concrete forms or concrete. Reviewing the fill
placement process and final foundation bearing surfaces helps confirm our allowable bearing pressures
and settlement estimates and is an important part of the geotechnical design process.

Bearing Strata
From exploration, we expect the basalt bedrock to be present at existing grade. Given that
bedrock is currently exposed we recommend all foundations should be underlain by a minimum 6 inch
leveling course of aggregate base course to help provide a uniform bearing surface and improve

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 13
constructability. Granular structural fill must be placed on native basalt bedrock, and be compacted to
structural fill criteria.

Design Criteria
Foundations constructed on granular soil leveling courses as presented in this report may be
designed using a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 10,000 pounds per square foot (psf). Mass
concrete placed on soil improvements over compacted subgrades can utilize a friction coefficient (f s ) of
0.65 to resist lateral loads. This coefficient must be reduced by 1/3 if concrete is not cast directly on
soil such as for pre-cast panels.
Using good construction practices and constructing during good weather, we estimate
foundations bearing on subgrades prepared as recommended herein will realize up to approximately ¾
inch total and 1/2 inches of differential settlement in a 30-foot span. The observed settlement will be
primarily elastic in nature and will occur coincident with foundation loading. Our settlement estimates
rely on 18-inch-wide minimum continuous foundations and 8-foot-square spot footings. Foundation
dimensions greater than these should be analyzed for changes in settlement potential. Where water
accumulates at the foundation elevation, settlement can be in excess of our estimates and the building
tolerances. Therefore, we recommend exterior grading provide adequate drainage away from the
building.

Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade

Concrete slab-on-grade floors should be supported by compacted crushed aggregate base course
placed on a prepared subgrade, as described in this report’s Site Grading and Structural Fill section. We
recommend concrete slab-on-grade floors exposed to typical pedestrian and light storage loads be
underlain by at least 4 inches of crushed aggregate base course to provide a leveling course and capillary
break for the slab. Below service and large animal building, we recommend the slab be underlain by a
minimum of 8 inches of crushed aggregate base course. Subgrade areas that become soft, wet or
disturbed or that cannot be recompacted to structural fill requirements must be over-excavated to firm soil
and replaced with granular structural fill prior to placing aggregate base.
Floor slabs must be designed for the anticipated use and equipment or storage loading conditions.
Based on correlations to our field and laboratory test results, we recommend concrete slab design utilize a
modulus of subgrade reaction (K) of 300 pounds per cubic inch (pci) for structural fill overlying basalt rock
subgrades. To realize the reported modulus of subgrade reaction, drained conditions and the
recommended slab support section and subgrades.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 14
Interior floor slabs may be susceptible to moisture migration caused by capillary action and
vapor pressure. Floor coverings such as tile, vinyl, or other “impervious coatings” may exist within the
retail area and a vapor retarder is strongly encouraged in these areas. In shop areas where no floor
coverings are expected, a vapor retarder may not be necessary. Where utilized, vapor retarders must
consist of a thick, 15-mil, puncture-resistant sheeting consistent with American Concrete Institute (ACI)
Section 302.2R-06 specifications. An example of a common vapor retarder is Stego Wrap, a 15-mil
vapor retarder.
The specific location of vapor retarders has been widely discussed in the architectural,
structural, construction and geotechnical engineering community, and differing opinions exist.
However, current recommendations by the ACI recommend placement of a vapor retarder directly
below the concrete slab. However, ultimately, the location of the vapor retarder (if a vapor retarder is
specified) should be carefully considered by the owner and architect. Studies have shown that
decreased concrete water-cement ratios, higher strength concrete, and good construction finishing
practices significantly decrease any negative impacts associated with both of the above options for
vapor retarder locations.
Installation of form stakes or other sub-slab penetrations must never be allowed to puncture the
vapor retarder. Manufacturer recommendations for proper sealing of slab-to-wall connections,
plumbing or other penetrations must be strictly followed. Although these recommendations are used,
water vapor migration through the concrete floor slab is still possible. Floor covering must be selected
accordingly and manufacturer's recommendations strictly followed.

Exterior Concrete Slabs on Grade (Sidewalks, Curbs, Gutters, Misc.)

Exterior slabs are susceptible to frost action which can generate substantial frost heave at
certain times of the year. The potential for frost heave may not be acceptable at entries, work bays or
other critical areas adjacent to the building that will be exposed to weather. One approach to provide
partial frost protection requires removing 65 percent of material within the frost depth and replacing it
with granular structural fill. If this method is employed, the over-excavated soil must be replaced with
aggregate base course as specified in the Structural Fill section. Alternatively, if partial frost protection
is unacceptable, over-excavation and aggregate base course replacement must be accomplished to the
anticipated frost depth (36 inches).

Sliding Resistance of Soils

Mass concrete placed on soil improvements over compacted subgrades can utilize a friction
coefficient (fs) of 0.65 to resist lateral loads. This coefficient must be reduced by 1/3 if concrete is not

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 15
cast directly on soil such as for pre-cast panels.

Lateral Earth Pressures

All below-grade foundation and wall systems must be designed to resist lateral earth pressures
from the retained soil behind the structure and surcharge from equipment, slopes or vehicles adjacent
to the walls. For this project, perimeter strip footings and associated stem walls must be designed to
resist lateral earth pressures. We recommend lateral earth pressures for conventional wall systems be
estimated using the following equivalent fluid pressures (EFPs) from Table 2 below for imported
structural backfill compacted to structural fill criteria.

Table 2. Static Equivalent Fluid Pressures (Structural Fill Retained Soil)

Lateral Earth Pressure Case Equivalent Fluid Pressure (EFP)

At rest case 50 pcf* (unsaturated)

(no wall movement)
Active case 35 pcf* (unsaturated)
(wall movement away from soil mass)
Passive case 450 pcf* (unsaturated)
(wall movement toward soil mass)
*Pcf = pounds per cubic foot

For walls that cannot tolerate movement, we recommend they be designed utilizing at-rest fluid
pressures. Lateral surcharge pressures due to equipment and storage loads, etc. have not been
included in the above lateral earth pressure recommendation. A lateral earth pressure coefficient of
0.45 acting over the entire retaining wall should be used to estimate lateral surcharge loads from
equipment storage loads, etc. located behind and above walls. Compaction of backfill within 5 feet of
the retaining wall should be performed only with vibratory plates or walk behind smooth-drum vibratory
rollers to lessen potential surcharge loading of the walls during compaction.
Dynamic lateral earth pressures due to seismic activity are additive to the above static lateral
earth pressures but act as an inverted triangle for the active and at-rest cases. The dynamic lateral
earth pressure for the passive case acts in the opposite direction to reduce the available passive
resistance but at the same location as the static condition. Recommended dynamic lateral earth
pressures are given in the following table.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 16
Table 3. Dynamic Lateral Earth Pressures based on Mononobe Okabe and Woods Methodology

Lateral Earth Pressure Case Equivalent Fluid Pressure (EFP)

At rest case +39 pcf 1
(no wall movement)
Active case +10 pcf 1
(wall movement away from soil mass)
Passive case -120 pcf 2
(wall movement toward soil mass)
1 – The seismic component of the active and at-rest pressure is assumed to have its resultant acting at 0.66 times the height of the wall
measured from the base of the wall.
2 – Active and at rest pressures are additive to equivalent fluid pressure using traditional triangular pressure distribution.

The above lateral earth pressure values are appropriate considering static, drained, non-
surcharged conditions. STRATA recommends that all retaining or below-grade walls be drained. This
can be accomplished by installation of drains at the base of the backfill side of walls. All drains should
be constructed with a minimum 4 inch perforated pipe surrounded by drain rock and separated from the
backfill by a non-woven geotextile.

Seismic Hazard Concerns, Liquefaction, Seismicity, and Faulting

We expect the 2009 IBC will be utilized for project structural design. IBC Section 1613 outlines
the procedure for evaluating site ground motions and design spectral response accelerations. STRATA
utilized site soil and geologic data and the project location to establish earthquake-loading criteria at the
site referencing IBC Section 1613. Based on our field exploration and knowledge of the upper 100 feet
of the soil profile, we recommend a Site Class C be utilized as a basis for structural seismic design.
STRATA evaluated the potential for liquefaction in the soil profile anticipated below the
proposed structure. Liquefaction is a common concern in loose sand and silt with a potential for
saturated conditions. The liquefaction potential rapidly decreases when the density increases and the
percentage of fine-grained soil increases. As discussed in this report, the native subsurface profile is
comprised of Basalt Bedrock. Based on our exploration and experience, we consider the potential for
liquefaction and lateral spread to be negligible based on the presence of bedrock and the relatively low
seismic accelerations in the project vicinity.
The project site is located approximately ¼ mile southeast of the Rexburg fault. A fault trench
study is unnecessary and we consider the risks related to fault rupture as low.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 17
Water Soluble Sulfates
Based on our experience in the project vicinity, generally the soil has slightly alkaline pH and
low to moderate resistivity. Therefore, we anticipate a moderate to high corrosion environment. As
with any construction, careful selection of material for utility piping and other structure materials must
account for some potential wall thickness loss due to corrosion. Concrete reinforcing steel should
maintain appropriate IBC earth and form clearances at all times. Position reinforcing steel with the
maximum available clearance to reduce potential corrosion effects. Our experience in the project
vicinity and with regional concrete suppliers indicates site soil will not react with concrete products
produced in the area. Further, based on our experience, local concrete aggregates typically require
alkali-silica mitigation in concrete mix designs to limit potential alkali-silica reactions in concrete. No
testing has been performed on site soils or soils proposed for use as fill. We recommend site concrete
utilize type I/II cement.

Topsoil
No topsoil testing has been performed. We recommend If testing becomes necessary please contact
us.

LIMITATIONS

Geotechnical design continuity will be an important aspect of this project’s successful

completion. In our opinion, geotechnical continuity can occur in 3 stages in the planning, design and
construction project aspects. Specifically, we recommend STRATA maintain the geotechnical design
continuity in the following aspects:

Plan and Specification Review: We recommend STRATA be retained to review final

design and construction plans and specifications to verify our geotechnical
recommendations are incorporated into project bidding and construction documents as well
as to provide additional recommendations based on the final design concepts. These efforts
can help BYU-I provide document continuity across the engineering disciplines and reduce
the potential for errors as the project concepts evolve.

Geotechnical Design Confirmation: The potential site soil and rock variation may have
a significant impact on foundation and slab construction. As such, we recommend STRATA
be retained to provide geotechnical engineering oversight during foundation installation to
observe the potential variability in the soil and rock conditions and provide consultation
regarding potential impacts on foundation construction.

Construction Observation and Testing: We recommend STRATA be retained to observe

foundation excavation and concrete placement operations for shallow foundations. Having

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 18
STRATA provide inspection and oversight during this process will reduce the potential for an
unforeseen construction error which may ultimately impact the project. STRATA can also
provide construction material testing and special inspection for concrete, masonry,
reinforcement, and asphalt. If we are not retained to perform the recommended services,
we cannot be responsible for related construction errors or omissions.

This report has been prepared to assist project planning design and construction of the
proposed BYU-I Agriscience Facility to be constructed at south of Sage Street, between Center Street
and First West Street, in Rexburg, Idaho. Our geotechnical findings and opinions have been developed
based on the authorized subsurface exploration and laboratory testing, as well as our understanding of
the project at this time. Our geotechnical design recommendations are specific to the planned
Agriscience facility design and infrastructure construction and should not be extrapolated to other future
site developments without allowing adequate geotechnical consultation by STRATA.
Our services consist of professional opinions and findings made in accordance with generally
accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices in southwest Idaho at the time of this
report. The geotechnical recommendations provided herein are based on the premise that appropriate
geotechnical consultation during subsequent design phases is implemented and an adequate program
of tests and observations will be conducted by STRATA during construction to verify compliance with
our recommendations and to confirm conditions between exploration locations. This acknowledgment
is in lieu of all warranties either express or implied.

REFERENCES

ASTM International, 2010, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Volume 04.08 Soil and Rock (I): D 420 –
D 5876
ASTM International, 2010, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Volume 04.09 Soil and Rock (II): D 5877 -
latest
Coduto, D., 1994, Foundation Design, Principles and Practices, Prentice Hall.

International Code Council, 2009, International Building Code.

Roberge, P.R., 2000, Handbook of Corrosion Engineering.

Mitchell, V.E., and Bennett, E.H., 1979, Geologic map of the Driggs quadrangle, Idaho: Idaho
Geological Survey, Geologic Map GM-6, scale 1:250,000

United States Geological Survey (USGS), 2002, 2004, 2006, 2008 and 2010, Seismic Design
Maps and Tools for Engineers, http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/designmaps, December,
2012.

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
 19

APPENDIX

The following plates and appendices accompany and complete this report:
Plate 1: Boring Location Plan

Appendix A: Exploratory Boring Logs &

Unified Soil Classification System (USCS)

Appendix B: Laboratory Test Results

Project ID Number: IF12060A Strata, Inc.

2815 Garret Way, Ste C, Pocatello, Idaho, Phone (208)-237-3400, Fax (208)-237-3449, www.stratageotech.com
0 30 60 30
 APPENDIX A
Exploratory Boring Logs & Unified Soil
Classification System (USCS)
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered, Calcium carbonate in joints for
slightly vesicular, gray, fine grain, first 5 inches.
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with between 0.0 and 5.5 feet BGS
rough joint surfaces, filled with RQD = 86%
calcium carbonate and clay Recovery = 88%

2.5
RX

5.0

(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered, HQ ROCK CORE

vesicular, reddish gray, fine grain,
narrow fracture spacing, with rough between 5.5 and 10.5 feet BGS
surfaces RQD = 43%
Recovery = 86%

7.5
Lost water circulation at 8 feet
RX
BGS.
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

10.0

(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered, HQ ROCK CORE

vesicular, reddish gray, fine grain,
narrow fracture spacing, with rough between 10.5 and 15.5 feet BGS
surfaces RQD = 94%
Recovery = 100%

12.5

RX

15.0

Borehole Terminated at 15.5 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-1

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, moderately
weathered, vesicular, reddish gray, Calcium carbonate in joints.
fine grain, hard, narrow fracture between 0.0 and 5.5 feet BGS
spacing, with rough surfaces filled RQD = 86%
with calcium carbonate and clay Recovery = 94%

2.5
RX

5.0

(RX) BASALT, moderately HQ ROCK CORE

weathered, moderately vesicular,
gray, fine grain, hard, narrow between 5.5 and 10.5 feet BGS
fracture spacing, with rough RQD = 75%
surfaces filled with clay Recovery = 100%
Scoraceous weathering
between 7 and 8 feet BGS.
7.5

RX

Red staining.
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

10.0

(RX) BASALT, moderately HQ ROCK CORE

weathered, moderately vesicular,
reddish gray, fine grain, hard, between 10.5 and 15.5 feet BGS
narrow fracture spacing, with rough RQD = 77% Lost water circulation at 11.5
surfaces filled with clay Recovery = 90% feet BGS.

12.5

RX

15.0

Borehole Terminated at 15.5 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-2

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, moderately
weathered, vesicular, reddish gray
to gray, fine grain, moderately hard, between 0.0 and 4.5 feet BGS
narrow fracture spacing, with rough RQD = 57%
surfaces filled with calcium Recovery = 89%
carbonate and clay

RX
2.5

Lost water circulation at 4.5 feet

(RX) BASALT, moderately HQ ROCK CORE BGS.
weathered, vesicular, reddish gray 5.0
to gray, fine grain, moderately hard, between 4.5 and 6.0 feet BGS
RX RQD = 94%
narrow fracture spacing, with rough
surfaces filled with calcium Recovery = 94%
carbonate and clay
(RX) BASALT, moderately HQ ROCK CORE
weathered, vesicular, reddish gray
to gray, fine grain, moderately hard, between 6.0 and 11.0 feet BGS
narrow fracture spacing, with rough RQD = 88%
surfaces filled with calcium Recovery = 93%
carbonate and clay 7.5

RX
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

10.0
Redish highly vesicular to
scoriaceous between 10.5 - 12
feet BGS.
(RX) BASALT, moderately HQ ROCK CORE
weathered, vesicular, reddish gray
to gray, fine grain, moderately hard, between 11.0 and 16.0 feet BGS
narrow fracture spacing, with rough RQD = 67%
surfaces filled with calcium Recovery = 92%
carbonate and clay 12.5

RX

15.0

Borehole Terminated at 16.0 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-3

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered,
slightly vesicular, gray, fine grain,
very hard, narrow fracture spacing, between 0.0 and 5.5 feet BGS
with rough surfaces filled with RQD = 72%
calcium carbonate Recovery = 95%

2.5
RX

5.0

(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered, HQ ROCK CORE

vesicular, gray, fine grain, very
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with between 5.5 and 10.5 feet BGS
rough surfaces RQD = 92%
Recovery = 98%

7.5

RX
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

Reddish at 9.5 to 11.5 feet

BGS.
10.0

(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered, HQ ROCK CORE

Reddish and highly vesicular to
vesicular, reddish brown, fine grain, scoriaceous between 11 - 13.5
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with between 10.5 and 15.5 feet BGS
RQD = 75% feet BGS.
rough surfaces Lost water circulation at 11.5
Recovery = 100%
feet BGS.

12.5

RX

15.0

Borehole Terminated at 15.5 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-4

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, moderately
weathered, slightly to moderately Clay in joints.
vesicular, dark gray, fine grain, very between 0.0 and 5.5 feet BGS
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with RQD = 84%
rough surfaces filled with clay Recovery = 90%

2.5
RX

5.0

(RX) BASALT, moderately HQ ROCK CORE

weathered, slightly to moderately
vesicular, dark gray, fine grain, very between 5.5 and 10.5 feet BGS
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with RQD = 88%
Recovery = 97% Iron staining at 6.5 feet BGS.
rough surfaces

7.5

RX
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

Lost water circulation at 9.5 feet

BGS.
10.0

HQ ROCK CORE Highly fractured zone @ 10.5.

(RX) BASALT, moderately
weathered, slightly to moderately
vesicular, dark gray, fine grain, very between 10.5 and 15.5 feet BGS
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with RQD = 83%
rough surfaces Recovery = 95%

12.5

RX

15.0

Borehole Terminated at 15.5 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-5

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered,
slightly to moderately vesicular,
gray, fine grain, very hard, narrow between 0.0 and 5.5 feet BGS
fracture spacing, with rough RQD = 79% Slightly vesicular from 1 - 3 feet
surfaces Recovery = 92% BGS.

2.5
RX

5.0

(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered, HQ ROCK CORE

moderately vesicular, gray, fine
grain, very hard, narrow fracture between 5.5 and 10.5 feet BGS
spacing, with rough surfaces RQD = 75%
Recovery = 92%
Reddish brown staining from 7
to 9 feet BGS.
7.5
Lost water circulation at 8 feet
RX
BGS.
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

10.0

Borehole Terminated at 10.5 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-6

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, slightly to highly
weathered, vesicular, gray to
reddish brown, fine grain, soft to between 0.0 and 4.5 feet BGS
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with RQD = 65%
rough surfaces filled with clay Recovery = 100%

RX
2.5
Highly weathered and soft at 3 -
4.5 feet BGS. High clay content.

(RX) BASALT, slightly to highly HQ ROCK CORE

weathered, vesicular, gray, fine 5.0
grain, hard, narrow fracture between 4.5 and 9.5 feet BGS
spacing, with rough surfaces filled RQD = 88%
with clay Recovery = 98%

RX

7.5
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

(RX) BASALT, slightly to highly HQ ROCK CORE

weathered, highly vesicular, gray to 10.0
reddish gray, fine grain, hard, between 9.5 and 14.5 feet BGS
narrow fracture spacing, with rough RQD = 75%
surfaces filled with clay Recovery = 92%
Highly weathered 1 inch seam.

RX

12.5
Lost water circulation at 12.5
feet BGS.

Highly weathered 1 inch seam

at 13.5 feet BGS.

Borehole Terminated at 14.5 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-7

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, moderately
weathered, vesicular, reddish gray,
fine grain, hard, narrow fracture between 0.0 and 5.5 feet BGS
spacing, with rough surfaces RQD = 50%
Recovery = 84%

2.5
RX
High soil inclusion 6 inch long
between 2 to 4 feet BGS.

5.0

(RX) BASALT, moderately HQ ROCK CORE

weathered, moderately vesicular,
reddish gray, fine grain, hard, between 5.5 and 10.5 feet BGS
narrow fracture spacing, with rough RQD = 82%
surfaces Recovery = 100%

7.5

RX
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

10.0

Borehole Terminated at 10.5 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-8

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered,
vesicular, reddish gray, fine grain,
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with between 0.0 and 5.5 feet BGS
rough surfaces RQD = 76%
Recovery = 85%

2.5
RX

5.0
Lost water circulation at 5.5 feet
(RX) BASALT, slightly weathered, HQ ROCK CORE BGS.
highly vesicular, reddish gray, fine
grain, hard, narrow fracture between 5.5 and 10.5 feet BGS
spacing, with rough surfaces RQD = 82%
Recovery = 93%

7.5

RX
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

10.0

Borehole Terminated at 10.5 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-9

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
 Pocket Pen.
Content (%)
Dry Density
Blows Per
REMARKS

SYMBOL
U.S.C.S.

Moisture
6 Inches
DEPTH

Sample
CLASS

Type

(pcf)
SPT

SPT
N(60)

(tsf)
USCS Description

(ft)
Note: BGS = Below Ground
Surface
0.0 HQ ROCK CORE
SILTY SAND, (SM) tan, loose,
moist SM between 0.0 and 6.0 feet BGS
RQD = 29%
(RX) BASALT, moderately to Recovery = 45%
slightly weathered, slightly
vesicular, reddish gray, fine grain,
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with
rough surfaces filled with calcium
carbonate 2.5

RX

5.0

(RX) BASALT, moderately to HQ ROCK CORE

slightly weathered, slightly
vesicular, reddish gray, fine grain, between 6.0 and 11.0 feet BGS
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with RQD = 90%
rough surfaces filled with calcium Recovery = 100%
carbonate 7.5

RX
STRATA BH / TP / WELL - STRATA.GPJ - 12/28/12 11:47 - R:\GINT\PROJECTS\BYU - IDAHO\IS12060A BORING.GPJ

Lost water circulation at 9.5 feet

BGS.
10.0

(RX) BASALT, moderately to HQ ROCK CORE

slightly weathered, slightly
vesicular, reddish gray, fine grain, between 11.0 and 16.0 feet BGS
hard, narrow fracture spacing, with RQD = 76%
rough surfaces filled with calcium Recovery = 88%
carbonate 12.5

RX

15.0

Reddish last 6 inches.

Borehole Terminated at 16.0 Feet.

Client: BYU - IDAHO Boring Number: B-10

Project: IF12060A Date Drilled: 12-11-2012
EXPLORATORY
Drill Rig: CME 850 Borehole Diameter: 2.5"
BORING LOG
Depth to Groundwater: N.E. Logged By: MQ Sheet 1 Of 1
APPENDIX B
Laboratory Test Results
 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION
ASTM D 7012 (Method C)

Project: Agriculture - Science Building

Client: BYU Idaho
File Name: IF12060A
Lab Number: B12L1851A
Sample Identification: B-1 @ 3 - 4 ft
Sample Type: Rock Core (Condition: Good)
Sample Description: Basalt
Date Tested: 12/28/12 By: IR
Unit Weight: 158.5 pcf
Length to Diam.: 2.05:1

Strain Rate: 0.6 %/min

8000

7000
Unconfined Compressive Strength (psi)

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00
Strain, %

Diameter: 2.40" Height: 4.92" Area: 4.51 in²

Unconfined Compressive Strength = 7,875 psi (1,135 ksf) @ 1.1% Strain

Reviewed By: _______________________

 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION
ASTM D 7012 (Method C)

Project: Agriculture - Science Building

Client: BYU Idaho
File Name: IF12060A
Lab Number: B12L1851B
Sample Identification: B-7 @ 0 - 1 ft
Sample Type: Rock Core (Condition: Good)
Sample Description: Basalt
Date Tested: 12/28/12 By: IR
Unit Weight: 136.4 pcf
Length to Diam.: 2.07:1

Strain Rate: 0.6 %/min

8000

7000
Unconfined Compressive Strength (psi)

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00
Strain, %

Diameter: 2.40" Height: 4.96" Area: 4.52 in²

Unconfined Compressive Strength = 5,400 psi (780 ksf) @ 0.97% Strain

Reviewed By: _______________________

 January 4, 2013
File: IF12060A

Mr. Jedd A. Walker Campus Architect

Brigham Young University - Idaho
450 S. Physical Plant Way #213
Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205
Phone: (208) 496-2663

RE: Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation –

Addendum # 01
Agriscience Facility
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg, Idaho

Dear Mr. Walker:

Strata, A Professional Services Corporation (STRATA), is pleased to present our authorized

Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation Addendum # 01 for the proposed Brigham Young
University – Idaho (BYU-I) Agriscience facility to be located on Sage Street in Rexburg, Idaho.
Our Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation’s purpose was to explore the subsurface conditions in
the proposed development area and provide geotechnical recommendations to assist project
planning, design and construction. The following addendum addresses questions we received
after review of our report from Mr. Leon Tanner on January 3, 2013. We understand that you
have requested that we address the following items:

1. Proposed alternative foundation installation method

2. Drilling frequency of pressure grouted dowels
3. Seismic site class recommendation

Through conversations with Mr. Leon Tanner of TBSE, Inc, we understand lean concrete
is proposed below foundations in lieu of aggregate base course, as previously recommended by
STRATA. Substitution of lean concrete or Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) is
acceptable and will meet the intent of our geotechnical recommendations. We recommend the
CLSM have a minimum strength of 300 pounds per square inch.

Further, we also understand TBSE proposes pressure grouted dowels be installed below
foundations at 10 feet on center and to a depth of 10 feet below foundation grade. This
proposed alternative foundation installation method is acceptable provided the following
recommendations and the previously provided recommendations are implemented in there
entirety. We recommend that the maximum allowable bearing pressure of 10,000 pounds per
square foot (psf) be implemented in the design as previously stated. We recommend that the
lean concrete placed prior to structural foundation elements meet with applicable ACI and
ASTM standards. Further we strongly advise that reinforcing steel dowels placed in pressure
grouted borings observe applicable standards for concrete cover to protect against corrosion.
Observation of this installation, by qualified individuals, is highly recommended during this stage
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Work Sequence.
4. Purchase contracts.
5. Access to site.
6. Coordination with occupants.
7. Work restrictions.
8. Specification and drawing conventions.
9. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing
temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building

1. Project Location: Rexburg, Idaho; BYU Idaho Campus.

B. Owner: BYU Idaho.

1. Owner's Representative: Kehl Murray; ph. 208 496-2665.

C. Architect:

CRSA
649 East South Temple
Salt Lake City, Utah
Contact: Jeff Nielsen
801 746-6813
jnielsen@crsa-us.com

D. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by Owner will be used for purposes of managing
communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for establishing,
administering and using the Project Web site.

SUMMARY ` 011000 - 1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. Science & Technology Building; +/-106,000 sq. ft., three stories. A3 and B occupancies, Type IIB
Construction. Steel frame building.

2. All other sitework and related activities as shown on the contract documents.

3. Alternates as described in section 012300

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK SEQUENCE

A. The Work shall be completed in one phase.

1.6 PURCHASE CONTRACTS

A. General: Owner has negotiated purchase contracts with suppliers of material and equipment to be
incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these purchase contracts to Contractor. Include costs for
purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment in the
Contract Sum, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated purchase contracts, including
responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing agreements.

B. Purchase Contracts Information:

1. Carpet:

a. Carpet shall be provided by the Owner and installed by the Contractor using one of the pre-
approved carpet installers specified in Section 096813.

2. Monument Signs:

a. Provided by YESCO. Justin Steadman; 208 589-4149. See Section 101423.

1.7 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction
period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other
contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions
of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas designated by the construction limits shown on
the drawings.
2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these
areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

SUMMARY ` 011000 - 2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.

1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: With the exception of areas under construction, the Owner will occupy the
Benson Building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with
Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. Owner will not occupy the
Academic Building. The Contractor shall be aware of and conform to all rules, regulations and restrictions
for construction activities on and around the campus and shall not interfere with the daily operation and
circulation of students and faculty on and around the campus.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do
not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and
to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the
entire project, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to
be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner
occupancy.
3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and
required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate
and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for
occupied portions of Work.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to
7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: Work is not permitted on Sundays. Work is allowed on Saturdays from 7:00 AM
until 7:00 PM.
2. Early Morning Hours: Restrictions on noisy work may be limited by Owner.
3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according
to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration,
odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

SUMMARY ` 011000 - 3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted on the BYU-I campus.

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not
permitted.

G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of
Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words
"shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is
used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all
Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in
detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and
products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the
individual Specifications Sections.
2. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes as scheduled on the
drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. The General Conditions shall take precedence over the specifications.

B. The Contract Documents should be read as a whole and whenever possible, the provisions should be
construed in order that all provisions are operable. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all
items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract
Documents are complimentary, and what is required by one document or provisions thereof shall be as
binding as if required by all of the documents or provisions thereof.

C. The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such
field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor, or information which a
Contractor of ordinary skill and expertise for the type of work involved would have known, before
commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect
at once. If the Contractor performs any construction activity without such notice to the Architect, the
Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate
amount of the attributable cost for correction.

SUMMARY ` 011000 - 4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

END OF SECTION 011000

SUMMARY ` 011000 - 5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling
Change Orders.
2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a
price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or
deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities
of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable
taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of
unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of
established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor
acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the
schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price No. 1: Mass Rock excavation and replacement with satisfactory soil material at Building
footprint.

UNIT PRICES ` 012200 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Description: Classified rock excavation and disposal off site and replacement with satisfactory fill
material or engineered fill from off site, as required, according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of rock excavated, based on survey of volume removed.

B. Unit Price No. 2: Rock Excavation and replacement with satisfactory soil material at Trenches.

1. Description: Classified rock excavation and disposal off site and replacement with satisfactory fill
material or engineered fill from off site, as required, according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of rock excavated, based on survey of volume removed.

C. Unit Price No. 3: Cutting and patching of concrete floor slabs.

1. Description: Cutting of new or existing concrete floor slabs up to 6 inches thick, removal and
excavation as required, and subsequent backfill, compaction, and patching of concrete according to
Section 017300 "Execution." not otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square feet of concrete removed.

D. Unit Price No. 4: Miscellaneous and structural steel.

1. Description: Miscellaneous lintels and other supports not otherwise indicated in the Contract
Documents, according to Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" and Section 055000 "Metal
Fabrications."
2. Unit of Measurement: Cost in place of pounds of fabricated steel as indicated on itemized invoice
of steel supplier and verified by Architect.

E. Unit Price No. 5: Placement of grout in bedrock voids (lava tubes).

1. Description: Pump grout into lava tubes in excess of that required in the Structural General Notes;
“Site Preparation” paragraph and otherwise noted on the drawings.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard of grout.

F. Unit Price No. 6: Lean Mix.

1. Description: Placement of Lean Mix under footings.

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard.

END OF SECTION 012200

UNIT PRICES ` 012200 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the
bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to
accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,
materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the
alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the
status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under
each alternate.

ALTERNATES ` 012300 - 1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

3.1 SCHEDULE

A. Alternate #1: 600 South Parking (South Parking Lot). Remove existing parking lot. Provide new parking
lot, sidewalks, ramps and landscaping as shown on the drawings. Credit equal area of landscaping from
Base Bid. This alternate may be accepted independent of or with other alternates.

B. Alternate #2: North Parking lot. Provide new parking lot, sidewalks, stairs and landscaping as shown on
the drawings. Credit equal area of landscaping from Base Bid. This alternate may be accepted
independent of or with other alternates.

END OF SECTION 012300

ALTERNATES ` 012300 - 2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.

2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
3. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product
submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed
Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of
required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in
order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and
Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided,

if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of
the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities
may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,
sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ` 012500 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-
ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with
products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified
product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include
letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase
order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related
materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become
necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor
of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven
days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's

Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related
products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by
manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change,
but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests
without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product
provided.
c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ` 012500 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.

C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution during the bid period only.
Requests must be made prior to the date designated for the last addenda. Requests received after that
time will be rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests
without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must
assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product
provided.
e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012500

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ` 012500 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract
modifications.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for
substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving
adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect’s form entitled, "Architect's
Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the
Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description
will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in
progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of
Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the
Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and
activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract
Time.
e. Quotation Form: Use Contractor’s form.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract,

Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ` 012600 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change
on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of
purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,
including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity
relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change
requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
7. Proposal Request Form: Use Contractor’s form.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of
Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.

B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of
Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for
signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

B. Weather Delays: Completion time will not be extended for normal bad weather or any weather that is
reasonably foreseeable at the time of entering into the contract. The time for completion as stated in the
contract documents includes due allowance for calendar days on which work cannot be performed out of
doors. The Contractor acknowledges that it may lose days due to weather conditions. Contract time may
be extended if all of the following are met and documented by the Contractor:

1. The weather prevented work from occurring that is on the critical path based upon the most recent
CPM.
2. There are no concurrent delays attributed to the Contractor.
3. The Contractor took all reasonable steps to alleviate the impact of the weather.
4. The weather was catastrophic or significantly varied from standard weather/climate data recorded
for Rexburg, Idaho as reported by the NOAA.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Work Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change
in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also
designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Work Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ` 012600 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012600

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ` 012600 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing
of allowances.
2. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices.
3. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
changes to the Contract.
4. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing
the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to
various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's

construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and
schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than 14 days
before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately
phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment.
4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule
defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with
each element.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the
schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

PAYMENT PROCEDURES ` 012900 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for
each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division.

b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth
percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor.
2) Materials.
3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents.
Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the
Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout
requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract
amount.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications
for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet
installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include
evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-
item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity.
Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.
9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase
contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any,
and balance to be paid by Contractor.
10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total
cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-
place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as
general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES ` 012900 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous
applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final
Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between
Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the
period indicated in the Agreement, or if not stated, then the frequency of submittal may be not more than
monthly.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for
Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to
sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use
updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not
payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for
Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of
construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment
purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and
items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to
payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match
amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on
stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous

Applications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for
Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining
stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).

PAYMENT PROCEDURES ` 012900 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of

multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.
5. Products list (preliminary if not final).
6. Schedule of unit prices.
7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
8. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
10. Copies of building permits.
11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the
Work.
12. Initial progress report.
13. Report of preconstruction conference.
14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
15. Performance and payment bonds.
16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work
claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement
showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner
occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for
Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including,
but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,
fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of
Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for
corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012900

PAYMENT PROCEDURES ` 012900 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including,
but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.
3. Requests for Information (RFIs).
4. Project Web site.
5. Project meetings.
6. Safety Plan.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned
to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's
construction schedule.
2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-
engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
4. Section 014000 “Quality Requirements” for administrative and procedural requirements for quality
assurance and quality control.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the
Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of
the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use
CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home,

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Contractor and each sub-contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those
of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each
contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on
each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation
of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own
installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for
coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is
required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly
progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Pre-installation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities
to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the
Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's
property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual

Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited
space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of
products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and
resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the
following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare

sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and
components.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple

contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and
resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil,
mechanical, and electrical systems.
d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of
components during the life of the installation.
e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves,
and other controls.
f. Indicate required installation sequences.
g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be
in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide
alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor
dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible
ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section
drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and
electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate
layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and
other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and
elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor
closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation,
bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors,
cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm
locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control
center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated,
but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect
determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are
otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and
resubmit.
10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following
requirements:

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing
coordination digital data files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files

as they relate to Drawings.
b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit 2012 and AutoCAD 2012.
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no
response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work
of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and
the following:

1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing
interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or other form approved by Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven
working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect[ after 1:00 p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for
response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum
may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract
Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log
weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected
parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal
Request, as appropriate.
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Use Owner’s internet Based Project Management Software for purposes of hosting and managing project
communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following
functions:

1. Project directory.
2. Project correspondence.
3. Meeting minutes.
4. Contract modifications forms and logs.
5. RFI forms and logs.
6. Task and issue management.
7. Photo documentation.
8. Schedule and calendar management.
9. Submittals forms and logs.
10. Payment application forms.
11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating.
12. Online document collaboration.

B. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties may be granted access by the Owner to the Owner’s Internet
Based Project Management Software.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of
date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner
and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Architect and Contractor.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and
its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude
matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications.
f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
g. Procedures for RFIs.
h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
k. Submittal procedures.
l. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. First aid.
y. Security.
z. Progress cleaning.
aa. Safety Plan.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction
activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Preinstallation Conferences for the following work shall be indicated in the Project Schedule:

a. Chilled water line installation.

b. Steam line installation.
c. Sewer and water connections.
d. Roofing.
e. Landscape planting.
f. Landscape irrigation.
g. Curtain wall framing.
h. Cold-formed metal framing.
i. Project closeout.
j. Commissioning per commissioning specifications.
k. High Voltage Work.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

l. Site Data Work.

2. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by

the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have
preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity
under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.

4. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required

corrective measures and actions.
5. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring
information.
6. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene
the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient
to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and
its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude
matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the
following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection
for acceptance.
c. Submittal of written warranties.
d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
f. Requirements for demonstration and training.
g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final
payment.
i. Submittal procedures.
j. Coordination of separate contracts.
k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Participation in progress meetings at regular intervals:

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

2. Attendees: Representatives of Owner, Architect and Contractor; (subcontractors, suppliers,
vendors and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities shall only participate when pre-arranged with the Architect).
Contactor shall manage subcontractors outside of the progress meetings. All participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other
items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to
status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine
whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to
Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be
expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Architect shall be responsible for conducting the meeting and will record and distribute
the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule
concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

F. Coordination Meetings: Contractor shall conduct Project coordination meetings at his discretion and notify
the Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific
meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,

supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate
to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination
meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved
to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each
coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.
4) Status of submittals.
5) Deliveries.
6) Off-site fabrication.
7) Access.
8) Site utilization.
9) Temporary facilities and controls.
10) Work hours.
11) Hazards and risks.
12) Progress cleaning.
13) Quality and work standards.
14) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others
affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 013100

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ` 013100 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction
during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule.

2. Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Construction schedule updating reports.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Site condition reports.
7. Special reports.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and
resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start
and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The
sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where
activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can
be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ` 013200 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly
owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones
and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start
of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting
the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity
as scheduled.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.

2. PDF electronic file.
3. One paper copy for each attendee at the progress meeting.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of
values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show
logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire
construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with
requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each
activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, resource loading, original duration,
remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in
calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual
start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order
by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most
recent Application for Payment.

F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

H. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

I. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

J. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ` 013200 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with
capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the
preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones and
partial Owner occupancy.
4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.
9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.
10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal
schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in
proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial
Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the
Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed
by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items
and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing,
fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction
schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ` 013200 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial

Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of
Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items
and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows
in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date
indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible
delivery date.
5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date
indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible
delivery date.
6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.

b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,
including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
m. Schedule demonstration and training.
n. Schedule Commissioning Activities.
o. Submittal of O and M manuals and submittals; schedule 30 days prior to requesting
Substantial Completion.

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work.
Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with
other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion.
b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
c. Permanent space enclosure.
d. Completion of mechanical installation.
e. Completion of electrical installation.
f. Substantial Completion.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ` 013200 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited
to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim
milestones:

1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.

E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence
prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the
current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor
intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew
sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been
developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of
date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week
with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction.
Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on
indicated activities.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for
the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded, time-
scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use
no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse
Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of
Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors'
personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.
3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress.
Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and
holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ` 013200 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the
startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each
activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals.

b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
i. Testing.
j. Punch list and final completion.
k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates.
Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network.
Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the
CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with
most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,
prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed
change on the overall project schedule.

F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed.

2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information
concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events (see special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ` 013200 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

12. Emergency procedures.

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Work Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract
Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a
detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract
Documents.

2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of
report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,
whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events,
persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar
pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual
construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,
changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and
inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule
responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

END OF SECTION 013200

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ` 013200 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Preconstruction video recordings.
4. Periodic construction video recordings.
5. Web-based construction photographic documentation.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for unit prices for extra photographs.
2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as project
record documents at Project closeout.
4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of
equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
5. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before selective demolition
operations commence.
6. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing operations
commence.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location
and direction of each photograph or video recording. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include
same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within seven days of taking photographs.

1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.

2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the
sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied
by key plan file.
3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:

a. Name of Project.
b. Date photograph was taken.
c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation
or story of construction.
d. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

C. Construction Photographs: Upload to Owner’s Internet Based Project Management Service; prints not
required.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ` 013233 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Identification: File names may be generated by the camera as long as names do not duplicate.
Files shall be sorted in folders by date taken.

D. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings within seven days of recording.

1. Submit video recordings by posting to Project Web site.

2. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information:

a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of photographer.
c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date video recording was recorded.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation
or story of construction.
g. Weather conditions at time of recording.

E. Web-Based Photographic Documentation: Submit time-lapse sequence video recordings within seven
days of recording.

1. Submit time-lapse sequence video recordings by posting to Web-based photographic

documentation service provider's Web site.
2. Identification: For each recording, provide the following information:

a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date(s) and time(s) video recording was recorded.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation
or story of construction.
g. Weather conditions at time of recording.

1.4 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of
photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of
8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video disc in format acceptable to Architect.

2.2 WEB-BASED PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

A. Project Camera: Provide fixed exterior camera installation, mounted to provide unobstructed view of
construction site from location approved by Architect.

1. Provide one fixed-location camera(s), with the following characteristics:

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ` 013233 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

a. Static view.
b. Capable of producing minimum 3.0 megapixel pictures.
c. Provide power supply, active high-speed data connection to service provider's network, and
static public IP address for each camera.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly
show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic
location.

B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site,
available at all times for reference on project web site. Identify images in the same manner as
those submitted to Architect and Construction Manager.

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and
surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage
points, as directed by Architect.

1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.

2. Take minimum 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the
Work.
3. Take minimum 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately
record physical conditions at start of construction.
4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures,
pavements, and improvements.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take minimum 20 photographs weekly. Select vantage points to
show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

E. Architect-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about
number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage
points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were
taken.

3.2 WEB-BASED CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

A. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Site Recordings: Provide video recording from a fixed-location
camera to show status of construction and progress.

1. Frequency: Record one frame of video recording at intervals TBD, from same vantage point each
time, to create a time-lapse sequence of construction activities.
2. Timer: Provide timer to automatically start and stop video recorder so recording occurs only during
daylight construction work hours.

B. Maintain cameras and Web-based access in good working order according to Web-based construction
photographic documentation service provider's written instructions until final completion. Provide for
service of cameras and related networking devices and software.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ` 013233 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

END OF SECTION 013233

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ` 013233 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements
for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of
values.
2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports,
including Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications,
and record Product Data.
5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of
equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's
responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as
"action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require
Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as
"informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another
computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a
portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able
to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for
representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout
document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and
delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those
corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's
construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule and within 21 days after
receipt of the signed contract. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction.
List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early
because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction
schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for
submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for
use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data

drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Revit 2012 and
AutoCAD 2012.
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106,
Digital Data Licensing Agreement.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction

activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial
submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section
as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing
will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for
review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be
authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,
including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial
submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or
other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Standard protocol requires that all submittals be transmitted
directly to the Architect and not to the Architect’s consultants; however the Contractor may arrange
with Architect, on a case by case basis, to transmit submittals simultaneously to the Architect and
the specified Architect’s consultant only when such arrangements have been made with the
Architect. Allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before
being returned to Contractor.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to
record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of subcontractor.
f. Name of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point
and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an
alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may
serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of

copies to Architect.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for
transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard
submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use Contractor’s own form.

b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following
information:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1) Project name.
2) Date.
3) Destination (To:).
4) Source (From:).
5) Name and address of Architect.
6) Name of Contractor.
7) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
8) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
9) Category and type of submittal.
10) Submittal purpose and description.
11) Specification Section number and title.
12) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
of multiple items.
13) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
14) Indication of full or partial submittal.
15) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
16) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
17) Remarks.
18) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to
each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall
include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and
action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project
management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g. Category and type of submittal.
h. Submittal purpose and description.
i. Specification Section number and title.
j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of
multiple items.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Related physical samples submitted directly.
n. Indication of full or partial submittal.
o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
q. Other necessary identification.
r. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect
on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor
variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. Deviations,
Alternatives, corrections and changes in the field conditions shall be summarized on the cover sheet or
transmittal and shall be highlighted in yellow in the submittal document. The Contractor shall not use
submittals to infer approval of deviations, alternatives or changes in field conditions. All changes in the
contract documents shall follow the procedures outlined in Section 012600. Action taken on a submittal
shall not constitute a modification of the Contract.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,

installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction
activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

K. Review of submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of
other details such as dimensions and quantities or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required
by the Contract Documents.

L. Shop drawings, product data, samples and similar submittals are not contract documents. The submittal
shall demonstrate, for the portions of the Work for which the submittal is required, the way the Contractor
proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents.

M. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring and review of shop drawings, product data,
samples or similar submittals until the respective submittals have been approved in writing by the A/E.
Such Work shall be in accordance with the approved submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual
Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically
established for Project.

a. Architect, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.

2. Action Submittals: Submit electronic files of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect[,
will return two copies.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Informational Submittals: Submit electronic files of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or
other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and
certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where
indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by
1067 mm).
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Paper Copies where indicated elsewhere.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and
actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one
submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of
Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification
information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine
final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are
the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product
line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same
material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical
with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations
expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured
or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used
materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for
independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record
sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating
types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in
tabular form:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or
assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project
Management and Coordination" and where indicated by individual specification section.

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction
Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900
"Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance
Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of
architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and
Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer
for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing
experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract
Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following
information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for
compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either
during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if
applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Y. Commissioning Plan.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and
systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written
request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, and three paper copies of certificate, signed and
sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to
Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Delegated Design Professional shall be
licensed in the State of Idaho where required by state licensing laws.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract
Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of
the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions.
Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout
Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's
approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT’S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions
required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp
appropriately to indicate action. Architect shall mark submittals as follows:

1. “Approved”.
2. “Make Corrections Noted”.
3. “Revise and Resubmit”.
4. “Submit Specified Items”.
5. “See Attached Architect’s Review”.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does
not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has
received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for
resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

END OF SECTION 013300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ` 013300 - 10

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Section 019113 ”General Commissioning Requirements”.

2. Section 019115 “Building Enclosure Commissioning Requirements”.
3. Section 019117 “Building Enclosure Functional Performance Testing Requirements”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also
cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance
and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of
the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply
with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of
the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply
with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify
selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities
of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between
dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are
not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work
will be judged.

1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the
building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.
2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes,
doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Individual Mockups: Mockups of specific assemblies that may or may not be connected or
integrated into a room or exterior mockup.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and
materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product
performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill,
factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work
and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall
mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,

Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,
erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain
construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements
specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed
a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent
requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a
decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum
provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality
specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements,
indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of
mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
3. Submit electronic copy of manufacturer’s published installation instructions along with Mockup
drawings.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of
written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the
following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated

seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting
system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report
on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.7 CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY PLAN

A. Safety Plan: Submit Safety Plan within 10 days of the Notice to Proceed and not less than five days prior
to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Plan shall describe how the
Contractor will insure the safety of the students, communicate this information to his sub-contractors and
how it will be enforced. Plan shall also describe off limits areas, detours, haul routes, etc.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not
less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify
personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's
quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.
Quality Control Plan shall be continuously updated and adapted to continuing project conditions and
requirements.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time, on-site, personnel trained and
experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature
and extent to those required for Project. Quality Control Managers shall be provided in two fields or
expertise:

1. Envelope Quality Control Manger: This person shall not be the Superintendent and shall be
responsible for managing quality control for all planes of the envelope included, but not limited to,
walls, glazed curtain walls, below grade waterproofing, all weather flashings and roofing, and total
envelope tightness.
2. Finishes Quality Control Manager: This person shall not be the Superintendent, but may also be
the Envelope Quality Control Manager. This person shall coordinate subcontractor work in relation

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

to quality control for all finishes including, but not limited to, paint, drywall installation, all finish
ceilings, tiling of walls and floors, trim, millwork, casework, and all floor finishes.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and
management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring
testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of
Special Inspections."
3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to
identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate
types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship
established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and
rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective
actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections.
Include the following:

1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract
Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the
following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if
not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications,
inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,
correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and
regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required;
individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction
with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly,
or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed
by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification
requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with
additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having
jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer

who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's
products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer

who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for
compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to
prevent delaying the Work.
c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to
adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.
d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers, supervisers & workmen
who will perform same tasks for Project.
e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of
construction indicated for the completed Work.
f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups; do not reuse products on Project. Only laboratory mockups may be integrated
into the Work; all others shall be removed.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and
state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract
Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of
construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. See
drawing sheet AE005 for all required mockups.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Quality Control Manager shall oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be
employed during the construction at Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop
Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are
required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.

M. Room Mockups: Construct room mockups incorporating required materials and assemblies, finished
according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where required to enable
Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Provide room mockups of the following rooms:

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will
engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies
engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.
2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by
Change Orders.
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed
to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's
responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with
requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by
authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities
having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to
perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by
Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or
inspecting will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written
report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are
Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they
so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report
results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to

observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in
preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation
of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that
replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are
conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or
accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in
advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.
Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control

services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control
services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan.
Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work
progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in
performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to
conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and as identified in the
2012 IBC as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and
reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to
Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes
a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
7. Refer to Drawings for a complete list of Special Tests and Inspections.

1.13 BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING AND FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency for building enclosure commissioning and functional
performance testing as specified in Sections 019115 and 019117.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend
restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
quality-control services.

END OF SECTION 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ` 014000 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and
requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the
Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,"

"selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in

Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled,"
and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and
rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and
similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling,
erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and
similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown
on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be
built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly
into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract
Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise
indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry
standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the
Contract Documents.

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies
directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of
Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone
numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the
date of the Contract Documents.

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202

www.aabc.com

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664

www.aamanet.org

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (202) 624-5800
www.transportation.org

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141

www.aatcc.org

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155

www.americanbearings.org

ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700

(Formerly: ACI International)
www.concrete.org

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216

www.concrete-pipe.org

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530

www.aeic.org

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878

www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700

AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000

www.aga.org

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955

www.aham.org

AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The) (703) 524-8800

www.ahrinet.org

AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960

www.asphaltinstitute.org

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837

www.aia.org (202) 626-7300

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100

www.steel.org

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559

www.aitc-glulam.org

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150
www.amca.org

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020

www.ansi.org

AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (607) 256-3313

www.aosaseed.com

APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600

www.apawood.org

APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989

www.archprecast.org

API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000

www.api.org

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute

(See AHRI)

ARI American Refrigeration Institute

(See AHRI)

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917

www.asphaltroofing.org

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300

ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute

(See ASCE)

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning (800) 527-4723

Engineers
www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763

(American Society of Mechanical Engineers) (973) 882-1170
www.asme.org

ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers (The) (847) 699-2929

www.asse.org

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040

www.asse-plumbing.org

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500

(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org

ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628-6380

www.atis.org

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

AWEA American Wind Energy Association (202) 383-2500

www.awea.org

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636

www.awinet.org

AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (403) 453-7387

www.awmac.com

AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077

(Formerly: American Wood-Preservers' Association)
www.awpa.com

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353

AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337

www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122

www.buildershardware.com

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010

www.gobrick.com

BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405

www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991

BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association)
www.bifma.com

BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772

www.bissc.org

BOCA BOCA
(Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.)
(See ICC)

BWF Badminton World Federation 60 3 9283 7155

(Formerly: International Badminton Federation)
www.bwfbadminton.org

CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200

CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263

www.electricity.ca

CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555

www.ce.org (703) 907-7600

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com

CFSEI Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute (866) 465-4732

www.cfsei.org (202) 263-4488

CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700

www.cganet.com

CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919

www.cisca.org

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (404) 622-0073

www.cispi.org

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583

www.chainlinkinfo.org

CPA Composite Panel Association (703) 724-1128

www.pbmdf.com

CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (706) 278-3176

www.carpet-rug.org

CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523

www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (800) 328-6306

www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200

CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727

www.csa.ca (416) 747-4000

CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000
www.csa-international.org

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300

CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700

www.cedarbureau.org

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org

CWC Composite Wood Council

(See CPA)

DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333

www.dasma.com

DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010

www.dhi.org

ECA Electronic Components Association (703) 907-8024

www.ec-central.org

ECAMA Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association

(See ECA)

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance

(See TIA)

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462

www.eima.com (703) 538-1616

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

www.ejma.org

ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937

(Electrostatic Discharge Association)
www.esda.org

ESTA Entertainment Services and Technology Association

(See PLASA)

EVO Efficiency Valuation Organization (415) 367-3643

www.evo-world.org 44 20 88 167 857

FIBA Fédération Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00

(The International Basketball Federation)
www.fiba.com

FIVB Fédération Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 45

(The International Volleyball Federation)
www.fivb.org

FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300

www.fmglobal.com

FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000

(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
www.fmglobal.com

FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671-3772
Association, Inc.
www.floridaroof.com

FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850

www.fluidsealing.com

FSC Forest Stewardship Council U.S. (612) 353-4511

www.fscus.org

GA Gypsum Association (301) 277-8686

www.gypsum.org

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208

www.glasswebsite.com

GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400

www.greenseal.org

HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700

www.pumps.org

HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association

(See AHRI)

HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

(See NAAMM)

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900

www.hpva.org

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550

www.hpwhite.com

IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (415) 536-0288

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

www.iapsc.org

IAS International Approval Services

(See CSA)

ICBO International Conference of Building Officials

(See ICC)

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233

www.iccsafe.org (202) 370-1800

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369

www.icea.net

ICPA International Cast Polymer Alliance (703) 525-0511

www.icpa-hq.org

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830

www.icri.org

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11

www.iec.ch

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900
www.ieee.org

IES Illuminating Engineering Society (212) 248-5000

(Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America)
www.ies.org

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

(See IES)

IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 981-0100

www.iest.org

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510

www.igmaonline.org

IGSHPA International Ground Source Heat Pump Association (405) 744-5175

www.igshpa.okstate.edu

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426

www.iliai.com

Intertek Intertek Group (800) 967-5352

(Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA)
www.intertek.com

ISA International Society of Automation (The) (919) 549-8411

(Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society)
www.isa.org

ISAS Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The)

(See ISA)

ISFA International Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732

(Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association) (801) 341-7360
www.isfanow.org

ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11

www.iso.org

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association

(See ISFA)

ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11

www.itu.int/home

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690

www.kcma.org

LMA Laminating Materials Association

(See CPA)

LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864

www.lightning.org

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333

www.mbma.com

MCA Metal Construction Association (847) 375-4718

www.metalconstruction.org

MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138

www.maplefloor.org

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610

www.metalframingmfg.org

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815

www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190

MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222

www.marble-institute.com

MMPA Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889

(Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association) (530) 661-9591
www.wmmpa.com

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937

www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings (703) 281-6613
Industry Inc.
www.mss-hq.org

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591

www.naamm.org

NACE NACE International (800) 797-6223

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200
www.nace.org

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926

www.nadca.com

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084

www.naima.org

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848

www.nbgqa.com

NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 8
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

www.ncaa.org

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900

www.ncma.org

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698

www.nebb.org

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110

www.necanet.org

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (207) 829-6901

www.nelma.org

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200

www.nema.org

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382

www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382

NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900

www.nfhs.org

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555

(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000
www.nfpa.org

NFPA NFPA International

(See NFPA)

NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776

www.nfrc.org

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318

www.nhla.com (901) 377-1818

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393

www.nlga.org

NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association

(See NWFA)

NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) 516-8585

www.nomma.org

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400

NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010
www.nsf.org

NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers (703) 684-2800

www.nspe.org

NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415

www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788

NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 9
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

www.ntma.com

NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422-4556

www.nwfa.org (636) 519-9663

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300

www.pci.org

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956

www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720

PLASA PLASA (212) 244-1505

(Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology
Association)
www.plasa.org

RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections

www.boltcouncil.org

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (706) 882-3833

www.rfci.com

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (925) 935-1499

www.redwoodinspection.com

SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323

(Society of Automotive Engineers) (724) 776-4841
www.sae.org

SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.

(See ICC)

SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542-5040

www.scte.org (610) 363-6888

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647

www.sdi.org

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010

www.steeldoor.org

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424

www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424

SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers

(See ASCE)

SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888

www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075

SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 293-1995

www.steeljoist.org

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (773) 636-0672

www.smainfo.org

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (703) 803-2980
www.smacna.org

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100

www.smpte.org

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 10
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154

www.sprayfoam.org

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (850) 434-2611

www.spib.org

SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026

www.spri.org

SRCC Solar Rating and Certification Corporation (321) 638-1537

www.solar-rating.org

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355

www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331

STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265

www.steeltank.com

SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333

www.steelwindows.com

SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847) 681-1868

www.swpa.org

TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association (319) 895-6911

www.tilt-up.org

TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453

(Formerly: Tile Council of America)
www.tileusa.com

TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040

www.tema.org

TIA Telecommunications Industry Association (703) 907-7700

(Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry
Association/Electronic Industries Alliance)
www.tiaonline.org

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries

Alliance
(See TIA)

TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700

www.masonrysociety.org

TPI Truss Plate Institute (703) 683-1010

www.tpinst.org

TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873

www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555

TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177

www.tileroofing.org

UBC Uniform Building Code

(See ICC)

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 11
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

www.ul.com

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902

www.uni-bell.org

USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539

www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747

www.usgbc.org

USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488
www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486

www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122

www.wcmanet.org

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301

www.wdma.com (312) 321-6802

WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943

(Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)
www.wicnet.org

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association

(See MMPA)

WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333

www.wsrca.com (650) 938-5441

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930

www.wwpa.org

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone
numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the
date of the Contract Documents.

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0

www.din.de

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100

www.iapmo.org

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233

www.iccsafe.org

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (800) 423-6587

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date
as of the date of the Contract Documents.

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 12
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011

www.usace.army.mil

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772

www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923

DOC Department of Commerce (301) 975-4040

National Institute of Standards and Technology
www.nist.gov

DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-2664

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220

www.energy.gov

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167

www.epa.gov

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322

www.faa.gov

FG Federal Government Publications (202) 512-1800

www.gpo.gov

GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111

www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112

www.hud.gov

LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000

Environmental Energy Technologies Division
http://eetd.lbl.gov

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742

www.osha.gov

SD Department of State (202) 647-4000

www.state.gov

TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934

National Cooperative Highway Research Program
www.trb.org

USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-3656

Agriculture Research Service
U.S. Salinity Laboratory
www.ars.usda.gov

USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791

Rural Utilities Service
www.usda.gov

USDJ Department of Justice (202) 307-0703

Office of Justice Programs
National Institute of Justice
www.ojp.usdoj.gov

USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 227-8772

www.usp.org (301) 881-0666

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 13
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

USPS United States Postal Service (202) 268-2000

www.usps.com

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800
www.gpo.gov/fdsys

DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-2664

Military Specifications and Standards
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus

(See FS)

FED-STD Federal Standard

(See FS)

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

Available from Defense Standardization Program

www.dsp.dla.mil

Available from General Services Administration (800) 488-3111

www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design (202) 289-7800
Guide
www.wbdg.org/ccb

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards

(See DOD)

USAB United States Access Board (800) 872-2253

www.access-board.gov (202) 272-0080

USATBCB U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board

(See USAB)

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date
as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CBHF State of California (800) 952-5210

Department of Consumer Affairs (916) 574-2041
Bureau of Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal
Insulation
www.bearhfti.ca.gov

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 14
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6225

Office of Administrative Law
California Title 24 Energy Code
www.calregs.com

CDHS California Department of Health Care Services

(Formerly: California Department of Health Services)
(See CCR)

CDPH California Department of Public Health

Indoor Air Quality Program
www.cal-iaq.org

CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (800) 848-5580

www.cpuc.ca.gov (415) 703-2782

SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District (909) 396-2000

www.aqmd.gov

TFS Texas Forest Service

Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry (979) 458-6606
http://txforestservice.tamu.edu

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 014200

REFERENCES ` 014200 - 15
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection
facilities.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
2. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the
Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities
without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project,
testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available
for use and shall be billed to the Contractor through the duration of the Contract.. Provide connections and
extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for
use and shall be billed to the Contractor through the duration of the Contract. Provide connections and
extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction
personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction
General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction.
Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from
water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or
water damage.
2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water
intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering,
and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show
procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish
materials.

E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and
HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their
operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include
the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.
3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.
4. Waste handling procedures.
5. Other dust-control measures.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric
service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility
before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a
construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link
fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-
) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-
spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and
foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and construction
personnel office activities and to accommodate meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep
office clean and orderly. Progress Meetings will be held in the Owner’s facilities adjacent to the Project
Site. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and
bookcases.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical
power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall.
Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack and marker boards.
3. Drinking water and private toilet.
4. Coffee machine and supplies.
5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72
deg F (20 to 22 deg C).
6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds, as required, sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and
classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-
contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is

prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use
during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at
end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no
longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if
necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system or private system indicated as directed by

authorities having jurisdiction.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.

D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service
facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition
existing before initial use.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction
personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

F. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed
installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high
humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being
installed.

G. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied
areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed
according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied
areas.
b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units,
starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until
removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing
equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.
3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped
vacuum equipment.

H. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements
being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize
energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level
required to allow installation or application of finishes.

I. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a
condition acceptable to Owner.

J. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity,
and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

K. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without
operating entire system.
2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

L. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.

b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
e. Architect's office.
f. Engineers' offices.
g. Owner's office.
h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from
field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or
within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with
NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove
before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted
to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate
for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated, or if not indicated,
within construction limits indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required
to minimize dust.

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same
location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits
indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading,
proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before
Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final
course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving."

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E. Parking: Provide temporary or use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction
personnel if available.

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain
Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties
or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.

2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals
seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."

I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment"
and not temporary facilities.

J. Temporary Elevator Use: See Section 142400 "Hydraulic Elevators" for temporary use of new elevators.

K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide OSHA compliant temporary stairs to all
above or below grade levels.

L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided
stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other
improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered.
Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as
required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA Construction
General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in
Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Owner and Contractor comprise the Storm Water Team and are co-
permittees. The Owner designs and retains control over any changes to site plans, SWPPPs, or storm
water conveyance or control designs for the campus. The Contractor is responsible for SWPPP for the
project site and shall oversee actual earth disturbing activities and daily implementation and maintenance
of the controls specified in the SWPPP and other permit conditions. Storm Water Team personnel are
listed on the Project-specific SWPPP-CAs. Both parties need to apply for coverage by filing a Notice of
Intent (NOI). The Contractor is responsible for compliance with general permit requirements which can be
viewed at http://www.epa.gov/npdes/pubs/cgp2012_finalpermit.pdf. Contractor responsibility includes
installation and maintenance of controls, inspections, reporting and notifications, and training. Contractor
personnel responsible for storm water compliance for project-specific SWPPP-CAs will be listed on the
project-specific SWPPP-CA.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and
around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy
rains.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of
trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems
from damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of
rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals
so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations
lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a
manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to
accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar
violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide
temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary
enclosures.

L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to
separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-
retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.
2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side.
Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460
mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated
plywood.
3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having
jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.
4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.
5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where
openings are required.
6. Protect air-handling equipment.
7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to
protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-
prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire
ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project
site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct
personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign
stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size
with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of
mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to
wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
4. Remove standing water from decks.
5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and
conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient
mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic
content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.
5. Do not install material that is wet.
6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing
the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but
prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to
water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based
products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours
are considered defective.
b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during
construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure
and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than
allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level
within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit
availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and
similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid
possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection
facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it
has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.
Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner
reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into
permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and
aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that
might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and
sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ` 015000 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project;
product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special
warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.

2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
3. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
4. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and
terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is
current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility.
Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to
have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named

and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products"
Article.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ` 016000 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of

receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is
later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product
request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use
on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected
products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and
loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to
determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation
and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and
weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by
Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do
not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular

product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ` 016000 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights
for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready
for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly

executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written
document using indicated form properly executed.
3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting
special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a
complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,
provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar
situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish
salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or
approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to
obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named
product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's
convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a
product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable
products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
3. Products:
a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product,
that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that
complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on

Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ` 016000 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications
indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed
product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product
that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on
whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified
requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal
of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect
will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both
standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when
the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is
consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is
compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,
visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names
and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 016000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ` 016000 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record
Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final
cleaning.
4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the
building.
5. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of
other work.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.

C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting
and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural

elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other
significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and
patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and
those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and
systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of
permanent services and systems.

D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous
materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. Contractor shall provide a Certified Survey
showing actual finish floor elevations of the Main Levels of the Academic Building and the Large Animal
Building.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the
kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction
elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations
and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and
support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Fire separation assemblies.
c. Air or smoke barriers.
d. Fire-suppression systems.
e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
f. Control systems.
g. Communication systems.
h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.
i. Conveying systems.
j. Electrical wiring systems.
k. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.
c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.
d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

e. Equipment supports.
f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of
cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in
Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that
has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting
and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and
conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will
provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place
materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence
and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary
sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving
Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work,
examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections
before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be
installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or
primers.

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is
required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the
Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate
existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected
by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on
Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of
Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100
"Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect
promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and
elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations,
column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer
survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two
or more locations.

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels.
Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each
survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by
Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points
before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during
construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of
Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the
need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements
on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for
type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary
reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its
original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring
field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations of construction and sitework.

E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant
features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that
principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements
and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and
bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease
of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches
(2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in
excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on
site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory
prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and
number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of
the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load
conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange
joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with
cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during
installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting
and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in
Section 011000 "Summary."

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required
to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize
interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations,
including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If
possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written
recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of
adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core
drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by
cutting and patching operations.
5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following
performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide
materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat
over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch
blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils,
putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's
construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's
portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify
Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences

covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences
conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's
construction.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly.
Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are
working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If
specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health
or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers
or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already
in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at
Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 8
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in
Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements."

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

END OF SECTION 017300

EXECUTION ` 017300 - 9
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.

2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of
buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of hazardous waste.
2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
3. Section 044313.13 "Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer" for disposal requirements for excess stone
and stone waste.
4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of
above- and below-grade improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from
construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or
deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to
waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management
coordinator.
2. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and
bins needed to avoid delays.
3. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal
facilities.
4. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist
of waste identification, waste reduction work plan.

B. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or
disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, means of recovery, and handling
and transportation procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage,
transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire
duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary
Facilities and Controls."

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as
appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan
procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be
salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt,
environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements,
date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment.
Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for
use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements,
date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from
exposure to weather.

3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling
waste materials shall be the Contractor’s, with the exception of those placed in Owner supplied dumpsters
as required.

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse
facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and
other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from
Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and
shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundled and sorted into Owner
supplied and managed dumpsters and shall be the property of the Owner.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.
For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for
recycling wood.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean sawdust as organic
mulch.

C. Metals:

1. All metals/steel shall be sorted into Owner supplied and managed dumpsters and shall be the
property of the Owner.

D. Copper: All copper waste shall be sorted into Owner supplied containers.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate
on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

END OF SECTION 017419

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not
limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction

photographic documentation.
2. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications,
and record Product Data.
5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other
Sections.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ` 017700 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected
(Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is
incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior (except as
noted below) to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting
Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy
permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record
documents, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement
surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare
parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with
manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance

material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of
related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
7. O and M manuals shall be submitted 30 days prior to requesting Substantial Completion inspection.
8. Demonstration and Training shall be scheduled and the syllabus approved 30 days prior to
requesting Substantial Completion inspections.
9. Record Drawings shall be submitted 10 days prior to requesting Substantial Completion inspection.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to
requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete
at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel
of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900
"Demonstration and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10
days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of
items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ` 017700 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion
inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect.
Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days
prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will
prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction
operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by
Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from
lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual
walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

5. Punch list items shall be completed within 30 calender days and before final completion.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay
in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ` 017700 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated
portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by
separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as
necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm)
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project
name, and name of Contractor.
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond
submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file and be provided in the electronic O and
M. See Section 017823. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the
surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or
that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use
products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local
laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or
unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply
with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including
landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign
substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ` 017700 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior
surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according
to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and
glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from
water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or
that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written
report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and
Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction
Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial
Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts,
refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating
equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements.
Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and
permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged
transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace
finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or
reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy
starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ` 017700 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

END OF SECTION 017700

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ` 017700 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The contractor shall provide Owner with manuals for the safe and effective Operation and Maintenance (O&M)
of the systems and equipment listed. O&M Manual requirements included in other Sections of this
Specification are in addition to, and do not replace, those required in this Section. Refer to the Commissioning
section, 019113, paragraph 1.3 for a list of equipment requiring O & M manuals.

1.2 FORMAT

A. Bind manuals in durable, locking, 3-ring binders. Binders shall be white view-type binders with clear plastic
overlays to allow insertion of title pages for binder identification.

B. Use 8-1/2" x 11" sheets, except that larger sheets up to 11” x 17” may be used when double folded to this size
and used as a pull-out. Documents which are larger than 11” x 17” shall be reduced to 11” x 17” for inclusion in
the manuals except where this compromises legibility (for drawings that are to scale, add a graphic scale prior
to reduction). Documents that cannot be reduced will be folded and inserted in plastic envelopes inserted in
the binders so that the folded documents are securely bound into the binders. Loosely inserted documents or
documents inserted into pockets in the inside covers of the binders shall not be acceptable.

C. Each binder shall be labeled on both cover and spine to indicate project name and Owner’s project number,
submitting contractor, date, general contents, volume number and total number of volumes in set.

D. At the front of each binder include the following information:

1 Master Table of Contents (TOC) identifying chapter headings and numbers for all O&M Manual volumes
provided by the submitting contractor.
2 Detailed TOC for the current volume listing, in order, the sections and subsections within each chapter of
that specific manual.
3 Contact sheet for the submitting contractor listing appropriate contact names, addresses, phone numbers,
and email addresses
4 Introduction including a brief description of project and purpose of the manual.

E. Manuals shall be divided into chapters based on specification sections. Chapters shall be identified using both
the specification section number and name (i.e. 232123 Hydronic Pumps). Manual chapters shall be further
subdivided into sections and sub-sections as appropriate for clarity of organization and to facilitate use by
Owner.

Chapters shall be separated by index tabs labeled with the covered specification name and number. Chapter
division tabs shall be identical to each other in style and appearance, but different than the section division
tabs.

Major sections within a chapter shall be separated by index tabs, which indicate the equipment or material
covered. Section division tabs shall be identical to each other in style and appearance, but different than the
chapter division tabs.
Provide a complete bill of materials in matrix format.

F. In addition to the hard copy O&M manuals, provide one full set of electronic O&M manuals for each set of hard
copies. The electronic format shall be of the owner’s choice (i.e. DVD, CD).

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ` 017823 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Format Submittal. The Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of their proposed O&M Manual format including
a detailed outline of contents within ninety (90) days after approval of final submittals. Owner will require ninety
(90) days for format review.

B. Preliminary Submittal. Two (2) copies of the draft manuals shall be submitted to Owner for review no less than
3 months prior to the anticipated start of operator training. One copy will be returned to the Contractor within
sixty (60) days after submittal and, if required, shall be revised and resubmitted within thirty (30) days.

C. Final Submittal. Four (4) complete sets of manuals and electronic copies shall be furnished to Owner thirty (30)
days prior to the anticipated start of operator training.

2.0 REQUIREMENTS

2.1 PURPOSE

A. The Operation and Maintenance manuals are for the training of, and use by, Owner’s employees in the
operation and maintenance of the systems and equipment as specified below. The manuals shall consist of
instruction on systems and equipment. A separate manual or set of manuals shall be prepared for each class
of components, equipment or systems as specified.

2.2 CONTENT

A. Each chapter shall contain the following, information in addition to the requirements specified elsewhere in
these specifications.
1 Contact list identifying vendors providing equipment and systems covered in the current chapter. This
information shall include vendor name, address, name of contact person(s), phone numbers (including 24
hour service numbers where appropriate), fax numbers, and email addresses.
2 Equipment/material schedule(s) for all covered equipment and systems showing equipment identification
(tag) number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, quantities, area/system served, equipment
location, etc.
3 Safety Precautions. This subsection shall comprise a listing of safety precautions and instructions to be
followed during operation and before, during, and after repairs or adjustments are made.

B. Each chapter shall describe the procedures necessary for Owner’s personnel to operate and maintain the
systems and equipment covered in that chapter.

C. References shall be made, as appropriate, to drawings, schematics, sequences of operation and other
information included as part of the construction contract drawings and specifications that show distribution
system layout, equipment arrangements and items of control.

D. All information included in the final O&M Manuals, including equipment schedules, manufacturer’s literature,
drawings, etc. shall represent the "as-built" condition.

E. Manufacturer’s literature and other information provided in the O&M Manuals shall be for the actual equipment
installed under contract for the particular facility. Where literature (standard product catalogs, cut-sheets, etc.)
contains data pertaining to parts, equipment or options other than those specifically provided for this project,
the contractor shall clearly indicate the specific products, model numbers, and options provided. Mark-ups
made by the contractor for this purpose shall be made in a manner that will clearly photocopy (no highlighters).

F. A brief description of each type of required information follows:

1 Warranty information
a. Provide copies of all warranty certificates from equipment manufacturers
b. If not included on warranty certificate, provide the start/end dates of warranty period, descriptions of
what is and isn’t covered and contact information for warranty claims (if different from contact list
described above).

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ` 017823 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

c. Provide information of an operations or maintenance nature covering warranty items that have not
been discussed elsewhere.

2 Product Information.
a. Provide manufacturers' standard, published product literature describing covered materials,
equipment and devices including illustrations, exploded views, dimensions, weights, application
data, etc.
b. Where manufacturer’s product information (catalog cut-sheets, etc.) contain data pertaining to parts,
equipment or options other than those specifically provided for this project, the contractor shall
clearly indicate the specific products, model numbers, and options provided. Mark-ups made by the
contractor for this purpose shall be made in a manner that will clearly photocopy (no highlighters).
c. Provide manufacturer’s standard, published Installation, Operation & Maintenance bulletins
pertaining to the specific equipment installed.
d. Provide performance curves and rating data, specific to the equipment installed on the project such
as fan and pump curves, chiller selection sheets, sound data, etc.
e. Provide a copy of all approved shop drawings covering approval of equipment for the project with the
product information. Include all data concerning changes made during construction.

3 Preventive Maintenance Procedures & Schedules

a. Provide written preventive maintenance procedures describing each required PM task. Procedures
shall include lists of tools and parts required and all safety precautions to be taken.
b. State, preferably in tabular form, the recommended frequency for each preventive maintenance task
(cleaning, inspection, lubrication, scheduled overhauls, etc.). Task schedules shall be grouped and
sorted by frequency (daily, weekly, quarterly, annually, etc.)
c. Procedures for lubrication of equipment shall indicate both the type and quantity of lubricant to be
used.
d. If periodic inspection of equipment is required for operation, cleaning, or other reasons, indicate the
items to be inspected and give the inspection criteria. Examples of equipment requiring inspections
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Motors
2) Controls
3) Filters
4) Heat exchangers
5) Emergency Generator and associated fuel system
6) ATS and associated systems
7) TVSS and associated systems

e. Provide instruction for the proper handling, disposal and/or removal of hazardous or otherwise
special materials such as used filters, refrigerant, oils, chemicals, etc.

f. Provide instruction for minor repairs or adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines.
Minor repair and adjustment shall be limited to repairs and adjustments that may be performed
without special tools or test equipment and that require no special training or skills. Identify test
points and give values for each.

4 Corrective Maintenance Procedures

a. Corrective Maintenance. Corrective maintenance instructions shall be predicated upon a logical
effect-to-cause troubleshooting philosophy and a rapid replacement procedure to minimize
equipment downtime. Instructions and data shall appear in the normal sequence of corrective
maintenance, for example, troubleshooting first, repair and replacement of parts second, and then
the parts list.
b. Troubleshooting. This information shall describe the general procedure for locating malfunctions
and shall give, in detail, any specific remedial procedures or techniques. The data shown are

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ` 017823 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

intended to isolate only the most common equipment deficiencies. Troubleshooting tables, charts,
or diagrams may be used to present specific procedures. A guide to this type shall be a three-
column chart. The columns shall be entitled Malfunction, Probable Cause, and Recommended
Action. The information shall be alphabetically arranged by component, and each component shall,
in turn, list deficiencies that may be expected. Each deficiency shall contain one or more problems
with a recommended correction.
c. Repair and Replacement. Indicate the repair and replacement procedures most likely to be required
in the maintenance of the systems and equipment. Information included here shall consist of step-
by-step instructions for repair and replacement of defective items. Include all information required to
accomplish repair or replacement, including information such as torque values. Identify all tools,
special equipment, and materials that may be required. Identify uses for maintenance equipment.
The paragraphs shall contain headings to identify the topics covered.

5 Spare Parts Lists.

a. Provide a list of all spare parts for the covered equipment. The parts list shall include a tabulation of
descriptive data for each part including part number and manufacturer. Where available, provide an
exploded diagram of the equipment identifying parts listed in the spare parts list.
b. Provide a list of recommended spare parts to be kept in inventory by the Owner’s maintenance staff
for performance of preventive maintenance and typical corrective maintenance tasks.

6 System Descriptions:
a. Provide a narrative, (both typewritten and electronic format), describing, in general terms, the
covered equipment / system. Topics to be covered in this narrative shall include theory of operation,
overall system layout, description of major components, interconnections with utilities and other
systems, description of control system layout and operation, identification of unusual features or
functions, and major safety precautions. This information should correlate with information provided
in the manufacturers' standard published literature.
b. Provide the following data (if not already being provided under the other requirements in this
specification):
1) Detailed illustrations and schematic diagrams of each system showing major
components, piping, valves, controls, utility connections, and other components, where
applicable.
2) Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each
component.
3) Control sequences describing start-up, all modes of operation, and shut down.
4) Corrected shop drawings.
5) Copies of approved certifications and laboratory test reports (where applicable).

7 Operating Instructions:
a. Provide, (both typewritten and electronic format), condensed instructions for operation of the
covered system / equipment. Where more than one (1) common unit is installed, one set of
instructions is adequate. The instructions shall provide procedures for:
1) Starting up the equipment/system.
2) Shutting down the equipment/system.
3) Normal operating procedures.
4) Procedures for operating the equipment / system in emergency or unusual conditions.
5) Safety precautions.
6) Procedures for both short-term and long-term equipment lay-up.
7) Other pertinent data applicable to the operation of particular systems or equipment.
8) The instructions shall be suitable for posting adjacent to the equipment concerned.
8 Factory Test Reports

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ` 017823 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

a. Provide copies of factory test reports specified in the covered section of the specifications.
b. Test reports should include a brief description of the test procedures used, test date, names of
personnel performing test, names of personnel witnessing test (if any), test results and comparison
of test results with specified acceptance criteria.

9 Field Test Reports

a. Provide copies of field test reports specified in the covered section of the specifications. Samples of
field testing include, but are not limited to, leak testing of piping and ductwork and megger testing of
electrical distribution systems.
b. Test reports shall clearly indicate the type of test performed, test procedures used, system being
tested, section or area of equipment being tested, date of test, signatures of personnel performing
and witnessing the test, test results and comparison of test results with specified acceptance criteria.

10 Posted Operating Instructions and Diagrams:

a. Operating Instructions: (Provide both, typewritten and electronic format)
1) Where specified, copies of operating instructions shall be posted in the near vicinity of
each piece of applicable equipment. The instructions shall be mounted neatly in frames
under Plexiglas, where they can be easily read by operating personnel. Instructions
mounted outdoors shall be suitably protected from weather.
2) Coordinate with owner regarding size and location of posted operating instructions.

b. Systems Diagrams: (Provide both, typewritten and electronic format)

1) Simplified one (1) line diagrams of HVAC heating, cooling, and airflow systems shall be
developed and posted neatly under Plexiglas in the main or most appropriate equipment
room for easy reference by operating and maintenance personnel.
2) These drawings shall be done in a professional manner, which is acceptable to the
Owner’s Facility Management staff. The diagrams shall show each component including
all valves installed in the system, with name and identifying number. If space does not
permit valve numbers on the diagrams, valve charts shall be provided. Explanatory
notes, where needed, shall be provided.
3) Coordinate with owner regarding locations of posted operating instructions.
4) These diagrams shall be suitable for reduction in size and use in the operating manual
system descriptions previously covered.

END OF SECTION 017823

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ` 017823 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the
following:

1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files of Project's
Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each
submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit
duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping
requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy or
annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents
concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product
selections, and other notations incorporated.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ` 017839 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings,
incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity
is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding
marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to

identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Work Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel
proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original
Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and
similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review
marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of
the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original
Contract Drawings.
2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete,
redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
5. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in
recording information.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ` 017839 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

a. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's
digital data files.
b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING"
in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets.
Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that
correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification.
Include identification in each digital data file.
4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from
that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a
record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation
and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file, paper copy or scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies
substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's
written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file, paper copy or scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title,
electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ` 017839 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record
keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous
records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file, paper copy or scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record
document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait
until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office
apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition,
protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's
reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION 017839

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ` 017839 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 017900 - OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The Contractor shall train Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of systems and equipment
listed in this Section and as mentioned in other sections. Where applicable, contractors shall coordinate
with the Commissioning Team for developing the hours of instruction and scope of material to be covered.
Training of Owner’s personnel shall not begin until Owner has approved the final submittal copy of the
operation and maintenance manuals and training programs, and the building systems and equipment are
complete and operational.

B. Schedule Submittal. The proposed scope of training, training materials and instruction schedule shall be
submitted for review and approval approximately 30 days before the scheduled completion of the work for
which training is to occur. Mutually agreeable dates for training shall be arranged with Owner, but the
training shall be completed before the Final Operational Test. Training shall not begin until the
Contractor’s proposed training plan and schedule have been approved by the owner.

C. The required training/demonstration indicated in the technical sections of the specifications is

supplemental or in addition to the training required in this Section (where not a duplication).

D. See Section 017823 “Operation and Maintenance Data” for related Closeout Submittals and Electronic
Document System with Operation Manuals; 1.4, B and 2.3.

1.2 COORDINATED EFFORT

A. The Contractor or Contractor provided professional training firm shall work closely with Owner’s personnel
in the development and implementation of the training program. This includes preliminary meetings to
map out the direction the training will take and development, with Owner’s approval, of the written training
materials.

B. The Commissioning Team will provide sample training session guidelines and agendas for use by the
Contractors in developing their training programs where applicable.

2.0 REQUIREMENTS

2.1 SCOPE OF TRAINING

A. Training must include both classroom and on-the-job (hands-on) instruction by qualified manufacturer’s
representatives, vendors, installation/service technicians and operation personnel having the necessary
knowledge, experience, and teaching skills.

B. The training shall provide comprehensive instruction on the operation and maintenance of building
components, equipment, controls, and systems including procedures for startup, shutdown, normal
operation, abnormal operation, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and corrective maintenance.

C. The classroom portion of each training session shall be based on the information contained in the
approved O&M Manuals and will use copies of these manuals for reference. This shall include the
following items as applicable:

 Content and organization of appropriate O&M Manual materials

 Overall equipment / system layout and configuration
 Locations and tag numbers of major components
 Theory of Operation / Design Intent
 Startup and Shutdown Procedures
 Normal Operating Procedures
 Non-normal Operating Procedures (unoccupied, seasonal operation, etc.)
 Emergency procedures
 Health and Safety issues (both to O&M personnel and Building occupants)

OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING ` 017900 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

 Energy Efficiency Issues

 Occupant Comfort and IAQ Issues
 Control System Sequence of Operation
 Preventive Maintenance Procedures
 Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Procedures
 Corrective Maintenance & Repair Procedures

D. The field portion of each training session shall at a minimum cover the following items as applicable:

 Walk-down of covered equipment and systems

 Demonstration of startup, shutdown and operating procedures
 Demonstration of diagnostic, service, maintenance and repair procedures

E. All training sessions will be videotaped by the Contractor per Section 017823.

F. Follow-up or post-occupancy training, where specified, shall be planned, scheduled and conducted per the
requirements of this specification. This training will focus on seasonal issues that could not be addressed
during the initial training and on addressing operational and maintenance issues identified by the Owner
since turnover.

2.2 RESPONSIBILITY OF TRAINING

A. The Contractor provided training will be directed at a group of Owner’s personnel who will act as a training
cadre.

B. The Contractor is responsible for providing training to this cadre in all systems and equipment needed to
operate and maintain the Facility.

C. This cadre will then be responsible for training other personnel assigned to the Facility.

2.3 LEVEL OF EXPERTISE OF INSTRUCTORS

A. Contractor may use professional training firms.

B. Credentials of training instructors are subject to review and approval by Owner.

1. Instructors must have knowledge and experience with the equipment on which they are providing
training
2. Instructors must be familiar with the organization and content of Operation and Maintenance
Manuals for the equipment on which they are providing training.
3. Instructors for controls must be knowledgeable and familiar with the specific controls equipment,
project applications, and specific sequences of operation for this project.

2.4 TRAINING PROGRAM AND MATERIALS

A. The training program, in its entirety, shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall become the property of
Owner. This includes but is not limited to:

1. All lesson plans, teachers' guides or training aids used to instruct the students. One complete set
shall be given to Owner.

2. All written materials. e.g. workbooks, manufacturers' instructions, brochures, student tests,
charts or other printed or photographed visual aids. Three (3) sets with one complete
reproducible master shall be given to Owner.

3. All audio visual materials e.g. video tapes, 35mm slides, film and audio cassettes, overhead
projector transparencies, software files of presentations, or other audio visual medium. Three
sets shall be given to Owner.

OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING ` 017900 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. The Contractor shall provide all equipment related to the conveyance of the training program e.g. VHS
video cassette recorders, color TV monitors, slide projectors, movie projectors, cassettes players,
overhead projector, or other related equipment. Non-permanent mounted white boards, cork board and
projector screens. Equipment of this nature provided by the contractors for use during training sessions
does NOT become the property of Owner. Contractors shall promptly remove said equipment at the end
of the training session(s).

2.5 CLASSROOM TRAINING

A. Locations for classroom training sessions shall be coordinated with Owner. All training shall be conducted
on-site except by prior arrangement and approval by Owner.

B. Classroom space provided by the contractors for off-site training shall meet the following requirements:

1. The classroom shall be free of exterior visual and noise interference.

2. The classroom shall be lighted and climate controlled with ventilation, air conditioning and
heating.
3. The classroom shall be lockable with secure or patrolled parking adjacent to the building.
4. Restroom and drinking water facilities shall be on the premises and food services nearby or
provided on site.
5. The classroom shall facilitate the training of thirty (30) students. Tables, chairs and storage of
audio-visual equipment and class written materials shall be provided.

C. Any pre-approved off-site training shall include transportation, lodging and meals as appropriate.

3.1 TIME PERIOD OF TRAINING

A. The minimum specific hours of training time provided for each category of major equipment and systems
shall be in accordance with the specification sections pertaining to this equipment or systems.

B. OWNER retains the option of redistributing training time, subject to the total time specified. This may
include repetition of selected training sessions or provision for follow-up training sessions after occupancy.

C. Training must be presented on an 8-hour per day, 5-day per week schedule, with all reading assignments
and review to be within this period. (Note: eight (8) hour training days include 1/2 hour lunch and travel
time.)

D. Specific schedules for all training sessions must be coordinated in advance with Owner.

END OF SECTION 017900

OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING ` 017900 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................................12
1.1 THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS ......................................................................................................................12
1.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS: ..................................................................................................................23
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................................................... 23
1.4 CONTRACTOR PARTICIPATION .........................................................................................................................23
1.5 COORDINATION & SCHEDULING .......................................................................................................................34

GENERAL

1.1 THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS

A. Definition
1 Commissioning (Cx) is a systematic quality assurance process which helps ensure that selected
equipment and systems are installed and operate per the contract documents and project’s design
intent.
2 The commissioning process consists of a series of procedures which start as soon as
commissioned equipment and systems start being installed and continues thru the end of the
construction process.

B. Commissioning Agent:
1 The Cx process for systems covered by the Cx specifications will be led by independent
commissioning agent(s) (CxA).

C. Commissioning Team
1 The Cx process will be a team effort and will encompass and coordinate the traditionally separate
functions of system documentation, system installation, equipment start-up, control system
calibration, testing, balancing, verification, and performance checkouts.
2 The General Contractor (GC) and Sub-contractors installing and/or furnishing equipment and
systems listed in Section 1.3 - Scope of Work including their subcontractors, suppliers, vendors and
the TAB Contractors will be part of the Cx Team.
3 The Cx team is composed of the Owner and their designees, Design Team, CxA, GC and their
subs/vendors; The CxA leads the commissioning team and plans, schedules, coordinates, and
directs the Cx activities.
4 For a breakdown of the Commissioning Team member’s duties by phase and activity, see the BYU
– Idaho Agrisciences Commissioning Plan - Appendix 6 – Roles and Responsibilities Matrix.

D. Impact on Contractor Responsibility:

1 The Cx Process does not reduce the responsibility of the installing contractors to provide a finished
and fully functioning product. The Cx Process also does not alter any obligation the Contractors
have for operation and maintenance manuals, training or any other contractual requirements.
2 The CxA does not have the authority to provide direction to the Contractors. Any issues arising
during the Commissioning Process which impact schedules, costs or contractual obligations should
be addressed to the CM/GC for resolution.

E. Commissioning Process Overview:

As part of the commissioning process, the contractors shall participate in the following Commissioning
Activities:
1 Pre-Functional Procedures (PFPs) consist of a series of field observations conducted during the
installation of commissioned equipment to verify that equipment is installed per the contract
documents and is ready for startup.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2 Contractor Pre-Startup Testing consists of normally specified contractor testing such as leak testing
of ductwork and piping and megger testing of electrical equipment. The commissioning process is
used to ensure that this testing is rigorously executed and documented in preparation for
equipment startup.
3 Equipment Startup Procedures ensure that startup is performed per the equipment manufacturer’s
recommended procedures and startup activities and data are documented for future reference.
4 Contractor Post-Startup Testing consists of normally specified contractor testing activities occurring
after startup including, but not limited to, TAB of ventilation and hydronic systems, control system
point-to-point testing and testing of BAS sequences of operation, individual room thermostat
operation, emergency generator testing, etc. The commissioning process provides oversight
during the execution and documentation of these tests to ensure successful system operation.
5 Functional Performance Procedures (FPPs) determine if equipment, sub-systems and major
systems operate in accordance with the design intent and the contract documents. Specific issues,
which will be evaluated in these procedures, include equipment capacity & efficiency, operation of
safeties and interlocks, control system operation stability and tuning.
6 Fire Life Safety Procedures (FLSPs) evaluate interactive operation of building systems in response
to simulated fire conditions.
7 Emergency System Procedure (ESP) evaluates integrated operation of building systems in
response to a simulated electric utility power failure. The ESP checks the operation of both the
emergency power system(s) and all other building systems specified to operate under emergency
power conditions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS:

A. Abbreviations and definitions of common commissioning process terms are attached as Appendix 1 to
this specification.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The following procedures and requirements apply to all contractors, sub-contractors, suppliers and
vendors furnishing and/or installing components, equipment and systems covered by the commissioning
scope as outlined below.

B. TK Covered Systems:
1 The commissioning scope will include all the equipment and systems listed in the spec divisions
below:
21 00 00 Fire Suppression
22 00 00 Plumbing
23 00 00 HVAC & DDC
26 00 00 Electrical
27 00 00 Audio/Visual
14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevators

2 A detailed list of equipment to be commissioned can be found in Appendix 3 of this Spec section.

1.4 CONTRACTOR PARTICIPATION

A. General
1 Contractors providing and/or installing equipment and systems included in Section 1.3 ‘Scope of
Work’ above are required to participate fully in the Commissioning Process.
2 Participating Contractors shall include all costs to complete the Cx requirements in their contract
price including all costs for sub-contractors, vendors and suppliers.
3 Participating Contractors shall ensure acceptable representation, with the means and authority to
prepare, coordinate and execute the Commissioning Process as described in the contract
documents.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Contractor’s Commissioning Representative (CCR)

1 Each contractor participating in the Cx Process will each designate a single-point contact person to
work with the CxA and the Commissioning Team to coordinate commissioning activities, ensure
timely execution of Cx Procedures and prompt resolution of commissioning issues.
2 The CCR shall be the contractor’s Project Manager, Field Superintendent or similar with authority
to do the following:
a. Make decisions regarding commissioning activities and issues
b. Schedule technicians for participation in commissioning activities
c. Interface between the Commissioning Team and the contractor’s sub-contractors, vendors
and suppliers.
d. Commit to commissioning schedules and completion dates.

3 The CCR will be responsible for coordinating the contractor’s participation in the Cx Process. As
part of this role, the CCR shall
a. Attend all Commissioning Meetings
b. Keep the CM/GC and CxA apprised of the contractor’s progress, schedules and other
matters impacting execution of the Commissioning Procedures.
c. Coordinate the contractor’s work schedules and staffing to ensure that the qualified
technician(s) are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient
duration to complete procedures, tests, adjustments, and/or problem resolutions.
d. Ensure that the contractor’s CxA provided, Commissioning Notebook(s) containing the CxA
generated Pre-functional forms (or Contractor supplied forms approved by the CxA) and
Contractor Commissioning Documents such as the Status Tracking forms, pressure testing
forms, start-up forms, etc., are being maintained on-site, well organized and current as
required in item 1.6 ‘Commissioning Documentation’ of this specification.

C. Field Technicians
1 The Contractor shall provide qualified field technicians who are trained and familiar with installation,
operation and troubleshooting of systems and equipment being commissioned for participation in
the commissioning activities outlined in this document.
2 These same technicians shall be made available to assist the CxA in resolving commissioning Field
Observation Notes (FONs®) issues and for repeat and follow-up commissioning tasks as required.
3 Contractors shall arrange for and provide technicians from their sub-contractors, vendors and
suppliers where specified and where contractor’s own personnel lack the required training or
experience necessary to ensure that all commissioned equipment and systems are correctly
installed and fully functional.
4 System performance problems and discrepancies may require additional technician time, CxA time,
reconstruction of systems, and/or replacement of system components. The additional technician
time will be made available for subsequent Cx periods at no cost to the Owner until the required
system performance is obtained.

1.5 COORDINATION & SCHEDULING

A. The CxA shall prepare a Commissioning Plan that includes the following:
1 Identification of all commissioned systems and equipment
2 Commissioning Process Scope
3 Commissioning Roles & Responsibilities Matrix (see Appendix – 6)
4 Commissioning Schedule
5 Develop Project-Specific Test
6 Develop Pre-Functional and Functional checklist

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Commissioning Meetings
1 Commissioning Orientation Meeting
a. The CxA will conduct an initial Commissioning Orientation Meeting for the Contractors and
selected Sub-contractors to familiarize all parties with the Cx process, and to ensure that the
roles and responsibilities of each party are clearly understood.
b. This meeting will be scheduled by the CM/GC and CxA after awarding of contracts but prior
to the start of materials installation.
2 On-going Commissioning Progress Meetings
a. The CxA will conduct regularly scheduled Commissioning Progress Meetings for the duration
of the project construction phase.
b. The purpose of these meetings will be to coordinate and schedule Cx activities, review Cx
activity status, and discuss status and resolution of Cx issues (i.e. Field Observation
Notes®).
c. Cx Progress Meetings will start soon after installation of commissioned systems begins and
will occur as appropriate.
d. Cx Progress Meetings will be coordinated between the CxA and the CM/GC. The CM/GC
will notify their subs/vendors of the dates and locations of such meetings.
e. The CxA shall prepare an agenda, record attendance, record meeting minutes, and
distribute minutes to the rest of the Cx team.
3 Temperature Controls and TAB contractors coordination meetings
a. Prior to these contractors beginning their Scopes of Work, the CxA shall convene a
coordination meeting. Details of the Coordination Meeting will be the material covered in
section 3.4-D & E.

4 Emergency System Procedure Planning Meetings

a. In addition to the on-going meetings described above, the CxA will conduct a series of
meetings attended by the full Commissioning Team to coordinate and plan the Emergency
System Procedures (ESP).
b. It is anticipated that this activity will require approximately 4 meetings lasting 1-2 hours each.
Additional meetings will be added to this schedule if necessary to ensure fully developed and
coordinated procedures prior to ESP execution.

C. Scheduling of Cx Activities
1 The Contractors will work with the GC and CxA to schedule the Cx activities using established
protocols. Most of this work will be conducted as part of the On-Going Commissioning Meetings.
Once scheduled, the commissioning activities will be integrated into the master schedule by the
GC.
2 The GC and their sub-contractors and vendors shall coordinate an Equipment Startup schedule
(See section 3.3). This schedule helps ensure that all the necessary contractors are focused on
starting equipment at the agreed-to time. This also helps ensure that all task required to start up a
piece of equipment have been completed, such as: proper utility connections, safeties in place,
necessary controls functional, vendor reps available, Owners reps notified, Pre-functional forms
and pre-start-up forms completed, etc… The CxA will then schedule site visits to correspond with
the startups of the major equipment. The CxA will assist the GC and their subs in this effort.
3 Coordination, scheduling and completion of Contractor commissioning activities described in this
specification are the responsibility of the Contractor(s) and the GC. Note that the Cx schedule
relies on the progress of the construction schedule, for which the GC and Contractor(s) are also
responsible.
4 Scheduling problems will be brought to the attention of the CxA and GC in a timely manner in order
to expedite the Cx Process and to minimize interruption to both the construction and
commissioning schedules.
5 Commissioning of systems will proceed per the criteria established in the specific sections that
follow, with activities to be performed on a timely basis.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

6 In general, Pre-functional Procedures and Contractor Pre-startup Testing will be completed and
documented prior to equipment startup. Exceptions to this requirement may be allowed, with prior
agreement by the Commissioning Team and GC. if needed to expedite progress.
7 Equipment Startup Procedures and Contractor Post-startup Testing (including TAB, Control
Contractor Point-to-Point Testing and Control Contractor Sequence Checkouts) will be successfully
completed, and fully documented by the appropriate contractor, prior to initiation of Functional
Performance Procedures and Integrated System Procedures.
8 Issues identified during execution of the Commissioning Process and documented by the CxA on
the Field Observation Notes® (section 3.8) will be addressed promptly to minimize the potential for
schedule disruptions and to prevent the accumulation of large numbers of outstanding issues as
the job progresses.

D. Notification of Field Activities

1 Many of the Commissioning Procedures which will be performed by the Contractors need to be
witnessed and signed-off by either the GC and/or Commissioning Team. Selected Commissioning
Procedures may also be witnessed by the Owner.
2 To facilitate witnessing of these procedures, the Contractor(s) must provide advance notice to the
CM/GC and Commissioning Team prior to procedure execution. The amount of advance notice
required will be jointly agreed to by the GC, Cx Team and Contractor. Typical intervals are 48 – 72
hours, but in no case will notification be less than 24 hours prior to procedure execution.
3 Any procedures may be witnessed by the GC, CxA or other appropriate member of the Cx Team.
It is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with the GC in advance of each procedure to
ensure that the appropriate personnel will be available to witness as desired. Procedures which
have been conducted without adequate notice will be deemed incomplete and will be re-tested by
the contractors (with witnesses present) at no cost to the Owner and without delay to either the
construction or commissioning schedules.

1.6 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION COMPLETION AND MAINTENANCE

A. General
1 Timely and accurate documentation of commissioning activities is essential for the commissioning
process to be effective. To this end, all commissioning activities conducted by the contractors shall
be documented as outlined below and in Part 3 Execution of this specification.
2 Contractor Commissioning Documents which will be completed by the contractors include the
following:
a. Prefunctional Checklists (blank forms provided by the CxA)
b. Pre-startup Contractor Test Forms (generally provided by the contractor)
c. Equipment Startup Plans and Forms (generally provided by the manufacturer)
d. Post-startup Contractor Test Forms & Reports (generally provided by the TAB and Controls
contractors)

3 All Contractor Commissioning Documents prepared by the contractors will be fully completed in a
neat and workmanlike manner so as to be fully legible. Documentation which, at the
Commissioning Team’s discretion, is incomplete, inaccurate or less than fully legible shall be
deemed unacceptable.
4 Commissioning procedures and tests, which are rejected by the Commissioning Team due to
incomplete, inaccurate or illegible contractor documentation, shall be repeated by the contractor
and new Contractor Commissioning Documents shall be prepared to the Commissioning Team’s
satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner.
5 Procedures deemed unacceptable by the Commissioning Team after being repeated due to
inadequate documentation may be subject to completion by the CxA, as outlined in item 3.8 ‘Cost
of Re-Evaluation’ below.
6 All Contractor Commissioning Documents will be completed on the job-site, concurrent with the
activities being documented. Remedial documentation of commissioning activities either off-site or
after the procedures have been completed is unacceptable.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

7 All Contractor Commissioning Documents will be submitted to the Commissioning Team for review
and acceptance upon completion.

B. Contractor Commissioning Process Status Tracking System

1 Contractors shall be responsible for maintaining a tracking system to monitor the progress of their
commissioning activities. This tracking system will include spreadsheet-based tracking forms
and/or sets of drawings which will be marked-up by the contractor to indicate status of specified
commissioning activities The CxA will generate a Status Tracking spreadsheet for the contractors
to use, and track, their commissioning activities throughout the duration of the project. (Example
shown in Appendix 2)
2 The CxA will assist the contractor in maintaining their tracking system.
3 The contractors shall regularly update their tracking system forms and/or drawings as
commissioning activities are completed so as to provide a readily available summary of the current
status of the contractor’s commissioning activities.
4 Tracking forms and marked-up drawings shall be kept in the Contractor’s Commissioning
Notebook(s) as outlined below and made available to the CM/GC and Cx Team on request for
review.
5 Sample tracking system forms are included as Appendix 2 to this specification. These sample
forms are provided for reference only to assist contractors in preparing their bids for this project.
The actual forms used on this project will be similar in scope and format to the sample forms, but
the specific content will differ somewhat from the sample forms to specifically reference the
requirements of this project.

C. Commissioning Notebook(s)
1 All Contractor Commissioning Documents (including both in-progress and completed
documentation) and Contractor Commissioning Process Status Tracking System forms shall be
kept on-site in the contractor’s field office, neatly organized, in 3-ring notebooks known as
Commissioning Notebooks. The Contractor will keep the material in the Notebooks up-to-date on a
daily basis as commissioning tasks occur.
2 Commissioning Notebooks shall be labeled on both cover and spine to indicate the contractor’s
name, the project name and the notebook’s contents.
3 The CxA will provide one master Commissioning Notebook. The master copy containing all Pre-
functional forms will be given to the GC to copy and distribute to their sub-contractors.
4 The CxA will assist the contractors in maintaining their Commissioning Notebooks.
5 Commissioning Notebooks shall be kept available to the Cx Team and GC for their review.

D. Record Drawings
1 Contractors shall regularly update a ‘redlined’ set of record drawings showing commissioned
systems as work is being installed so that the drawings remain current with the field work, and as
required in Division 01 of the project specifications.
2 Redlining record drawings at the end of construction shall not be acceptable
3 The Contractors up-to-date, in-progress redlines shall be kept on-site in the Contractor’s field office
and available for review by the Cx Team.

E. Access to Contractor Documentation

1 Contractors shall provide the CxA with access to shop drawings, coordination drawings, equipment
cut-sheets, schematics, in-progress record drawings, etc. to assist the CxA in execution of the Cx
process.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. General
1 The party responsible for each Commissioning Procedure shall furnish all tools, equipment and
instrumentation required for execution of that Procedure.
2 Testing equipment and instrumentation used for execution of Commissioning Procedures will be of
sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances
specified in the specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply:
a. Temperature sensors and digital thermometers: certified calibration within the past year to an
accuracy of 1.0 F and a resolution of + or - 0.1F.
b. Pressure sensors: accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range
of meter) and calibrated within the last year.
c. Electrical meters (voltage, current, etc.) shall be true RMS and shall have been calibrated
within the last year.
d. Specialty meters (db, RF, etc.) shall be calibrated with the last year.

e. Other sensors used for testing, (RH, CO, CO2, etc.) shall have been calibrated within the last
6 months.
3 All test equipment and instrumentation used for Commissioning Procedures will be calibrated
according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged.
4 Calibration tags will be affixed or certificates readily available.

B. Proprietary Test Equipment

1 Proprietary test equipment, interface devices and software required by any contractor, vendor or
equipment manufacturer for programming, start-up, or other commissioning activity whether
specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment for use during
commissioning.
2 The Contractor or Manufacturer providing such equipment will demonstrate its use, and assist in
the Cx process as needed.
3 Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of
equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents will be included
in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging
equipment that may be used by the CxA.

2.2 BAS HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SUPPORT

A. Field Panel Software and Hardware

1 The BAS Contractor shall furnish the CxA with one (1) copy of all hardware and software needed to
connect to, communicate with and command the BAS field panels and controllers at no additional
charge to the CxA. This hardware and software will be used by the CxA for execution of the
commissioning process. Software and hardware provided to the CxA for this purpose, does not
include any provisions for use by the Project Test & Balance Contractor (PTB).
2 Hardware and software covered under this requirement includes, but is not limited to:
a. Latest versions of proprietary software necessary to access the BAS system.
b. Communication modules, software keys, and similar hardware needed for communication
from a laptop computer, PDA or similar device to field panels or controllers
c. Proprietary cables required for communication between laptop computers or PDAs to field
panels or controllers
d. Passwords, access levels and similar software permissions necessary for execution of the
Cx Process.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

e. Software and hardware manuals for all control system hardware and software provided to
the CxA.
3 This requirement is not meant to include provision of standard hardware such as laptop computers
and PDAs nor provision of standard software such as Windows or MS Explorer.
4 At the conclusion of the Commissioning Process, this hardware and software will be turned over to
the Owner’s Facility Management personnel for their use in operating and maintaining the building.

B. Front-End Software & Hardware

1 The BAS Contractor shall furnish the CxA with one (1) copy of their front-end software and
associated hardware as needed to connect to, communicate with and command the BAS at no
additional charge to the CxA or the project. Any Contractor-furnished software and/or hardware
provided to the CxA, will be part of the total BAS package provided to the owner and is not to be
considered as an additional set of equipment for the CxA. Use of this equipment by the CxA will not
be deemed by the BAS contractor as reason for any delay in the completion of the project. Any
Contractor-furnished software and/or hardware provided to the CxA, will be turned over to the
Owner at the completion of all Commissioning activities.
2 Hardware and software covered under this requirement includes, but is not limited to:
a. Proprietary software needed to communicate to field panels or controllers of Andover
Continuum equipment. Revision levels for all software shall be identical with the revision
level being provided to the project for the front-end operator workstation(s).
b. Communication modules, software keys, and similar hardware needed for operation of the
software or to communicate with the BAS.
c. Proprietary cables required for communication between laptop computers and the BAS.
d. Passwords, access levels and similar software permissions necessary for execution of the
Cx Process.
e. Software and hardware manuals for all control system hardware and software provided to
the CxA.
3 This requirement is not meant to include provision of standard hardware such as laptop computers
nor provision of standard software such as Windows or MS Explorer.

C. Operator Workstation Access

1 The BAS Contractor shall provide the CxA with software and hardware needed for accessing the
BAS’ front-end operator workstation(s). At a minimum, this shall include appropriate level user
identification names and passwords. Access level shall allow the CxA to fully execute all
commissioning procedures and will include the ability to:
a. View system operation
b. Override set-points
c. Command digital and analog output points
d. View BAS programming source code (read-only)
e. View and print graphics
f. Create, view, modify, print and download trend logs, histories and reports

D. Technical Support
1 The BAS Contractor shall also provide technical support to the CxA as reasonably requested by the
CxA regarding setting up and operating BAS hardware and software to support successful
execution of the Cx Process.

E. Duration of Support
1 Use of hardware and software provided under this section may be limited to the duration of the Cx
Process at the BAS Contractors discretion, but shall not be terminated until final completion of the
Cx Process including resolution of all outstanding construction phase FONs® issues and
successful execution of Post-Occupancy phase commissioning activities.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.3 ELECTRICAL MONITORING SYSTEM HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SUPPORT

A. The contractor providing the Electrical Monitoring System shall provide the CxA with software and
hardware as outlined in section 2.2 above, where applicable, to support commissioning of the electrical
monitoring and distribution systems.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-FUNCTIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Scope
1 The Pre-functional Procedures (PFP) consists of a series of field observations and documentation
conducted during the installation of commissioned equipment to verify the following:
a. Installed equipment matches the specifications and approved submittals
b. Equipment is installed per the specifications, drawings, manufacturer’s recommendations,
and good current practice
c. Utility connections to equipment, such as electrical, steam, chilled water, etc. have been
successfully completed
d. Equipment is ready for start-up
2 Contractors should expect to complete one (1) Pre-functional Checklist (CxA provided) for each
major piece of equipment covered by the commissioning process such as pumps, fans, air handling
units, control panels, switchgear, substations, and electrical distribution panels.
3 Additional checklists will be required to verify installation of distribution systems such as piping,
ductwork, electrical wire and conduit, etc. The number of required Pre-functional Checklists will
vary from system to system, and may be limited to one form per system per zone (or possibly per
floor) for repetitive items.
4 See Appendix 3 for a list of Pre-functional Checklists that will be completed by the contractors as
part of this project. The CxA will provide the Pre-functional Checklist for the Contractor to
complete, and shall provide instruction on the method of completing those forms.

B. Pre-functional Checklists
1 A selection of sample Pre-functional Checklists are included at the end of this specification as
Appendix 4. These sample forms are provided for reference only to assist contractors in preparing
their bids for this project. The actual forms used on this project will be similar in scope and format
to the sample forms, but the specific content will differ somewhat from the sample forms to
specifically reference the requirements of this project.
2 The Pre-functional Checklists used for this project will be finalized by the CxA after receipt of
equipment Submittals and Installation, Operation & Maintenance (IOM) Manuals from the
Contractors (see item C1 below)
3 Pre-functional Checklists shall be completed and maintained on-site per the requirements of this
specification, Section 1.6 ‘Commissioning Documentation’.

C. Contractor Requirements
1 The Contractors shall provide the CxA with one (1) copy of the equipment manufacturer’s standard
Installation, Operation and Maintenance (IOM) Manuals within 60 days after approval of submittals.
The CxA will use the installation recommendations included in these documents to finalize the Pre-
functional Checklists.
2 The contractors furnishing and/or installing the equipment being commissioned will be responsible
for the execution of the Pre-functional Procedures and accurate completion of the Pre-functional
Checklists for that equipment.
3 The CxA will provide oversight and assistance to the contractors during the execution of the Pre-
functional Procedures and will periodically review the contractors in-progress Pre-functional
Checklists for accuracy, completeness and to verify that checklists are being kept up-to-date.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4 Contractors shall begin execution of the Pre-functional Procedures as soon as the affected
equipment arrives on the job site, by verifying nameplate information matches the specifications
and approved submittals.
5 During installation, the contractors shall regularly review and update the appropriate Pre-functional
Checklists so that potential installation issues are identified as early in the construction process as
possible.
6 Issues observed during the PFPs will be immediately reported to the CM/GC and CxA in
accordance with the procedures outlined in this specification, Section 3.8 ‘Issue Resolution’.
7 PFP’s will be substantially complete, reviewed and accepted by the CxA prior to equipment start-
up. Exceptions to this requirement will be allowed at the CxA’s discretion, but will be limited to
minor items, such as labeling of equipment, which will not impact start-up or subsequent equipment
operation.
8 Contractors shall regularly update their Contractor Commissioning Process Status Tracking System
to indicate current PFP status.
9 The Contractor shall furnish all tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of
the PFPs. All instruments shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification.

D. CxA Activities
1 During the Pre-functional phase of the project, the CxA shall observe and inspect the installations
to verify compliance with the contract documents.
2 The CxA will periodically verify the contractors in-progress Pre-functional Checklist for accuracy
and they are being completed up the level of installation.
3 The CxA will be available to discuss installation procedures either on-site or by phone.

3.2 CONTRACTOR PRE-STARTUP TESTING

A. Scope
1 Commissioning activities and requirements related to contractor/vendor pre-startup testing for
commissioned equipment and systems will follow the process described in this section. This
process does not reduce the contractor’s responsibility for successfully completing and
documenting all testing requirements outlined in other sections of the specifications.
2 The goals of these activities are to help ensure that the specified testing is rigorously executed
using sound test procedures and that all tests are thoroughly documented.

B. Contractor Pre-startup Test Forms

1 The Contractor Pre-startup Testing shall be documented using test forms which, at a minimum, will
record the following information:
a. Type of test being performed (hydrostatic leak test, pneumatic leak test, megger test, db, RF,
flows, etc.)
b. System or equipment being tested
c. Technician(s) performing the test
d. Test date and time
e. Detailed description of section of system being tested (if applicable)
f. All data collected during the test to quantify test performance (static and differential
pressures, test duration, radio frequency, electrical resistance, etc.)
g. Signature of technician(s) performing test
h. Signature of GC or Cx Team member witnessing the test
2 Contractors and vendors may use their standard testing forms; providing these forms meet the
requirements outlined above and have been previously reviewed and approved by the Cx Team.
3 If standard test forms are not available, the CxA will assist the Contractors and Vendors in
developing test forms for the Contractors and Vendors use.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 10

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4 All test forms will be fully completed and maintained by the contractor per the requirements of this
specification, Section 1.6 ‘Commissioning Documentation’.
5 All test forms will be submitted to the GC for review and acceptance by the Cx Team upon
completion.

C. Contractor Requirements
1 Prior to initiating any of the Pre-startup Testing covered by this specification the contractor will meet
with the CxA to review the contractor’s proposed test procedures and test forms.
2 The contractor shall be responsible for successful completion and documentation of all specified
pre-startup testing.
3 The GC and/or the Cx Team will witness selected Pre-startup Tests to ensure that approved
procedures are being followed and that tests are being properly documented.
4 Any Pre-startup Tests may be witnessed. The GC, CxA or other appropriate member of the Cx
Team may witness these test. It is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with the GC in
advance of each test to ensure that the appropriate personnel will be available to witness the test
as desired. Tests which have been conducted without adequate notice will be deemed incomplete
and will be re-tested by the contractors.
5 Issues observed during the Contractor Pre-startup Testing will be immediately reported to the GC
and CxA in accordance with procedures outlined in this specification, Section 3.8 ‘Issue
Resolution’.
6 All Contractor Pre-startup Testing shall be substantially complete, reviewed and accepted by the
CxA prior to equipment start-up. Exceptions to this requirement will be allowed at the CxA’s
discretion, but will be limited to minor items, which will not impact start-up or subsequent equipment
operation.
7 The Contractor shall furnish all tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of
the Pre-startup Testing. All instruments shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification.

D. CxA Activities
1 During the Pre-Startup phase of the project, the CxA shall observe selected Pre-Startup
procedures to verify compliance with the contract documents.
2 The CxA will continue to periodically verify the contractors in-progress Pre-functional Checklist for
accuracy and they are being completed up the level of installation.
3 The CxA will be available to discuss Pre-Startup procedures either on-site or by phone.

3.3 CONTRACTOR START-UP PROCEDURES

A. Scope
1 Commissioning activities and requirements related to Equipment Startup are meant to help ensure
the following:
a. Equipment installation and Pre-startup Testing has been fully completed and documented
prior to startup
b. Startup procedures meet the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations
c. Startup activities are fully documented
2 Equipment Startup requirements covered by this section of the commissioning specification include
the following:
a. All commissioned equipment requiring startup by the equipment manufacturer, vendor or
representative
b. All rotating equipment including, but not limited to, pumps, fans, compressors, and
generators with a motor or engine size of 5 hp or greater or serving critical equipment.
c. All electrical equipment including, but not limited to switchgear, substations, transformers
and distribution panels operating at 460V or greater

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 11

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

d. Where required in the specifications regardless of size or voltage.

B. Equipment Startup Plan

1 At least 30 days prior to scheduled Equipment Startup, the responsible contractor shall prepare and
submit a written Startup Plan which, at a minimum, will include the following:
a. Personnel required for startup including vendors, other trades, etc.
b. Prerequisites required for startup (utility connections, PFP’s, Pre-startup Testing, and other
as applicable)
c. Proposed startup procedures
d. Proposed forms to be used for documenting startup procedures. These forms are usually
provided by the manufacturer. (If not provided by the manufacturer, the CxA will assist the
contractor in developing startup forms)
e. Proposed preventive maintenance forms and procedures (if equipment to be kept in service
after startup)
2 Where available, the equipment manufacturer’s standard startup procedures and forms should be
used as the basis of the contractor’s Startup Plan. Where equipment manufacturer’s standard
startup procedures and/or forms are not available, the Cx Team will assist the contractors in
developing the necessary procedures and forms.
3 The Cx Team will review the contractor’s proposed Startup Plan(s) and will recommend revisions
as appropriate prior to scheduling of startup activities.
4 Startup of covered equipment shall be documented using Startup Forms which have been
previously reviewed and approved as part of the contractor’s Startup Plan.
5 All Startup Forms will be fully completed and maintained by the contractor per the requirements of
this specification, Section 1.6 ‘Commissioning Documentation’.
6 All Startup Forms will be submitted to the CM/GC for review, and acceptance by the Cx Team upon
completion.

C. Contractor Requirements
1 The Contractor(s), with the assistance of the CxA, will coordinate with the CM/GC to schedule
startup activities. This will include the following:
a. Ensuring that all PFP’s and contractor Pre-startup Testing are completed and documented
prior to startup
b. Ensuring that all required utilities are available prior to startup
c. Ensuring that appropriate personnel have been identified and scheduled to participate
including vendors, manufacturer’s representatives, other trades, etc.
d. Tools, test equipment and/or instrumentation required for startup will be available

2 No unscheduled and/or inappropriate startups shall be allowed.

3 The use of startup forms, procedures, or documents that have not been previously approved by the
Cx Team, as part of the Equipment Startup Plan, will not be accepted as startup documentation.
4 The Cx Team and/or CM/GC will witness selected startups to ensure that approved procedures are
being followed and that activities are being properly documented.
5 Any Startup procedures may be witnessed by the CM/GC, CxA or other appropriate member of the
Cx Team. It is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with the CM/GC in advance of each
procedure to ensure that the appropriate personnel will be available to witness the test as desired.
Procedures which have been conducted without adequate notice will be deemed incomplete and
will be re-tested.
6 Issues observed during execution of the Startup Procedures will be immediately reported to the
CM/GC and CxA in accordance with procedures outlined in this specification, Section 3.8 ‘Issue
Resolution’.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 12

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

7 Contractors shall regularly update their Contractor Commissioning Process Status Tracking System
to indicate current status of their Startup Procedures. The CxA will periodically review the
contractor’s Startup Forms and tracking system for accuracy, completeness and to verify that
documentation is being kept up-to-date.
8 The Contractor shall furnish all tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of
the Startup Procedures. All instruments shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification.
9 Equipment which will not be left in operation after startup shall be laid-up by the contractor per the
manufacturer’s recommended procedures.
10 Equipment kept in use after startup, shall be operated and maintained by the responsible
Contractor per the equipment manufacturer’s published O&M procedures.
11 All maintenance activities performed by the Contractor(s) will be documented on pre-approved
maintenance work order forms. These forms may be furnished by the Owner’s Facilities
Management Department; otherwise the contractors will develop appropriate forms and submit
them for review and approval as part of their startup plan.
12 Completed maintenance work order forms shall be submitted to the CM/GC for review and
acceptance by the Cx Team upon completion.

D. CxA Activities
1 During the Startup phase of the project, the CxA shall observe startups of major equipment to verify
compliance with the manufacturer’s startup documents. The Startup Documents shall be completed
by the contractor/vendor that performs the activity and will be verified for completeness by the CxA.
2 The CxA will verify the contractors Pre-functional Checklist and pre-startup test have been
completed prior to the actual startup being preformed.
3 The CxA will be available to discuss Startup procedures either on-site or by phone.

3.4 CONTRACTOR POST-STARTUP TESTING

A. Scope
1 Commissioning activities and requirements related to Contractor Post-startup Testing for
commissioned equipment and systems will follow the process described in this section. This
process does not reduce the contractor’s responsibility for successfully completing and
documenting all testing requirements outlined in other sections of the specifications.
2 The goal of these activities are to augment the testing requirements listed elsewhere in the
specifications and to help ensure that the specified testing is rigorously executed using sound test
procedures and that all tests are thoroughly documented.

B. Contractor Post-startup Test Reports

1 The Contractor Post-startup Testing shall be documented using test forms which, at a minimum,
will record the following information:
a. Type of test being performed (duct traverse, point-to-point checkout, etc.)
b. System or equipment being tested
c. Technician(s) performing the test
d. Test date and time
e. Detailed description of system or section of system being tested
f. All data collected during the test to quantify test performance (pressures, flow rates, rpm,
volts, amps, temperatures, etc.)
g. Signature of technician(s) performing test
h. Signature of CM/GC or Cx Team member witnessing the test (where applicable)
2 Contractors may use their standard testing forms; providing these forms meet the requirements
outlined above and have been previously reviewed and approved by the Cx Team.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 13

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3 The use of Post-startup testing forms, procedures, or documents that have not been previously
approved by the Cx team, will not be accepted as Post-startup testing documentation.
4 All test forms will be fully completed and maintained by the contractor per the requirements of this
specification, Section 1.6 ‘Commissioning Documentation’.
5 All test forms will be submitted to the CM/GC for review and acceptance by the Cx Team upon
completion.

C. General Requirements
1 Prior to initiating any of the Post-startup Testing covered by this specification, the contractor shall
meet with the CxA to review the contractor’s proposed test procedures and test forms.
2 The contractor shall be responsible for successful completion and documentation of all specified
Post-startup Testing.
3 The CxA will provide oversight and assistance to the contractors in developing their test procedures
and test forms.
4 The CM/GC and/or Cx Team will witness selected Post-startup Tests to ensure that approved
procedures are being followed and that tests are being properly documented.
5 Issues observed during the Contractor Post-startup Testing will be immediately reported to the
CM/GC and CxA in accordance with procedures outlined in this specification, Section 3.8 ‘Issue
Resolution’.
6 Contractors shall regularly update their Contractor Commissioning Process Status Tracking System
to indicate current status of their Post-startup Testing. The CxA will periodically review the
contractor’s in-progress test forms and tracking system for accuracy, completeness and to verify
that checklists are being kept up-to-date.
7 The Contractor shall furnish all tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of
the Post-startup Testing. All instruments shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification.
8 The Contractor shall provide a written list of instrumentation which will be used for Post-startup
Testing indicating instrument make, model number, serial number, range, accuracy and calibration
date to the CxA prior to the start of testing.

D. HVAC Test and Balance

1 Project Test and Balance Contractor (PTB) Requirements:
a. The PTB shall be responsible for successful completion and documentation of all TAB
activities specified in Div 23 and elsewhere in these specifications as appropriate.
b. Prior to the start of TAB activities, the PTB shall submit proposed TAB procedures and
documentation to the CxA for review.
c. After this review, and prior to start of field work, the PTB will attend one or more planning
meetings as required with the Commissioning Team to review and discuss outstanding
issues relating to TAB procedures and forms, discuss resolution of issues identified during
the PTB’s plan review and field inspections, and to coordinate field work.
d. Prior to the start of field work, the PTB shall issue a final set of TAB procedures and TAB
forms incorporating comments received from the Commissioning Team review
e. The PTB will notify the Commissioning Team a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance of the
time for start of TAB work to allow the CxA time to assess system readiness.
f. The PTB will work cooperatively with the CxA
g. The PTB shall coordinate with the controls contractor to ensure that changes made to the
control system during TAB (flow coefficients, duct areas, etc.) are archived and become the
default or initial values for these parameters.
h. The PTB shall ensure that all areas of the project are balanced to the appropriate air
pressure relationships for those areas (negative or positive pressure).
i. The PTB shall provide daily lists of issues and/or problems identified during TAB work to the
CM/GC and CxA for follow-up & resolution with the appropriate contractors.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 14

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

j. Participate in verification of the TAB report, which will consist of repeating any selected
measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for verification or
diagnostic purposes.
k. The TAB Final Acceptance Inspection specified in Div 23 shall be conducted by the CxA and
will include a field verification of up to 10% of the PTB’s field readings.
l. The PTB will provide technicians and instrumentation to support the field verification.
m. Instruments used for the field verification shall be the same instruments (by model and serial
number) that were used for the original TAB work.
n. Failure of an item during the TAB field verification is defined as:

1) For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent from the reported
value.
2) For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 decibels. (Note: variations in background
noise must be considered).
o. A failure of more than 10 percent of the readings tested during the field verification shall
result in the rejection of the final TAB report and require re-balancing of the system(s) in
question.

E. Controls & Instrumentation Testing

1 Prior to start of control system Functional Performance Procedures, the Building Automation
System (BAS) Contractor shall verify and document that all control systems are installed and
operating properly including the following:
a. Control Panels & Hardware Installation shall be fully verified and the appropriate Pre-
Functional checklists completed prior to proceeding to subsequent installation/checkout
steps.
b. Point-to-Point Checkout shall be completed and documented per the requirements specified
in Div 23 and elsewhere in these specifications as appropriate, and item 3 below.
c. Control Sequence Checkout. Contractor shall verify that operation of control system
programming matches all specified sequences of operation. For these checkouts, the
Contractor shall, as much as possible, simulate actual operating conditions for the various
operating modes being tested (heating, cooling, emergency power, etc) by false-loading
systems, adjusting setpoints and similar techniques. The CxA will make the control
sequence FP Checklists available to the BAS Contractor for use in these checkouts.
d. Tune all Control Loops to obtain the fastest stable response without unreasonable hunting,
offset or overshoot. Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control
loop and provide trend reports to document results. Trend logs shall show both steady-state
operation and response to setpoint changes as specified in Div 23 and elsewhere in these
specifications as appropriate.
e. Test All Alarms and Safeties. Record all alarm parameters and alarm messages. Document
all alarms and safeties have been tested and are functioning properly.
2 The BAS Contractor shall work with the TAB Contractor(s) to make sure that changes to the BAS
made during TAB, such as flow coefficients, flow setpoints and duct areas are permanently
archived in the BAS and become the initial or default values for their respective controllers. If BAS
adjustments made by the TAB Contractor(s) get lost or overwritten prior to archiving, it shall be the
BAS Contractor’s responsibility to re-enter this data at no additional cost to the Owner.
3 Point-to-Point Checkout Requirements
a. Items described in this section apply to and augment the Field Points Testing requirements
as specified in Div 23 and elsewhere in these specifications as appropriate.

1) These procedures will verify the following for each physical control point:
2) Field device is installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations and the project
drawings and specifications
3) Field verify calibration of all analog inputs and outputs
4) Verify labeling of controllers, field devices, and wiring

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 15

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

5) Physical points are correctly addressed and communicating properly between its
controller and the field device.
b. Detailed written procedures for execution of Point-to-Point Checkouts shall be submitted to
the CxA and Engineer by the Contractor for review and approval prior to the start of testing.
Proposed procedures shall be based on the manufacturer’s recommendations and good
current practice. Include proposed test forms as part of this submittal.
c. The Contractor shall provide all tools and instrumentation necessary for execution of this
testing. All instrumentation must be in calibration and meet the requirements of Part 2 of this
specification.
d. The CxA reserves the right to field verify up to 10% of the Contractor’s Point-to-Point
Checkout testing. The Contractor shall provide the technicians and instrumentation used for
the original testing to assist the CxA with this field verification.

3.5 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE PROCEDURES

A. Scope
1 Functional Performance Procedures (FPP) are executed after commissioned equipment and
systems have been installed, started-up and balanced. The goal of these procedures is to verify
that commissioned equipment, sub-systems and major systems operate and perform per the
design intent and the project specifications.
2 Equipment-level FPPs will be used to verify operation and capacity of selected equipment such as
boilers, chillers cooling towers, pumps, exhaust fans, air handling units, etc.
3 System-level FPPs will verify the following aspects of system operation
a. System operation under both normal and alternate operating conditions and modes
b. Interactions between equipment and sub-systems
c. Operation of safeties and interlocks
d. Control system operation, response time, stability and tuning
e. System response to abnormal and/or emergency conditions such as equipment failure and
power outages
f. Prepare for execution of Integrated System Procedures
4 See Appendix 3 for a list of Functional Performance Procedures that will be completed for this
project.

B. Functional Performance Checklists

1 A selection of sample Functional Performance Checklists are included at the end of this
specification as Appendix 5. These sample forms are provided for reference only to assist
contractors in preparing their bids for this project. The actual procedures and forms used for this
project will be similar in scope and format to the samples, but the specific content will differ
somewhat to specifically address the requirements of this project.
2 The Functional Performance Procedures and Checklists used for this project will be developed and
finalized by the CxA after receipt of approved contractor submittals, including equipment Installation
– Operations & Maintenance bulletins.

C. Contractor Requirements
1 The CM/GC will coordinate and schedule FPP activities in conjunction with the contractors and
other members of the Cx Team.
2 Scheduling of FPPs will be contingent on notification from the affected contractor(s) to the CM/GC
and CxA that equipment and systems are ready for checkout.
3 Other prerequisites for execution of FPPs shall include the following
a. All PFP’s, Contractor Pre-startup Testing and Startup Procedures have been completed and
documented
b. TAB has been completed

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 16

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

c. Field Observation Notes® affecting equipment or system performance or operation have

been resolved
4 Prior to claiming readiness for FPP, the controls contractor shall ensure that the following items are
completed and documented:
a. Point-to-point checkouts
b. Verify that network communication between all devices and systems is established
c. Sequence of Operation checkouts
d. Printed and annotated trend logs and histories establishing acceptable operation including

1) Stable control
2) Recovery from upset/changes (e.g., from setback)
3) Special and/or seasonal modes
4) Emergency and alarm modes including loss/restoration of power

5 Execution of the FPPs will be led by the CxA with assistance from the contractors providing and
installing the equipment and systems being commissioned.
6. Typical contractor activities during FPP execution may include the following
a. Starting/stopping equipment
b. Energizing/de-energizing electrical distribution gear
c. Opening/closing valves and dampers
d. Manipulating BAS inputs, outputs and setpoints
e. Setup, collection and downloading of BAS trend data

Alternately, these activities may be performed directly by the CxA with prior permission from the
appropriate contractor(s). In either case, the Contractor(s) shall maintain full responsibility for the
facility, equipment and systems operated during the FPPs, maintain all guarantees and warranties,
and shall repair any damage to the facility caused during the FPPs.
7. Contractors shall provide the services of vendor’s technicians at the CxA’s request to assist in
commissioning of major equipment such as chillers, boilers and emergency generators.
8. Tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of the FPPs shall be provided by
the CxA except for special-purpose or proprietary tools, test equipment and instrumentation which
will be provided by the contractors. All instruments provided by the contractor shall meet the
requirements of Part 2 of this specification.

3.6 FIRE LIFE SAFETY PROCEDURES

A. Scope

1 The Fire / Life Safety Procedures (FLSPs) will verify and document operation of commissioned
systems in response to simulated fire conditions.
2 Operation of various systems and sub-systems that are part of the response to fire will, in many
cases, be functionally verified during the FPP process prior to these interactive tests.
3 The object of these procedures is to check that all systems affected by a fire operate interactively
as specified in the contract documents and as required to meet the needs of the Owner.
4 A typical FLSP will consist of the following steps:
a. Simulate a fire condition by tripping one or more Fire Alarm System (FAS) initiating devices
(smoke/heat detectors, flow switches, pull stations, etc.)
b. Verify FAS operation including, but not limited to:

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 17

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1) Operation of visual and audible notification devices including speakers, horns, bells,
strobes, beacons, etc.
2) Receipt of alarms at all FAS control panel(s), annunciator panel(s), alarm printers, etc.
3) Operation of FAS controlled hardware such as magnetic hold-opens, overhead fire
doors, WON doors, etc.
4) Operation of interfaces between FAS and other building systems such as BAS, security,
architectural dimming controls, conference center audio systems, overhead paging,
emergency response staff communication, etc.

c. Verify operation of HVAC smoke management system(s) including, but not limited to the
following:

1) Operation of air handling units

2) Return / exhaust fan operation
3) Operation of fire/smoke dampers, including proper indication of damper position to BAS.
4) Verify differential static pressures between smoke zone(s) and adjacent zones
5) Verify containment and evacuation of smoke from selected areas

d. Verify operation of fire door hardware (measurement of door opening forces, latching of
doors while smoke management systems are operational, etc.)
e. Verify Security System operation (release of electric door locks, interaction with infant
abduction protection system, etc.)
f. Verify operation of vertical transport system (elevator recall, alternate floor recall, etc)
g. Verify operation of other building systems connected to the FAS (architectural dimming and
audio systems, etc).
h. Reset FAS and verify return of all affected systems (FAS, BAS, HVAC, Security, Vertical
transport, etc.) to normal operation.
5 Specific requirements for some FLSPs may vary somewhat from the ‘typical’ list outlined above to
match the specified system operation in each area of the project (i.e. requirements for lab areas will
differ somewhat from requirements for the lobby).

B. General Requirements
1 The CxA shall develop, with the assistance of the appropriate contractors and the rest of the Cx
Team, a script that shall test the response of the Fire/Life Safety system.
2 Scheduling and execution of the FLSPs will be contingent on notification from all affected
Contractors that their equipment and systems are complete, fully operational, and ready for
checkout
3 Other prerequisites for execution of FLSPs shall include the following:
a. Affected building systems shall be fully operational and running under normal automatic
control.
b. All specified contractor testing and FPPs have been successfully completed and
documented
c. Field Observation Notes® affecting equipment or system performance and operation have
been resolved
4 FLSPs shall be completed prior to Owner Training and the Final Operation Orientation /
Demonstration phases of the project.
5 Where possible, FLSPs will be scheduled during normal working hours. However, due to the
disruptive nature of some FLSPs the contractors should be prepared to execute some of these
procedures either at night or on weekends.

C. Contractor Requirements

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 18

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1 The Commissioning Team will, as a joint effort, refine, coordinate, schedule and direct the
execution of the FLSPs.
2 The CxA will develop checklists and other documentation requirements for the FLSPs.
3 Typical contractor activities during FLSP execution may include the following
a. Tripping of FAS initiating devices
b. Observing and documenting equipment and system operation
c. Resetting of fire alarm devices, fire doors, etc.
d. Setup, collection and downloading of BAS trend data
4 Contractors supplying and/or installing the following equipment & systems shall participate in all
FLSPs:
a. Fire Alarm System
b. Building Automation System
c. Magnetic door hold-opens
d. Door hardware
e. Security
f. Test and Balance (TAB) contractor
5 Contractors supplying and/or installing the following equipment & systems shall participate in
selected FLSPs designed to verify operation of their equipment and systems.
a. Vertical Transportation
b. Other Systems (dimming systems, etc.)
6 A detailed list of FLSPs will be developed by the Cx Team during construction. For budgeting
purposes, contractors involved in all FLSPs, as listed above, should plan on participating in one
FLSP per smoke zone. Contractors participating in selected FLSPs should plan on participating in
six (6) FLSPs each.
7 Tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of the FLSPs will be provided by
the CxA except for special-purpose or proprietary tools, test equipment and instrumentation which
will be provided by the contractors. All instruments will meet the requirements of Part 2 of this
specification.

3.7 EMERGENCY SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Scope
1 The Emergency System Procedure (ESP) will verify and document operation of commissioned
systems in response to simulated electrical utility power failures.
2 Operation of various systems and sub-systems that are part of the response to power loss will, in
many cases, be functionally verified during the FPP process prior to these interactive tests.
3 Objectives of the ESP include verifying operation of the emergency power system and interactive
operation of all commissioned systems and equipment fed by the emergency power system.
4 Systems which will be evaluated during the ESP include:
a. Electrical Systems including normal, emergency and critical power
b. Fire/Life Safety Systems
c. Mechanical Systems
d. Lab & Medical Systems
e. Building Automation System
f. Plumbing Systems
g. Telecommunications

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 19

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

h. Security Systems
i. All other systems specified to operate on emergency power
5 Aspects of system operation which will be verified as part of the ESP include the following:
a. System interactions will be observed for potential conflicts or operating problems.
b. Communication between systems will be verified to be properly sent, received, and result in
the intended action. This will include routing and printing of alarm messages and operation
of remote monitoring and notification systems.
c. Transition between operating modes will be verified to be smooth and free of anomalous
behavior which might negatively impact occupants, jeopardize building operation or result in
unnecessary wear and tear on building systems.
6 A typical ESP will consist of the following steps:
a. Simulate a utility power failure by disconnecting incoming electrical power from the local
utility.
b. Verify / demonstrate operation of emergency power systems including, but not limited to:

1) Emergency generators
2) Paralleling switchgear
3) Automatic transfer switches
4) Double-ended switchboards
5) Generator shedding
6) Load shedding and prioritization
7) Remote alarming & monitoring systems

c. Verify and document operation of building systems on emergency power:

1) Check equipment/system status on normal power prior to simulated power failure

2) Observe transition from normal to emergency power, document any anomalous or
unexpected operational issues
3) Verify equipment/system operation on emergency power.
4) Simulate selected equipment failures and fire alarm conditions; evaluate equipment &
system response to these conditions while operating on emergency power.

d. Restore normal utility power. Observe and document operation of all affected building
systems during transition from emergency back to normal power.
7 A detailed ESP plan will be developed by the CxA and refined by the Cx Team during construction
to meet the specified requirements of this project.

B. General Requirements
1 The CxA shall develop, with the assistance of the appropriate contractors and the rest of the Cx
Team, a script that shall test the response of the Emergency Power system.

2 Scheduling and execution of the ESP will be contingent on notification from all affected Contractors
that their equipment and systems are complete, fully operational, and ready for checkout
3 Other prerequisites for execution of the ESP shall include the following
a. Affected building systems shall be fully operational and running under normal automatic
control.
b. All specified contractor testing, FPPs and FLSPs have been successfully completed and
documented

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 20

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

c. Field Observation Notes® affecting equipment or system performance and operation have
been resolved
4 The ESP shall be completed prior to Owner Training and the Final Operation Orientation /
Demonstration phases of the project.
5 Due to the disruptive nature of the ESP, contractors should be prepared to execute these
procedures either at night or on weekends.

C. Contractor Requirements
1 The Commissioning Team will, as a joint effort, refine, coordinate, schedule and direct the
execution of the ESP. The contractors are expected to participate in this effort as outlined above.
2 Typical contractor activities during ESP execution may include the following
a. Observing and documenting equipment and system operation for their records.
b. Manipulation of equipment and systems to simulate various operating modes. This will
include starting/stopping equipment, tripping FAS devices, etc.
c. Resetting of fire alarm devices, fire doors, etc.
d. Setup, collection and downloading of BAS trend data
3 It is anticipated that the ESP shall be executed on 2 consecutive evenings, or over a single
weekend. Duration of testing on each of the 2 days is expected to be approximately 12-14 hours
per day.
4 The Electrical Contractor(s) shall work with the CM/GC and the Electric Utility Provider to plan and
coordinate electrical service interruptions to the building as required for execution of the ESP.
5 Contractors shall include the cost for 2 attempts at completion of the ESP in their proposals to allow
for potential repeats of procedures which are unsuccessful on the first attempt.
6 Tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of the ESP will be provided by
the CxA except for special-purpose or proprietary tools, test equipment and instrumentation which
will be provided by the contractors. All instruments provided by the contractors will meet the
requirements of Part 2 of this specification.

3.8 ISSUE RESOLUTION

A. Scope
1 The CxA will maintain and periodically publish a Field Observation Notes (FONs®) Report, which
will be used to document issues identified during the commissioning process.
2 The contractor(s) shall promptly respond to the FONs® Reports in writing concerning the status of
each open issue identified as their responsibility during execution of the commissioning process.
Contractor responses shall include the following information as appropriate:
a. Explanations of any questions or disagreements (issue responsibility incorrectly assigned,
issue outside of contractor’s scope, etc.)
b. Actions taken to resolve issue
c. Proposed actions including completion dates
3 The Contractors, including their sub-contractors, vendors and suppliers are responsible for
resolution of all issues identified during execution of the commissioning process. The CxA will be
available to work with the contractors and facilitate issue resolution.
4 Contractors shall responded to the FONs® issues in a timely manner, typically within 72 hours of
notification, to avoid impact to the construction schedule including the commissioning process.
5 The information reported in the FONs® shall not be construed to authorize any changes in
contractual requirements, schedules or project costs. Any such questions will be promptly directed
to the CM/GC or other parties as designated in the contract documents.

B. Contractor Requirements

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 21

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1 During Pre-functional Procedures, Pre-startup Testing, Startup Procedures and Post-startup

Testing:
a. Issues identified by the contractors during execution of Pre-functional Procedures, Pre-
Startup Testing, Startup Procedures or Post Startup Procedures shall be clearly noted on the
appropriate Pre-functional Checklist, Startup Form, Test Form, or noted on a separate sheet
and attached to the appropriate Checklist or Form.
b. Outstanding items of the PFP, Pre-startup Testing, Startup Procedures or Post-startup
Testing that were not completed successfully shall also be noted at the bottom of the
appropriate Checklist, Form or on an attached sheet.
c. Contractors shall notify the CM/GC, with a copy to the CxA, of any outstanding issues or
deficiencies in writing within (2) two days of issue identification.
d. The CxA will review the issue notification reports and submit any comments and questions to
the CM/GC, contractor or A/E as appropriate.
e. The contractor(s), including appropriate sub-contractors, vendors and suppliers will work with
the CxA to correct and re-evaluate issues or uncompleted items.
f. As soon as outstanding items have been corrected, the contractor(s) shall:

1) Notify the CM/GC and CxA that the issue has been resolved by updating and
resubmitting their issue notification report.
2) Resubmit updated Checklists, Startup Forms and/or Test Forms as applicable
g. Issues identified during Prefunctional Procedures and Pre-startup Testing shall be resolved
prior to Startup of the affected equipment or system.
h. Items left incomplete, which later cause deficiencies or delays during execution of FPPs,
FLSPs or ESP may result in back-charges to the responsible party. Also see “Failure Due to
Manufacturer Defect” procedures in this section.
2 During Functional Performance Procedures, Fire Life Safety Procedures and Emergency Systems
Procedures
a. Issues noted during execution of FPPs, FLSPs or ESP will be noted on the test forms by the
CxA.
b. Minor issues may be corrected immediately on identification and prior to proceeding with the
procedure being executed at the discretion of the CxA. The CxA’s decision will be based on
what impact the issue has on the procedure being executed, and the expected time required
to resolve the new issue. Issues resolved in this manner, will be documented on the
appropriate form or checklist.
c. CxA will endeavor to expedite the checkout process and minimize unnecessary delays, while
not compromising the integrity of the procedures.
d. Once any questions are resolved on an issue and the contractor(s) accepts responsibility to
correct it:

1) The CxA will document the issue on the FONs® Report and the contractor response and
intentions and then go on to another procedure or sequence.
2) The contractor(s) will correct the issue, and submit a written statement of correction
certifying that the equipment is ready to be re-evaluated to the CxA.
3) The contractor reschedules the re-evaluation with the CM/GC and CxA and the checkout
is repeated once. If satisfactory performance is not achieved during the second
procedure, the cost of additional procedures will be billed in accordance with the
paragraphs below “Cost of Re-Evaluation”.
e. If there are questions about an issue, regarding whether it is an issue, who is responsible, or
how to resolve it:

1) The CxA will document the issue on the FONs® Report with the contractor’s response
and a copy will given to the CM/GC and contractor representative(s) assumed to be
responsible.
2) The CxA will document the resolution process on the FONs® Report.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 22

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3) Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party will
correct the issue, sign a statement of correction and submit it to the CxA.
4) The contractor reschedules the checkout with the CxA and the checkout is repeated
once. If satisfactory performance is not achieved during the second procedure, the cost
of additional procedures will be billed in accordance with the paragraphs below “Cost of
Re-Evaluation”.

3 If issues are identified by the CxA during spot-checks of completed contractor Cx Procedures (Pre-
functional Procedures, Pre-Startup Testing, Startup Procedures or Post Startup Procedures); it
shall be the contractors responsibility to demonstrate that the identified issues are not widespread
and pervasive for all similar systems and equipment installed for this project. This may require re-
execution of all affected Cx Procedures as determined by the Commissioning Team.

C. Cost of Re-Evaluation
1 The cost for Contractors to re-execute any Commissioning Procedure due to open issues shall be
borne by the contractors.
2 The CxA will be available for two attempts of any Commissioning Procedure (one initial and one re-
try) with minimal follow-up where necessary (due to deficiencies, systems not ready, etc.) to try to
accomplish each checkout as part of the contract. When additional work is required because
systems are not ready or because they do not successfully pass Commissioning Procedures after
they have been indicated as ready, the contractor will be charged for the additional costs.
Additional fees will be paid to the CxA by the Owner/CM/GC and shall be reimbursed by the
Contractor.
3 Any required re-testing by any contractor shall not be allowed as a justified reason for a claim of
delay or for a time extension by the contractor.

D. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect

1 If 2%, or ten, whichever is greater, of similar types (size alone does not constitute a difference) of
equipment from one manufacturer or supplier fail to perform to the Contract Documents
(mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing, handling, or similar defect, not allowing it to
meet its submitted performance spec, all similar units may be considered unacceptable by the A/E
or CM/GC. In such case, the contractor(s) shall provide the Owner with the following:
a. Within one week of notification from the A/E or CM/GC, the contractor shall cause the
manufacturer’s representative to examine 10% of other identical units making a record of the
findings. The findings shall be provided to the A/E and CM/GC within two weeks of the
original notice.
b. Within two weeks of the original notification, the manufacturer, through the contractor, shall
provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the issue, cause of failures, etc. and all
proposed solutions, which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions
shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation.
2 The A/E and CM/GC will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is
acceptable.
3 Sufficient examples to allow adequate evaluation of the proposed solution will be installed by the
contractor, and the CxA and A/E will be allowed to perform PFPs and FPPs on the installations for
sufficient time to determine the performance, upon which the A/E and CM/GC will, with
recommendations by the CxA, decide whether to accept the solution.
4 After such procedures are performed and the results have been accepted as noted above, the
contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and
extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun.
5 The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from
when units or parts can be obtained.

3.9 ACCEPTANCE

Only after the satisfactory completion of the Pre-Functional Installation, Start-Up/Testing, Functional Performance
and System Performance Checkouts will the system be ready for acceptance. At no time will acceptance be made

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 23

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

for individual pieces of equipment. Final acceptance will only be for systems that will operate as intended in the basis
of design and the design intent.

3.10 APPENDICES

APPENDIX 1 – ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

APPENDIX 2 – SAMPLE COMMISSIONING TRACKING FORMS

APPENDIX 3 – LIST OF REQUIRED PRE-FUNCTIONAL AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

APPENDIX 4 – SAMPLE PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

APPENDIX 5 – SAMPLE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTS

- END OF SECTION -

C:\PROJECT\716.1 (BYU-Idaho)\Cx Planning\Cx Specs\716_019113_CxSpec_v1_071217.doc

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 24

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

APPENDIX 1 – COMMISSIONING ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

The following are common abbreviations used in the Commissioning Specifications

Abbrev. Description Abbrev. Description

A/E Architect/Engineer IOM Installation, Operation &
Maintenance Manual
BAS Building Automation System ISP Integrated Systems Procedure

CxA Commissioning Authority IT Information Technology

CC Prime Controls Contractor ME Mechanical Engineer

CCR Contractor’s Commissioning MC Prime Mechanical Contractor

Representative
Cx Commissioning O&M Operation and Maintenance

EC Prime Electrical Contractor PF Pre-Functional

EE Electrical Engineer PFP Pre-Functional Procedure

ESP Emergency Systems Procedure PM Owner’s Project Manager

FLSP Fire Life Safety Procedure PTB Project Test & Balance Contractor

FM Owner’s Facilities Management Subs Subcontractors

FMP Failure Mode Procedure TAB Test, Adjust and Balance

FONs® Field Observation Notes®

FP Functional Performance

FPP Functional Performance Procedure

CM/GC General Contractor/Construction

Manager

Note that the terms Contractor, MC, EC, CC, or PTB as used in the Commissioning Specification should be
understood to include both the associated Contractor and any sub-contractors, vendors and suppliers providing
services or equipment to the General Contractor.

Definitions
Acceptance Phase: Final phase of the construction occurring after successful execution of all required Cx
Procedures and Final Operational Testing during which system installation and operation is demonstrated to the
Owner and Authority Having Jurisdiction for the purposes of achieving occupancy and accreditation.
Approval: acceptance that a document, piece of equipment or system has been reviewed and found to be
properly installed and is functioning in the tested modes according to the contract documents.
Architect Engineer (A/E): the prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who comprise the design team,
generally the mechanical designer/engineer and the electrical designer/engineer.
Building Automation System (BAS) central DDC control system used to control and monitor operation of the
buildings mechanical systems.
Commissioning Authority (CxA): an independent person, company or agent retained by the owner and not
otherwise associated with the A/E team members or contracting team members. The CxA implements the
overall commissioning process and carries out or observes the tasks necessary to complete the commissioning
process. The CxA does not take an oversight role like the owner’s representative or construction manager.
Commissioning Report: the document that records the results of the commissioning process, including the as-
built performance of the MEP system and documents all sign-offs.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 25

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

Commissioning Specifications: the contract document that details the contractor’s role and responsibilities for
execution of the Cx process.
Commissioning Team: those people responsible for working together in carrying out the commissioning
process.
Contract Documents: the documents binding on parties involved in the construction of this project (drawings,
specifications, change orders, amendments, contracts, etc.)
Contractor: refers to all contractors or authorized representatives and all applicable subs, vendors, and
suppliers contracted through that (those) contractors as well as any vendors or suppliers contracted directly to
the Owner. This defines any and all General Contractor, Prime or Trade Labor Contractor as “Contractor(s)
whether or not self-performing work.
Control system: systems which provide control and monitoring functions for associated mechanical, electrical,
plumbing and specialty systems.
Datalogging: monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment using stand-alone dataloggers
separate from the control or BAS systems.
Design Narrative or Design Documentation: sections of either the Design Intent or Basis of Design, generally
included in early A/E submittals to describe proposed systems.
Emergency Systems Procedures (ESPs): A scripted test of facility electrical, mechanical , and other building
systems designed for the facility and performed under simulated failure of utility power. Procedures include,
failure of utility power while monitoring critical back-up systems and the systems that they power, verification of
automatic re-start procedures and performance after restoration of power, and documentation of equipment
operating status and parameters during all phases of the test.
Factory Testing: testing of equipment by the equipment manufacturer’s personnel usually conducted at the
manufacturer’s factory or assembly plant. Factory testing is often witnessed by an Owner’s representative
and/or other members of the Cx Team prior to releasing the equipment for delivery to the job site.
Field Observation Notes® (FONs®): Electronic database or spreadsheet tracking method used by the CxA for
monitoring the status of issues raised during execution of the Cx Process.
Fire Life Safety Procedures: Part of the ISPs used to evaluate interactive operation of building systems under
simulated fire conditions. Typical procedures include tripping selected smoke detectors and verify operation of
HVAC systems, elevator systems, fire doors, security systems, etc. May also include evaluation of smoke
evacuation from selected spaces using smoke bombs, theatrical fog generators or similar smoke substitutes.
Functional Performance Checklist: the document containing a list of items developed by the CxA to record the
performance of the equipment or system in question during Functional Performance Procedures.
Functional Performance Procedures (FPPs): A series of evaluations developed by the CxA to verify operation
of equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. FPPs are performed after
completion of the Prefunctional Procedures, Startup Procedures, Contractor Pre-startup and Post-startup
Testing and serve as a prerequisite for the ISPs.

Equipment level FPPs verify the capacity, performance and efficiency of commissioned equipment relative to
the manufacturer’s published (submitted) equipment data and the contract documents. System-level FPPs
evaluate dynamic operation of systems and sub-systems under various operating conditions (heating, cooling,
etc.) as outlined in the Sequence of Operations. Emphasis in the system-level FPPs is on programming and
operation of the BAS.
General Contractor/Construction Manager: the contractor responsible for overall day-to-day management and
coordination of the project. The CM/GC serves as the bridge between the Owner and the Prime Trade
Contractors.
Integrated Systems Procedures: A series of procedures including Fire Life Safety Procedures and Emergency
System Procedures used to evaluate building-wide operation of commissioned systems under simulated fires
and power failure conditions. During the ISP’s emphasis is placed on evaluating interactions between building
systems and transition of building systems between different operating modes.
Issue: (or Open Issue) a condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system
that is not in compliance with the contract documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with
the design intent).
Manual Procedures: Cx Procedures which use hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or
direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the
“observation”).

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 26

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

Monitoring: the recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using
dataloggers or the trending capabilities of control systems.
Non-Compliance: see Issue.
Non-Conformance: see Issue.
Over-written Value: writing over a sensor value in the control system to see the response of a system (e.g.,
changing the outside air temperature value from 50F to 75F to verify economizer operation). See also
“Simulated Signal.”
Owner-Contracted Tests: tests paid for by the Owner outside the Contractor’s contract and for which the CxA
does not oversee. These tests will not be repeated during functional tests if properly documented.
Pre-Functional Checklist: An inspection list that is used to document that equipment is installed correctly and is
ready for startup. These checklists are developed by the CxA and are completed by the Contractors with
oversight and assistance from the CxA.
Pre-Functional Procedures (PFPs): A series of static inspections used to verify equipment installation and to
prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., belt tension, oil levels, etc.). The word “Pre-
Functional” refers to before Startup. Even without a commissioning process, contractors typically perform
some, if not many, of the PFP items a CxA will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the
execution of these items. Therefore, for most equipment, the contractors execute the PFP on their own. The
CxA only requires that the procedures be documented in writing, and does not witness much of the PFP, except
for larger or more critical pieces of equipment.
Project Manager (PM): the contracting and managing authority for the owner over the design and/or
construction of the project.
Project Test and Balancing Contractor: the contractor(s) who is responsible for Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing the facilities HVAC systems.
Sampling: functionally testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near identical pieces of
equipment. Typically used for devices such as VAV boxes.
Seasonal Performance Checkouts: functional checkouts that are deferred until the system(s) will experience
conditions closer to their design conditions.
Simulated Condition: condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of a system (e.g.,
applying a hair drier to a room temperature sensor to see the response in a VAV box).
Simulated Signal: disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or
pressure to the transducer and DDC system to simulate a sensor value.
Specifications: the construction specifications of the Contract Documents, may be abbreviated as spec or
specs.
Startup Procedures: Procedures followed for the initial energizing or starting of equipment, following a pre-
approved Startup Plan. Startup Procedures occur after successful execution of Prefunctional Procedures and
Contractor Pre-startup Testing.
Startup Plan. A set of written procedures used to prepare for and startup of a piece of equipment. Startup
Plans are typically based on standard procedures and documentation provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Subs: the subcontractors to the contractor(s) or vendors who provide and/or install building components and
systems.
Testing Contractors: a Sub, responsible for various contractor-required system testing (e.g., generator load
tests, ATS testing, telecom loop testing, etc.).
Test Procedures: the step-by-step process which must be executed to fulfill the test requirements. Test
procedures typically include documentation requirements which also must be completed to constitute a
completed procedure.
Test Requirements: requirements specifying what modes and functions, etc. shall be tested. The test
requirements are not the detailed test procedures. The test requirements are specified in the Contract
Documents (Sections 15997; 16997, etc.). Examples include duct leakage, hydro, megger testing and other
similar tests.
Trending: monitoring of equipment and system operation using the Building Automation System.
Vendor: supplier of equipment.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 27

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 28

 BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

APPENDIX 2 – SAMPLE COMMISSIONING TRACKING FORMS

Commissioning Status Tracking Report Updated on: 12/13/01 Updated by: MVS

BY E-CUBE BY CONTRACTOR (Insert Date Complete) BY E-CUBE

T&B Report
Manuf I-OM
Submittals

Functional
PF Forms

Test and
Manuals

Manuals
Start-up

Start-up

Balance
Report

Forms
Equip.

Done

O&M
Tag Description Location % PF Cx Completed % FF Cx Complete Notes
Air-Handling Units

AHU-1 1st Flr AHU 2nd Flr Mech (2-21) Awaiting completion of controls
AHU-2 2nd & 3rd Flr AHU 2nd Flr Mech (2-39) Awaiting completion of controls
AHU-3 Kitchen/Dining Rm AHU 2nd Flr Mech (2-39)
AHU-4 Gymnasium AHU 2nd Flr Mech (2-21) Awaiting completion of controls
MAU-1 Kitchen Hood Unit Roof
Air Conditioning Unit

AC-1 MDF Room Unit

ACC-1 AC-1 Condensing Unit Roof

Fans
TE-1 Toilet Exhuast Rm 2-21
TE-2 Toilet Exhuast Roof
ER-1 AHU-1 Exh Mech Room 2-21 Need to check fan pressures
ER-2 AHU-2 Exh Mech Room 2-39
ER-3 AHU-3 Exh Mech Room 2-39
DE-1 Dishwasher Exh Roof
KE-1 Kitchen Exh Roof Need to check fan pressures

Terminal Units
FPBs Fan Powered General Awaiting completion of Controls
VAVs Variable Air Volume General Awaiting completion of Controls
CVBs Constant Volume General
Air Cooled Chillers

CH-1 Air Cooled Chiller Roof To be re-tested in Spring 2002

CH-2 Air Cooled Chiller Roof To be re-tested in Spring 2002

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 29

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

APPENDIX 3 – LIST OF REQUIRED PRE-FUNCTIONAL & FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

(To be developed)

APPENDIX 4 – SAMPLE PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 30

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

PROJECT NAME
Pump - Prefunctional Checklist
System(s): Unit ID:
Location: Ref Dwgs:
Name / Company / Date(s):

Instructions: Check off items as completed. Work in progress should be left blank until done.
Note comments, problems, etc. in spaces provided. Installing contractor to sign-off form when complete.
Nameplate Data:
Pump: Manuf: Model #: Serial #:
GPM: HD: HP:
Imp Size: Pump Type: RPM:
Motor: Manuf: Model #: Serial #:
HP: Volts/Amps: RPM:
SF: PF: EFF:
Frame: Encl: Insul Class:
Starter: Manuf: Type: Size:
Htr Manuf: Size: Manual Reset:
ITEM OK COMMENTS
Storage / Handling
Protected against dirt / debris during storage
Motor protected from water/moisture
Pump openings covered until pipe connected
Labeling and Identification
Unit labeled w/ engraved plastic nameplate
Pump and motor mfg. nameplate installed, readable
General Installation
Located per plans
Pump/motor nameplate data matches equipment schedule
Pump installed on 4" housekeeping pad
Installed level and plumb
Adequate clearance for service / maintenance
No visible sign of leaks
Coupling installed, no noticable slop
Pump/motor shafts rotate freely
OSHA approved coupling guard installed
Flow direction correct
Baseplate grouted with Embeco non-shrinking grout
Foundation bolts tightened
Final alignment done after grouting and bolts tightened
Pump Motor
1.15 Service Factor
ODP Enclosure
Rated for inverter duty, class H insulation w/ VFD
Motor base adjustable for alignment
Notes:

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 31

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

APPENDIX 4 – SAMPLE PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

(continued)

ITEM OK COMMENTS
Vibration Isolation
Pump mounted on steel/concrete inertia base
Vib isolation per spec 15240
Pump base placed on blocks prior to isol. Install
2" clearence between inertia base and housekeep pad
Weight transferred to springs after piping done, system filled
Inertia base free to move, springs not bottomed-out
Trash/debris removed from under inertia base
Flex conns. installed on suc/disch (per manuf instr)
Piping within 50' of pumps isolated
Piping Connections
Piping supported separately from pump
Piping installed level and plumb
Suction/discharge isolation vlvs installed, accessible
Y-strainer w/ blowoff valve in pump suction line
Check valve and manual balancing valve in disch line
5 dia of straight pipe @ inlet to end-suction pump
Air separator/strainer at pump suction lines
Low point drains, high point vents installed
Press guage across strainer & across pump
Guage piping installed @ tapped holes in pump flanges
Pump base drain valved and run to nearest floor drain
Exp. tanks installed @ pump suction, air charge OK
Insulation
Cold water pumps (< 60F) instulated with armaflex
Armaflex fitted to pump, removable w/ velcro closures
Insulation doesn't cover nameplates
Electrical Connections
Electrical connections complete
Final connection to motor w/ flex
Power available from MCC or VFD
Local disconnect switch installed (if applicable)
Starter, VFD and/or local disconnect labeled
Conduit routing & support OK
Conduit and wire size per code/spec.
Fuses and motor overloads installed
Fuse sizing correct, overload size/setting correct
Overloads set for manual reset (not auto)
Notes:

Signatures:

Installing Contractor / Vendor: Date:

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 32

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

APPENDIX 5 – SAMPLE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTS

PROJECT NAME
PUMP - FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
Location: Equipment ID:
Participants (name, company, phone, date(s)): Installing Contractor:
Reference Dwgs:

Manufacturer / Nameplate:

Operating Conditions:

Testing Instruments Used:

FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE
ITEM OK/Value COMMENTS
General
Hand / Off / Auto operation OK
Start / Stop vibration and noise acceptable
Run vibration / noise / cavitation acceptable
Pump rotation correct
No visible leaks
Flow proving
Motor Temperature OK
Shut-Off Pressures
Measured Gauge TAB
Suction pressure
Discharge pressure
Differential pressure (Design = _______)
Impeller size OK
Local gauges correct
Operating Flows & Pressures
Measured Gauge TAB
Suction pressure
Discharge pressure
Differential pressure (Design = _______)
Flow Rate (Design = _______ GPM)
Electrical Meaurements
Volts (Design = ________ +/- 10%) A/B: A/C: B/C:
Amps (FLA = ________) (SFA = _______) A: B: C:
Power (kW ) W 1: W 2:
Power Factor
Heater size / settings correct
Heaters set for manual reset
Companion Equipment
Differential Pressure switches functional
Diff. Press switches indicate poistive flow
Flow switch functional
CT sensor functional
COMMENTS AND OBSERVATIONS:

END OF SECTION 01 91 13

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ` 019113 - 33

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 019115 – BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents, including the Owner’s
General Conditions and articles of the General Contractor’s General Conditions.

B. This section includes the commissioning requirements for the Building Enclosure systems. Refer to Section
019113 for General Commissioning Requirements and Section 019117 for Building Enclosure functional
performance testing.

1. The commissioning requirements for the Building Enclosure systems given in this section are
entirely separate from, and in addition to, the Commissioning requirements specified in Section
019113. The General Contractor (GC), Contractors, Subcontractors, and Suppliers are required to
participate in both commissioning processes as required by this section and Section 019113
General Commissioning Requirements.

2. The 019113 Commissioning Agent and 019117 Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent will
provide separate documentation for each commissioning process.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Building Enclosure Commissioning (BECx) is a systematic process of ensuring all building enclosure
systems responsible for environment separation perform interactively according to the Owner’s Project
Requirements and the Architect’s Basis of Design. The BECx process is intended to achieve the following
specific objectives according to the Contract Documents:

1. Verify and document proper installation and performance of building enclosure materials and
systems.

2. Provide Owner with functional building enclosure systems with minimal performance problems at
project completion.

B. Commissioning does not take away from, or reduce responsibility of, system designers or installing
contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.

C. This section shall in no way diminish the responsibility of Division 03, 04, 07, 08, and 09 Contractors,
Subcontractors, and Suppliers in performing all aspects of work and testing as outlined in the Contract
Documents. Any requirements outlined in this section are in addition to requirements outlined in Division 03,
04, 07, 08, and 09.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. The following are common abbreviations used in the Specifications (definitions are found further in this
Section):

1. A/E - Architect and Design Engineers

2. BECA – Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent
3. CxA - Commissioning Agent - Refer to Section 019113
4. GC - General Contractor
5. CT - Commissioning Team
6. Cx - Commissioning
7. Cx Plan - Commissioning Plan
8. FPT - Functional Performance Test
9. OR - Owner’s Representative
10. O&M - Operations & Maintenance
11. RFI - Request for Information

1.4 DEFINITIONS

BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS `019115 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

A. Approval: Acceptance that a material or system has been properly installed and is functioning in tested
modes according to the Contract Documents.

B. Architect/Engineer (A/E): Prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who comprise the design team,
generally the Architect of Record and any Design Sub-consultants.

C. Basis of Design (BOD): Documentation of primary thought processes and assumptions behind design
decisions made to meet design intent. Describes systems, components, conditions, and methods chosen to
meet intent.

D. Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent (BECA): Contracted to Owner through the CxA. BECA directs
and coordinates day-to-day building enclosure commissioning activities independently from CxA.

E. Commissioning Agent (CxA): Contracted to Owner. CxA directs and coordinates day-to-day commissioning
activities excluding BECx activites. CxA reports directly to Owner.

F. Commissioning Plan: Overall plan developed after bidding that provides structure, schedule, and
coordination planning for commissioning process. A specific building enclosure section will be added into
the project’s commissioning plan.

G. Contract Documents: Documents binding on parties involved in construction of this project (drawings,
specifications, change orders, amendments, contracts, etc.).

H. Deficiency: Condition of a building enclosure material or system that is not in compliance with Contract
Documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with design intent).

I. Functional Performance Test (FPT): Test of performance of building enclosure materials and systems.
Systems are tested under various simulated environmental conditions, such as air leakage under pressure
differential and water leakage under pressure differential with water spray.

J. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR): A written document that details the functional requirements of a
project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. This includes project and design goals,
measurable performance criteria, budgets, schedules, success criteria, and supporting information.

K. Simulated Condition: Condition created for testing component or system (e.g., applying pressure differential
across the building enclosure concurrent with water spray to simulate a wind driven rain).

L. Specifications: Construction specifications of Contract Documents.

M. Mock--up: The activities where systems or materials are initially constructed and tested. Mock-ups are to
be free standing and approved prior to commencing full scale construction.

N. Sub-contractor: Contractors of GC, and their Sub-contractors, who provide and install building enclosure
components and systems.

1.5 RELATED WORK

A. Specific building enclosure commissioning requirements are given in this specification. The following
specification sections are related to the commissioning work specified in this section:

1. General Commissioning Requirements: Refer to 019113

2. Building Enclosure Functional Performance Testing: Refer to 019117
3. Basic Concrete Requirements: Refer to Division 03
4. Basic Masonry Requirements: Refer to Division 04
5. Basic Waterproofing, Roofing, Air Barrier and Insulation Requirements: Refer to Division 07
6. Basic Fenestrations Requirements: Refer to Division 08
7. Basic Finishing Requirements: Refer to Division 09

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Commissioning Team: Members of the Commissioning Team (CT) will consist of:

1. Commissioning Agent (CxA)

2. Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent (BECA)
3. Building Enclosure Testing Agent (BETA)

BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS `019115 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4. Owner’s Representative(s) (OR)

5. General Contractor (GC)
6. Architect and Design Engineers (A/E)
7. Building Enclosure Subcontractors

B. Management: Owner will contract services of the BECA through the CxA. The BECA will direct and
coordinate commissioning activities and report to the OR. All members of the Commissioning Team shall
cooperate to fulfill contracted responsibilities and objectives of the Contract Documents.

C. Scheduling:

1. BECA will work with commissioning team to establish required commissioning activities to
incorporate in preliminary commissioning schedule. The GC will integrate commissioning activities
into master construction schedule. Necessary notifications are to be made in a timely manner in
order to expedite commissioning.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. A/E or General Contractor shall provide BECA with documentation required for commissioning work. At
minimum, documentation shall include: Requirements as described in Section 019113 and performance
data and any performance test procedures. In addition, installation and checkout materials shall be
submitted to BECA.

B. BECA shall review submittals concurrent with the A/E for conformance as it relates to commissioning.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

A. Building Enclosure

1. Below Grade Systems, Roofing Systems, Opaque Wall/Cladding Systems, Fenestration Systems
responsible for providing the following functions:

a. Air barrier
b. Vapor barrier
c. Insulation
d. Waterproofing

3.2 RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMMISSIONING TEAM MEMBERS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

A. Architect/Engineer (A/E)

1. Document design intent of systems.

2. Review and incorporate building enclosure commissioning specification and functional performance
test specification into the construction documents.
3. Provide construction documents electronically.
4. Review BECA comments on construction document and shop drawings.
5. Assist in dispute resolution regarding building enclosure items.
6. Review BECA reports.

B. Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent (BECA)

1. Participate in an initial team conference call to identify the OPR

2. Review of architectural drawings and specifications
3. Develop and update the BECx plan
4. Write BECx requirements specification section
5. Develop BECx functional performance test specification section
6. Final back check of construction documents.
7. Attend pre-construction BECx meeting
8. Review submittals and shop drawings prior to or concurrent with the A/E reviews
9. Observe and document the construction of the building enclosure mock-up

BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS `019115 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

10. Observe and document functional performance testing of the building enclosure mock-up
11. Perform periodic site visits to document and observe installations pertinent to building enclosure
performance
12. Attend commissioning meetings periodically
13. Assist in dispute resolution
14. Review, track, and coordinate resolution of non-compliance and deficiencies identified by
commissioning team. Maintain Master Deficiency List (MDL) including the tracking of resolution.
15. Observe and document building enclosure functional performance testing
16. Provide final commissioning report.

C. General Contractor (GC)

1. Attend commissioning kick-off meeting and other commissioning team meetings.

2. Incorporate commissioning activities into the construction schedule.
3. Periodically update commissioning activities in the construction schedule.
4. Facilitate cooperation of Sub-contractors in commissioning work.
5. Submit copies of initial and final A/E approved submittals for commissioned system equipment to
BECA for review.
6. Review BECA submittal comments
7. Verify building enclosure materials and assemblies are ready for functional testing.
8. Submit maintenance logs of all interim maintenance or repair tasks performed by Sub-contractors.
9. Insure resolution of non-compliance and deficiencies in construction or test results. Obtain written
documentation of completion from the appropriate Sub-contractors.
10. Provide letters of compatibility for adjacent building enclosure materials and assemblies.
11. Facilitate all repairs and retesting of failed condition and pay for all associated costs.
12. Provide all warrantee information to BECA

D. Subcontractors/Vendors

1. Review Commissioning Plan and FPT specification.

2. Attend commissioning kick-off meeting and other commissioning team meetings.
3. Notify GC and BECA of work completion.
4. Attend all required material and systems testing.
5. Execute all periodic maintenance or repairs required on started systems from initial mock-up of
equipment to final acceptance by Owner to prevent material warranties from being voided.
6. Ensure installation work is complete, is in compliance with Contract Documents, and is ready for
Functional Performance Testing. Notify GC that equipment and systems are ready for Functional
Performance Testing. FPT test results will be documented by BECA
7. Provide all warrantee information to GC.

E. Building Enclosure Testing Agency (BETA)

1. Attend commissioning kick-off meeting and other commissioning team meetings.

2. Provide on-site technician and equipment to complete mock-up and field Functional Performance
Testing.
3. Prepare and submit reports at the conclusion of all testing.
4. Perform retesting and prepare corresponding reports.

3.3 BUILDING ENVELOP COMMISSIONING TEAM (BECx) MEETINGS

A. BECx meetings will be held periodically as determined by the BECA.

B. Discussions held in BECx meetings shall include, but not be limited to, system/materials, mock-up/field,
progress, scheduling, testing, documentation, deficiencies, and problem resolution.

3.4 REPORTING

A. BECA will provide status reports to GC, CxA, A/E, and Owner as needed.

B. BECA shall submit non-compliance and deficiency reports to GC, CxA, A/E, and Owner as needed.

C. BECA shall provide a final summary report to CxA and Owner.

3.5 MOCK-UP AND FINAL CONSTRUCTION

BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS `019115 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

A. GC and Subcontractors shall verify completion of assemblies compliant with project documents and
deficiency log items prior to functional performance testing or concealment of functional performance layers
within the building enclosure.

3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Objectives and Scope

1. The objective of Functional Performance Testing is to demonstrate each system is operating

according to documented design intent and Contract Documents. Functional Performance Testing
facilitates bringing systems from a state of substantial completion to fully operational. Additionally,
during Functional Performance Testing, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected,
improving operation and functioning of systems.

B. Development of Test Procedures

1. The purpose of a specific test is to verify and document compliance of the installed enclosure
systems with the OPR. The BECA shall develop specific test procedures for inclusion in
Specification Section 019117 – Building Enclosure Functional Performance Testing

C. Coordination and Scheduling

1. GC will provide sufficient notice to BECA regarding completion schedule for materials and systems.
GC will schedule Functional Performance Tests with CT. BECA shall witness and document
functional testing of equipment and systems. BETA shall execute tests under direction of BECA.
BETA may be the same entity as the BECA if deemed the best value to the project.

2. Successful completion of mock-up functional performance testing shall occur prior to full production
installation of building enclosure materials and systems.

3.7 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE, AND APPROVAL OF TESTS

A. Documentation

1. BECA will witness and document results of FPT.

B. Non-Conformance

1. BECA will record results of functional testing. Deficiency or non-conformance issues will be noted
and reported to GC, CxA, Architect and Owner.

2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during tests at discretion of BECA. In
such cases, deficiency and resolution will be documented.

3. Every effort will be made to expedite testing and minimize unnecessary delays, while not
compromising integrity of tests. BECA shall not overlook deficient work or loosen acceptance
criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues unless directed to do so by the Owner.

4. Deficiencies are handled in the following manner:

a. When there is no dispute on deficiency and Sub-contractor accepts responsibility for

remedial action:

1) BECA documents deficiency and Sub-contractors response and intentions and

they go on to another test or installation. BECA submits deficiency report to GC,
CxA, Architect and Owner. Copy is provided to Sub-contractor by GC. Sub-
contractor corrects deficiency and certifies that material or assembly is ready to
be retested. GC informs CT of retesting schedule.

2) GC reschedules test with BECA and BETA.

b. When there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is

responsible:

BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS `019115 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1) BECA documents deficiency and Contractor’s response. BECA submits

deficiency report to GC, CxA, Architect and Owner. Copy is provided to Sub-
contractor by GC.

2) GC facilitates resolution of deficiency. Other parties are brought into discussions

as needed. Final interpretive authority is with A/E. Final acceptance authority is
with the Owner.

3) GC documents resolution process.

4) Once interpretation and resolution has been decided, appropriate party corrects
deficiency, GC reschedules test, and test is repeated until satisfactory
performance is achieved.

C. Cost of Retesting

1. Costs for all retesting will be the full responsibility of the GC and Subcontractors. These costs
include all access, equipment, labor, and materials required to complete the retesting.

3.8 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. Final Report Details

1. Final commissioning report will include an executive summary, list of participants and roles, brief
building description, overview of commissioning and testing scope, and general description of
testing and verification methods. Report will contain evaluation regarding:

a. Conformance to specifications and design intent

b. Material/system installation
c. Functional performance

2. All outstanding non-compliance items will be specifically listed.

3. Recommendations for improvement to system or operations, future actions, etc. will also be listed.

END OF SECTION

BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS `019115 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 019117 – BUILDING ENCLOSURE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents, including the Owner’s
General Conditions and articles of the General Contractor’s General Conditions.

B. This section includes the functional performance testing requirements for the Building Enclosure systems.
Refer to Section 019115 for Building Envelope Commissioning Requirements

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Division 4, 7 and 8 Specification Sections also
apply to this section. Where conflicts arise regarding building envelope testing, this Section shall supersede
other Sections where contradictions occur.

1.3 TESTING AGENCY

A. The BETA is the same entity as the BECA.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. The following are common abbreviations used in the Specifications (definitions are found further in this
Section):

1. A/E - Architect and Design Engineers

2. BECA – Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent
3. CxA - Commissioning Agent - Refer to Section 019113
4. GC - General Contractor
5. CT - Commissioning Team
6. Cx - Commissioning
7. Cx Plan - Commissioning Plan
8. FPT - Functional Performance Test
9. OR - Owner’s Representative
10. O&M - Operations & Maintenance
11. RFI - Request for Information
12. BETA – Building Enclosure Testing Agency

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. See building Enclosure Commissioning Requirements section 019115 for definitions.

1.6 RELATED WORK

A. Specific building enclosure commissioning requirements are given in this specification. The following
specification sections are related to the commissioning work specified in this section:

1. General Commissioning Requirements: Refer to 019113

2. Building Envelope Commissioning Requirements: Refer to 0119115
3. Basic Masonry Requirements: Refer to Division 04
4. Basic Waterproofing, Roofing, Air Barrier and Insulation Requirements: Refer to Division 07
5. Basic Fenestrations Requirements: Refer to Division 08

1.7 COORDINATION

BUILDING ENCLOSURE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS `019117 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

A. Functional Performance Team Members will consist of:

1. Commissioning Agent (CxA)

2. Building Envelope Commissioning Agent (BECA)
3. Building Envelope Testing Agent (BETA)
4. Owner’s Representative(s) (OR)
5. General Contractor (GC)
6. Architect and Design Engineers (A/E)
7. Building Envelope Sub-contractors

B. Management: The BETA is the same entity as the BECA.

C. Scheduling:

1. BECA/BETA will work with the GC to establish a functional performance testing schedule.

1.8 REPORTING

A. BECA/BETA shall submit all test reports to the GC, CxA, A/E and Owner as needed.

B. BECA shall submit non-compliance and deficiency reports to GC, CxA, A/E and Owner as needed.

1.9 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE, AND APPROVAL OF TESTS

A. Documentation

1. BECA will witness/perform and document results of FPT.

B. Non-Conformance

1. BECA/BETA will record results of functional testing. Deficiency or non-conformance issues will be
noted and reported to GC, CxA and Owner.

2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during tests at discretion of BECA. In
such cases, deficiency and resolution will be documented.

3. Every effort will be made to expedite testing and minimize unnecessary delays, while not
compromising integrity of tests. BECA shall not overlook deficient work or loosen acceptance
criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues unless directed to do so by the Owner.

4. Deficiencies are handled in the following manner:

a. When there is no dispute on deficiency and Sub-contractor accepts responsibility for

remedial action:

1) BECA documents deficiency and Sub-contractors response and intentions and

they go on to another test or installation. BECA submits deficiency report to GC,
CxA and Owner. Copy is provided to Sub-contractor by GC. Sub-contractor
corrects deficiency and certifies that material or assembly is ready to be retested.
GC informs CT of retesting schedule.

2) GC reschedules test with BECA/ BETA.

b. When there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is

responsible:

1) BECA documents deficiency and Contractor’s response. BECA submits

deficiency report to GC, CxA and Owner. Copy is provided to Sub-contractor by
GC.

2) GC facilitates resolution of deficiency. Other parties are brought into discussions

as needed. Final interpretive authority is with A/E. Final acceptance authority is
with the Owner.

3) GC documents resolution process.

BUILDING ENCLOSURE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS `019117 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4) Once interpretation and resolution has been decided, appropriate party corrects
deficiency, GC reschedules test, and test is repeated until satisfactory
performance is achieved.

C. Cost of Testing

1. Costs for the initial testing located within this specification sections shall be the responsibility of the
owner. The contractor is to provide access to the test specimens to the CT.

D. Cost of Retesting

1. Costs for all retesting will be the full responsibility of the GC and Sub-contractors. These costs
include all access, equipment, labor, and materials required to complete the retesting.

1.10 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The performance criteria below apply to all mock-up and field testing of exterior envelope components.

B. Air and water performance criteria summary table according to each component:

Performance Criteria
Component
Air Water
ASTM E 1186 (4.2.7) – No major air leaks. AAMA 501.1/ ASTM E 1105 - No
A major leak is defined as air and smoke uncontrolled water leakage when
are visible and easily detectable by hand tested under a pressure difference of
Curtain Wall/ within one inch of the leak location(s) 8.0 lbf/sq. ft
Fenestrations
ASTM E 783 – Maximum air leakage of See specification.
0.09 cfm/ft at an air pressure differential of
6.24 psf
ASTM E 1186 (4.2.6) – Pass/fail criteria AAMA 501.1/ ASTM E 1105 - No
shall be no bubbles observed in the leak uncontrolled water leakage when
detection liquid. tested under a pressure difference of
ASTM E 783 – Maximum air leakage of 8.0 lbf/sq. ft
Air Barrier 0.04 cfm/ft at an air pressure differential of
Assemblies 1.57 psf
ASTM E 1186 (4.2.7) – No major air leaks.
A major leak is defined as air and smoke
are visible and easily detectable by hand
within one inch of the leak location(s)
ASTM E 1186 (4.2.6) – Pass/fail criteria ASTM D5957 – Flood testing at all
shall be no bubbles observed in the leak roofing details with minimum 2” of
detection liquid. water at all hot fluid-applied locations
Roofing Systems
above occupied spaces. No leaks
through membrane/roof deck after
48 hours of testing.

C. Water leakage is only acceptable if ALL of the following conditions are satisfied:

1. Water is contained and drained to the exterior.

2. There is no wetting of a surface that is visible to the building occupants.
3. There would be no staining or other damage to the completed building or finishes.

D. Where testing indicates that performance requirements are not met, the contractor shall repair or replace the
failed section and a re-test conducted. Any repairs should be conducted with inspection by the BECA.
Retesting shall be conducted by the BECA/BETA. All costs associated with the repair and re-testing shall
be the responsibility of the contractor.

BUILDING ENCLOSURE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS `019117 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

E. In addition to retesting, failed tests will typically result in testing of an additional specimen at the discretion of
the owner and at the cost of the contractor. Testing will be concluded only when satisfactory results are
achieved.

1.11 MOCK-UP TEST REQUIREMENTS

A. A building envelope mock-up shall be constructed and tested prior to commencement of installation of
building envelope components responsible for providing environmental separation. Testing will be
conducted on the installed fenestration, air barrier, and any terminations or penetrations through the air
barrier such as fasteners but prior to the installation of any exterior claddings. Interior finishes, interior
gypsum wall board, or insulation should not be installed prior to mock-up testing. The mock-up shall include
a junction with the roofing membrane, a building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection. The
mock-up shall employ no less than 100 sq. ft. of opaque wall and a fenestration assembly. The mock-up
shall include at least a portion of the terra cotta cladding, architectural concrete exterior wall, and curtain wall
and storefront systems. For certain building components that are not included in the free standing mock-up,
separate mini mock-ups that are the first installed on the building to remain are acceptable.

B. The coordination, construction and completion of the mock-up construction are the responsibility of the
General Contractor. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to construct and repair the test
chamber/enclosure as necessary to create an air-tight chamber. Mock-up test chambers/enclosures are
typically constructed of wood or steel framing, exterior sheathing, and a sheet applied air barrier. Prior to
testing, the BETA will pressurize the test chamber while simultaneously supplying smoke to the chamber.
Any voids in the chamber air barrier will be identified and sealed to create an air-tight chamber. The
General Contractor shall permit inspections of the mock-up to the BECA and BETA and any member of the
building envelope commissioning team throughout construction and testing as required.

C. It is left to the discretion of the OR and/or A/E to have all exterior insulation, claddings, etc. installed after the
completion of mock-up performance testing. At a minimum the masonry must be installed up to the lower
30” to perform the masonry weep testing.

D. The following test protocol shall be completed after installation of air barriers including all flashings,
fenestration assemblies, and all penetrations through the air barrier, but prior to installation of exterior
cladding and interior finishes.

1. ASTM E 1186-03 method 4.2.7, Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building
Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems; Use pressurization and smoke tracers to identify leak locations
through the mock-up chamber and the face of the mock-up. All leaks through the mock-up
chamber must be sealed prior to commencing ASTM E 283 testing.

2. ASTM E 1186-03 method 4.2.6, Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building
Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems; Use chamber depressurization and site detection liquid at
penetrations through the air barrier (e.g. fastener penetrations). Pass/fail criteria shall be no
bubbles observed in the leak detection liquid. A minimum of 5 locations at each type of fastener
(fasteners at masonry anchors, girts, or other cladding receptors) shall be tested. Testing may
require special installation of any continuous girts or cladding receptors such that dome can be
placed completely around girt or receptor (Dome has diameter or approximately 18 in.) This is
typically accomplished by installing and fastening a 12 in. portion of the girt or receptor.

3. ASTM E 283-04, Standard Test Method for Determining the rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

4. ASTM E 331-00, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

a. In the event of water leakage through the test, additional isolation testing shall be
conducted to best determine the location of the water infiltration as required.

5. AAMA 501.1, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors
using Dynamic Pressure;

a. In the event of water leakage through the test, additional isolation testing shall be
conducted to best determine the location of the water infiltration as required.

6. ASTM D 4541-09, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion
Testers; Measured air barrier adhesion strength shall not be less than 16 lbf/sq. inch. (Test only
conducted after all other tests listed above have been successfully performed since test method is
destructive).

BUILDING ENCLOSURE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS `019117 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

E. Where testing indicates that performance requirements are not met, the contractor shall repair or replace the
failed section and a re-test conducted. Any repairs should be conducted with inspection and documentation
by the BECA. Retesting shall be conducted by the BETA. All costs associated with the repair, retesting and
re-inspection shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

1.12 FIELD TEST REQUIREMENTS

A. All functional performance tests shall be conducted in conformance with project performance requirements
as set forth below:

B. The following test methods shall be performed during the construction phase:

1. ASTM E 1186-03, Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air
Barrier Systems, Method 4.2.7. Testing performed at four (4) locations at the exterior building
enclosure at locations deemed critical by the CT.

2. AAMA 501.1, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors
using Dynamic Pressure. Testing performed at twelve (12) locations at the exterior building
enclosure at locations deemed critical by the CT.

3. ASTM D 5957, Standard Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal Waterproofing Installations. Flood
testing at all roofing details with minimum 2” of water at all hot fluid-applied rubberized asphalt
locations above occupied spaces. No leaks through membrane/roof deck after 48 hours of testing.

4. ASTM D 4541-09, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion
Testers; Measured air barrier adhesion strength shall not be less than 16 lbf/sq. inch. Testing
performed at four (4) locations at the air barrier at locations deemed critical by the CT.

5. ASTM E 783, Standard test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed
Exterior Windows and Doors. Testing performed at one (1) location on the building. This test is
typically performed at a punched opening and surrounding air barrier.

6. Follow requirements of 2009 IBC section 909.3 for inspection and testing requirements for smoke
control systems.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

BUILDING ENCLOSURE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS `019117 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
3. Section 017419 “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” for procedures regarding waste
management, salvage and disposal.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to
be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and
deliver to Owner.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. Refer to drawings. See
below.

B. Note: All metals and steel sorted into Owner supplied dumpsters shall be the property of the Owner.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed
for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control.
Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Sequence of selective demolition and removal work.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ` 024119 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of
demolition.

D. Pre-demolition Photographs: Submit before Work begins. See Section 013233 – “Photographic
Documentation”.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with
selective demolition.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective
demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that applicable utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that
existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ` 024119 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or
design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a
written report to Architect.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."

2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of
conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000
"Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and

seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively
demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing or HVAC systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug
remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and walkways.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
people.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around demolition area.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction to the extent required and as indicated. Use
methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.

2. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly
dispose of off-site.
3. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and
to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ` 024119 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Existing Items to Remain: Refer to drawings.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated
to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in
an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and
Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged or Re-installed: Light poles, equipment per section 011000,
trees and other materials noted on drawings.

B. Existing Items to Remain: Refer to drawings.

END OF SECTION 024119

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ` 024119 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture
design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.
2. Foundation walls.
3. Slabs-on-grade.
4. Suspended slabs.
5. Concrete toppings.
6. Building frame members.
7. Building walls.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished
formed concrete.
2. Section 033600-“Special Concrete Floor Finishes” for hardening and sealing agent for concrete
floors.
3. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
4. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly
ash and other pozzolans, subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of
materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.
Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar
arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for
concrete reinforcement.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring
removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

2. Include “board-formed” formwork shop drawings. See drawings for layout.

3. Include tie layout for smooth-formed concrete. See drawings for layout.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

F. Samples: For vapor retarder and waterstops.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Fiber reinforcement.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing compounds.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Bonding agents.
10. Adhesives.
11. Vapor retarders.
12. Semirigid joint filler.
13. Joint-filler strips.
14. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with
requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete
due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

F. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified
Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that
complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production

Facilities."

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,
Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
3. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician
and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall
be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from
single manufacturer.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural
Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation
tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for
ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned
with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control,
concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures,
construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and
form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod
and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab
flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: New form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as
follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Board-formed Finished Concrete: Lumber may be attached to interior of forming system. See drawings
for pattern. Provide 1 x Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
4. Northern species; NLGA.

C. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

D. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or
fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork
surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without
detrimental deformation.

E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support
weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

G. Rustication Strips (if any): Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties
designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on
removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars,
ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in
each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.

D. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

E. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, Type 1 coated, as-drawn, plain-steel wire, with less
than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) wire length.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars,
ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic,
or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength
than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI
Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar
supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, L.A., gray. Supplement with the following:

Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, class S as required, coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'
satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and
cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed

cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with
steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI.
c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; ARRMATECT.
d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI.
e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.

D. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating,

anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and
minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+.

b. Cortec Corporation; MCI- 2000.
c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S.
d. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through
joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. BoMetals, Inc.
b. Greenstreak.
c. Paul Murphy Plastics Company.
d. Vinylex Corp.

2. Profile: As indicated.
3. Dimensions: 9 inches by 3/8 inch thick (225 mm by 10 mm thick) ; nontapered.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Sheet Vapor Retarders shall have a permeance of less
than 0.01 perms and testing in accordance with ASTM 1745, Section 7 and strength per ASTM E 1745,
Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil.

b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.
c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.

B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or
natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying
with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.
i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.
p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
r. Unitex; PRO-FILM.
s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately
9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE
WB 30C.
h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.
i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.
j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.
m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.
n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.
o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.
p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.
q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

F. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV.

b. ChemMasters; Spray-Cure & Seal Plus.
c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315.
d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV).
e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315.
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear; LusterSeal 300.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25.
h. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30.
k. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30.
l. Right Pointe; Right Sheen 30.
m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex AC 1315.

2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or

ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A
shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements,
and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.

E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent
tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in

thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in

thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor
elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs
based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement
in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.01 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required,

for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and
parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious
materials ratio below 0.50.
4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and
to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), Maximum.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) Maximum, or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump
of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (31 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 611 lb/cu. yd. (363(kg/cu. m)
3. Retain slump limit from two options in first subparagraph below or revise to suit Project.
4. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) Maximum.
5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.
6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
7. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate, but not less than 3 lb/cu. yd. (1.80 kg/cu. m).

D. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 564 lb/cu. yd. (334 kg/cu. m).
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) Maximum.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
6. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m).

E. Concrete Topping Slabs: Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 110 lb/cu. ft. (1762 kg/cu. m), plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. (48.1
kg/cu. m) as determined by ASTM C 567.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), Maximum.
4. Air Content: 7 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal maximum aggregate
size 3/8 inch (10 mm) or less.

F. Building Frame Members: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) Maximum, 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2
to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.

G. Building Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) Maximum, 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of
2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 10

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and
ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such
loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off
templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in
the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 11

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in
Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of
concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other
conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not
support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)
for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal
operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of
concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive
strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or
disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and
secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved
by Architect.

3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and
reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads
in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in
concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide
adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

D. Shoring or re-shoring shall remain in place until concrete has reached 28 day strength or 28 days,
whichever is longer.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 12

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and
manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Unroll vapor retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete
placement.
2. Lap vapor retarder over footings and/or seal to foundation walls.
3. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
4. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.
5. No penetration of the vapor retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.
6. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches
and taping all sides with tape.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing
concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce
bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing
reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

2. Do not tack-weld reinforcing.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating
according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel
reinforcement.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction

joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements
of floors and slabs.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and
at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as needed, 65 foot maximum spacing. Locate joints beside piers
integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 13

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete
thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of
joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will
not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction
cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm)
below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants,"
are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required,
lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt
coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous
diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during
progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete
will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose
plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete
and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture
constituents to segregate.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 14

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around

reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane,
before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before
starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range
required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's
option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and
defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-
surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly
and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins
and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, and to be covered
with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and
rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not
apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to
formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue
final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 15

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or
darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one
direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings or to receive mortar
setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float
passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied
or sheet waterproofing.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-
driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform
in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied
coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated, exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish
coating system.
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a
randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15. Provide at carpeted slabs.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs. Provide also at
slabs to receive thin floor coverings such as resilient flooring.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24. Provide at all exposed concrete
floors, and all food, meat and dairy preparation rooms.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated and where ceramic or
quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as
indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before
application.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless
otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 16

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by
steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly
rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches (150 mm) high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not
less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported
equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.
3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and
anchor into structural concrete substrate.
6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment
to supported equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in
inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull
floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and
other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing
forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including
floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following
materials:

a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and
edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300
mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately
repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor
coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 17

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a
curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor
covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless
manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used
on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous
operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later
and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until construction
traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint
clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints.
Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace
concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half
parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air
bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch
(13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids
with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill
form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area
at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify
surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain
for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 18

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs,
rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to
reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other
objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by
cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare,
mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to
produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to
ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions
to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts
and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen
concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching
concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate.
Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as
adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete.
Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching
mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests
and inspections and to submit reports for floor flatness.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.
5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall
be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture
exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional
50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 19

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each
concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when
concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M,
volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite
sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each
composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens
at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28
days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured

cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and
curing in-place concrete.
9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-
strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within
48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name
and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location
of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions
and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test
results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not
been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as
directed by Architect.
13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the
Contract Documents.

E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 48
hours of finishing.

END OF SECTION 033000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ` 033000 - 20

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place architectural concrete including form facings, reinforcement accessories,
concrete materials, concrete mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants in contraction and other joints in
cast-in-place architectural concrete.
2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and flatwork finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Formed concrete that is exposed to view on surfaces of completed
structure or building and that requires special concrete materials, formwork, placement, or finishes to
obtain specified architectural appearance.

B. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly
ash and other pozzolans, subject to compliance with requirements.

C. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by Architect in the Contract Documents that reflects
acceptable surface quality and appearance of cast-in-place architectural concrete.

D. Reveal: Projection of coarse aggregate from matrix or mortar after completion of exposure operations.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for
ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned
with cast-in-place architectural concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Cast-in-place architectural concrete subcontractor.

2. Review concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing
procedures, construction joints, forms and form-removal limitations, reinforcement accessory
installation, concrete repair procedures, and protection of cast-in-place architectural concrete.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of
materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Formwork Shop Drawings: Show formwork construction including form-facing joints, rustications,
construction and contraction joints, form joint-sealant details, form tie locations and patterns, inserts and
embedments, cutouts, cleanout panels, and other items that visually affect cast-in-place architectural
concrete.

D. Placement Schedule: Submit concrete placement schedule before start of placement operations. Include
locations of all joints including construction joints.

E. Samples: For each of the following materials:

1. Form-facing panel.
2. Form ties.
3. Form liners.
4. Coarse- and fine-aggregate gradations.
5. Chamfers and rustications.

F. Samples for Verification: Architectural concrete Samples, cast vertically, approximately 18 by 18 by 2

inches (450 by 450 by 50 mm), of finishes, colors, and textures to match design reference sample. Include
Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following:

1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Repair materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, by a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete
due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that
complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "NRMCA Quality Control Manual - Section 3,

Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Source Limitations for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Obtain each color, size, type, and variety of
concrete material and concrete mixture from single manufacturer with resources to provide cast-in-place
architectural concrete of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete, Sections 1 through 5 and Section 6, "Architectural
Concrete."
2. ACI 303.1, "Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete."

D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation
tests and to design concrete mixtures.

E. Mockups: Before casting architectural concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under Sample
submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of
workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
Provide one mockup for standard smooth surface and one for formed surface.
2. Build mockups of typical exterior wall of cast-in-place architectural concrete as shown on Drawings.
3. Demonstrate curing, cleaning, and protecting of cast-in-place architectural concrete, finishes, and
contraction joints, as applicable.
4. In presence of Architect, damage part of the exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and
texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of tie holes and surface
blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before casting architectural concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork and other form-facing
material requirements.

B. Form-Facing Panels for As-Cast Finishes: Steel, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or other approved
nonabsorptive panel materials that will provide continuous, true, and smooth architectural concrete
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or
fiber tubes that will provide surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork
surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without
detrimental deformation.

D. Board-formed Finished Concrete: Lumber may be attached to interior of forming system. See drawings
for pattern. Provide 1 x Construction or No. 2 grade lumber x random lengths and the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
4. Northern species; NLGA.

E. Rustication Strips (if any): Metal, rigid plastic, or dressed wood with sides beveled and back kerfed;
nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths.

F. Chamfer Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, elastomeric rubber, or dressed wood, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm),
minimum; nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths.

G. Form Joint Tape: Compressible foam tape; pressure sensitive; AAMA 800, "Specification 810.1,
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape"; minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

H. Form Joint Sealant: Elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M or Type S, Grade NS, that
adheres to form joint substrates.

I. Sealer: Penetrating, clear, polyurethane wood form sealer formulated to reduce absorption of bleed water
and prevent migration of set-retarding chemicals from wood.

J. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated, colorless form-release agent that will not bond with, stain,
or adversely affect architectural concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of those
surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

K. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, internally disconnecting or removable ties

designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on
removal.

1. Furnish ties with tapered tie cone spreaders that, when removed, will leave holes 1-1/4 inches (32
mm) in diameter on concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for steel reinforcement and other
requirements for reinforcement accessories.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire fabric in place; manufacture according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard
Practice."

1. Where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1, gray, plastic-protected or CRSI
Class 2, stainless-steel bar supports.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following:]

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 1S thru 5S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory
service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Gradation: Uniformly graded.

C. Normal-Weight Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33 or ASTM C 144, manufactured or natural sand, from same
source for entire Project.

D. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M except free of wash water from mixer washout
operations.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately
9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be approved by color pigment manufacturer.
2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer.

2.6 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements.

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing and Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly
mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of cast-in-place architectural concrete proportioned on
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed design mixtures
based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Proportion concrete mixtures as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 3 inches (75 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4
inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Cementitious Materials: For cast-in-place architectural concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by
weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. Use fly
ash, pozzolan, as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used,
by not more than 25 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.01 percent by weight of cement.

E. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Ready-Mixed Architectural Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.

1. Clean equipment used to mix and deliver cast-in-place architectural concrete to prevent
contamination from other concrete.
2. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, embedded items, and
shoring and reshoring.

B. Limit deflection of form-facing panels to not exceed ACI 303.1 requirements.

C. In addition to ACI 303.1 limits on form-facing panel deflection, limit cast-in-place architectural concrete
surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Fabricate forms to result in cast-in-place architectural concrete that complies with ACI 117, "Specifications
for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-in-place surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood rustications, keyways, reglets, recesses, and
the like, for easy removal.

1. Seal form joints and penetrations at form ties with form joint tape or form joint sealant to prevent
cement paste leakage.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

G. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of cast-in-place architectural concrete.

H. Coat contact surfaces of wood rustications and chamfer strips with sealer before placing reinforcement,
anchoring devices, and embedded items.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in
the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
before placing reinforcement.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with surface retarder, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
before placing reinforcement.

3.2 REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS

A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for fabricating and installing steel
reinforcement. Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against shifting during concrete
placement.

B. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of
concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after
placing concrete if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and
protection operations are maintained.

1. Schedule form removal to maintain surface appearance that matches approved mockups.
2. Cut off and grind glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties flush with surface of concrete.

B. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of
concrete in place until concrete has achieved 28-day design compressive strength. Remove forms only if
shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Do not use split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material. Apply new form-release agent.

D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and
secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for cast-in-place architectural concrete surfaces.

3.4 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Install construction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-
in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction

joints unless otherwise indicated.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. Align
construction joint within rustications attached to form-facing material.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and
at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near
corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

6. Use bonding agent or epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

B. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to
surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not
impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, form-release agent, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 303.1.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose
plasticity. Do not permit vibrators to contact forms.

D. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range
required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents.
4. Do not use chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

E. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's
option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to
formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.

1. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maintain uniformity of special finishes over construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3.7 AS-CAST FORMED FINISHES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and
defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding specified limits on formed-
surface irregularities.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly
and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Remove fins and other projections exceeding
specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. Repair and patch tie holes and defects.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-form-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and
rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not
apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Form-Liner Finish: Produce a textured surface free of pockets, streaks, and honeycombs, and of uniform
appearance, color, and texture.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during
curing.

B. Begin curing cast-in-place architectural concrete immediately after removing forms from concrete. Cure
according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods that will not mottle, discolor, or
stain concrete:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep exposed surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete continuously moist
for no fewer than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and
edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300
mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for no fewer than seven days. Immediately
repair any holes or tears during curing period; use cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Mist concrete surfaces with water. Apply curing compound uniformly in
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Comply with field quality-control requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.10 REPAIRS, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING

A. Repair and cure damaged finished surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete when approved by
Architect. Match repairs to color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding surfaces and to repairs on
approved mockups.

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Remove and replace cast-in-place architectural concrete that cannot be repaired and cured to
Architect's approval.

B. Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete from damage; use guards and
barricades.

C. Protect cast-in-place architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during remainder of
construction period.

D. Clean cast-in-place architectural concrete surfaces after finish treatment to remove stains, markings, dust,
and debris.

E. Wash and rinse surfaces according to concrete finish applicator's written instructions. Protect other Work
from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

1. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of cast-in-place
architectural concrete finishes.

END OF SECTION 033300

ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ` 033300 - 10

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 033600 – SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1. 2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following.

1. Applying Sealer and Hardener, and polishing concrete to specified finish level.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM-C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete

Surfaces

2. ASTM G23-81, Ultraviolet Light & Water Spray

3. ASTM C805, Impact Strength

B. American Concrete Institute

1. ACI 302. 1R-89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction

C. Other Test:

1. Reflectivity

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 016000- Product Requirements.

B . Product data:

1. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's specifications and test data.

2. Submit special concrete finishes describing product to be provided, giving manufacturer’s name
and product name for the specified material proposed to be provided under this section.

3. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's recommended installation procedures; which

when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation
procedures used on the work.

4. Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive data, curing time, and
application requirements.

SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES ` 033600 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

5. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and other
safety requirements.

6. Follow all special concrete finishes published manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Test Reports:

1. Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming

compliance with specified performance criteria.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary craft.

2. The special concrete finish manufacturer shall certify applicator.

3. Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper
performance of work of this section.

B. Manufacturer’s Certification:

1. Provide letter of certification from concrete finish manufacturer stating that installer is certified
applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with proper procedures and installation
requirements required by the manufacturer.

C. Mock-ups:

1. Apply mock-ups of each type finish, to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, color variation (if
any), and standard of workmanship.

a. Build mock-ups approximately 50 square feet in the location indicated or if not indicated,
as directed by the Architect or Owner Representative.

b. Notify Architect or Owner Representative seven days in advance of dates and times
when mock-ups will be constructed.

c. Obtain from the Architect or Owner Representative approval of mock-ups before starting
construction.

d. If the Architect or Owner Representative determines that mock-ups do not meet

requirements, demolish and remove them from the site and cast others until mock-ups are
approved.

e. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed work.

f. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of
substantial completion.

D. Protection

1. No satisfactory chemical or cleaning procedure is available to remove petroleum stains from the
concrete surface. Prevention is therefore essential.

a. All hydraulic powered equipment must be diapered to avoid staining of the concrete.

SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES ` 033600 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

b. No trade will park vehicles on the inside slab. If necessary to complete their scope of
work, drop cloths will be placed under vehicles at all times.

c. No pipe cutting machine will be used on the inside floor slab.

d. Steel will not be placed on interior slab to avoid rust staining.

e. Acids and acidic detergents will not come into contact with slab.

f. All trades informed that the slab must be protected at all times.

E. Pre-Installation Conference:

1. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “ Project
Management and Coordination”

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original containers, with seal’s unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand
name and directions for storage.

B. Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed containers. Maintain record
of container numbers.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental limitations:

1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content,
ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting topping performance.

a. Concrete Floor Flatness rating recommended at least 40, where possible.

b. Concrete Floor Levelness rating recommended at least 30, where possible.

c. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer

before application of Retro Plate can begin.

d. Application of Retro-Plate shall take place 10 days prior to installation of equipment and
substantial completion, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for
application.

B. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time period recommended in writing
by manufacturer.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. HARDENING/SEALING AGENT

1. Retro-Plate 99, manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc., P.O. Box 50533, Provo, Utah
84605, 801-812-3420. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard
colors.

a. Performance Criteria:

i. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779 – Up to 400% increase in abrasion

resistance.

ii. Impact Strength: ASTM C805 – Up to 21% increase impact strength.

SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES ` 033600 - 3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

iii. Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 – No adverse effect to ultra
violet and water spray.

iv. Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase in reflectivity.

2. Other manufacturers or products as preapproved in writing by Architect.

B. CERTIFIED APPLICATORS
1. Applicators shall be certified by Manufacturer.

2.2 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Neutralizing Agent:

1. Tri-sodium Phosphate

B. Water:

1. Potable

C. Acid for floor etching:

1. Per manufacturer’s written recommendation.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS:

A. Examine substrate, with installer present, for conditions affecting performance of finish. Correct conditions
detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Verify that base slab meet finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place
Concrete,” and Project Conditions above.

C. Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents.

D. Acid etch the concrete slab per manufacturer’s instructions for each color and area.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Start any of the floor finish applications in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative.

B. Sealing, Hardening and Polishing of Concrete Surface

1. Concrete must be in place a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer before

application can begin.

2. Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other in-store accessory
installation, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application

3. Only a certified applicator shall apply Retro-Plate 99. Applicable procedures must be followed as
recommended by the product manufacturer and as required to match approved test sample.

4. Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface without
changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the sheen.

5. Polish to required sheen level.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP AND CLEANING:

SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES ` 033600 - 4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

A. The premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times.

B. Remove spatter from adjoining surfaces, as necessary.

C. Repair damages to surface caused by cleaning operations.

D. Remove debris from jobsite

1. Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers in accordance with local regulations.

3.4 PROTECTION:

A. Protect finished work until fully cured in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SPECIFICATION SECTION 033600

SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES ` 033600 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Architectural precast concrete cladding units..

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing connection anchors in concrete.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for furnishing and installing connections attached to
structural-steel framing.
3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for kickers and other miscellaneous steel shapes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and texture,
preapproved by Architect.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption
tests.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.

2. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit.
3. Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface finish.
4. Indicate details at building corners.
5. Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses.
6. Indicate type, size, and length of welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and
cast-in hardware and connections.
7. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or attached to
structure or other construction.
8. Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is proposed.
9. Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special conditions.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

10. Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on
panel.
11. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials.
12. Indicate locations, dimensions, and details of thin-brick units, including corner units and special
shapes, and joint treatment.
13. Indicate locations, dimensions, and details of stone facings, anchors, and joint widths.
14. If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions,
submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability,
or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept.

D. Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for each type of finish indicated
on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of three, representative of finish, color,
and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).

1. When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating workmanship,
color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete.
2. Samples for each thin-brick unit required, showing full range of color and texture expected. Include
Sample showing color and texture of joint treatment.

a. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual sections of grout
showing manufacturer's full range of colors.
b. Grout Samples for Verification: Showing color and texture of joint treatment.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For architectural precast concrete indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Show governing panel types, connections, types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement,
and concrete cover on reinforcement. Indicate location, type, magnitude, and direction of loads
imposed on the building structural frame from architectural precast concrete.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For the following items:

1. Cementitious materials.
2. Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.
3. Admixtures.
4. Bearing pads.
5. Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.
6. Thin-brick units and accessories.
7. Stone anchors.
8. Insulation.

D. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

E. Preconstruction test reports.

F. Source quality-control test reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate of
Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load-bearing members.

B. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector who has retained a "PCI-Certified Field Auditor" to
conduct a field audit of a project in same category as this Project and who can produce an Erectors' Post-
Audit Declaration.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete
units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings
and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load
Bearing Units at time of bidding or designated as an APA-certified plant for production of
architectural precast concrete products.
2. Fabricator is located within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

E. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control

recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117,
"Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

G. Sample Units: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a
minimum of two sample units for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features,
finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels.

1. Locate panels where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and demonstrate
adequacy of repair techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes.
3. After acceptance of repair technique, maintain one sample panel at manufacturer's plant and one at
Project site in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.
4. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.

H. Range Samples: After sample unit approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units,
produce a minimum of three sets of samples, representing anticipated range of each color and texture on
Project's units. Maintain one set of range samples at Project site and remaining range sample sets at
manufacturer's plant as color and texture approval reference.

I. Mockups: After sample unit and range sample approval but before production of architectural precast
concrete units, construct full-sized mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup as indicated on Drawings including aluminum framing, glass, sealants, and
architectural precast concrete complete with anchors, connections, flashings, and joint fillers.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed
Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion.

J. Preconstruction Testing Mockup: Provide a full-size mockup of architectural precast concrete indicated on
Drawings for preconstruction testing. Revise or delete subparagraphs below to suit Project. Coordinate
with other Sections that include

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Build preconstruction testing mockup as indicated on Drawings including aluminum framing, glass,
sealants, and architectural precast concrete complete with anchors, connections, flashings, and
joint fillers.
2. Build preconstruction testing mockup at testing agency facility.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Stone Anchor Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction
testing according to ASTM C 1354/C 1354M or ASTM E 488, modified as follows:

1. Furnish test specimens, including stone anchors, that are representative of materials proposed for
incorporation into the Work.
2. Anchorage Tests: Test 12 inches (300 mm) square samples for finish, and anchor type proposed
for use on Project. Test for shear and tensile strength of anchorage system.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other
construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions, as required, for installation.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit unloading units
temporarily on the ground or other rehandling.

B. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.

C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent
staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.

D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.

E. Handle and transport units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses that cause cracking or damage.

F. Lift and support units only at designated points indicated on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. As approved by Architect..

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements," to design architectural precast concrete units.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI
Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast
concrete units indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of
withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Loads: As indicated.
2. Dead Loads: As indicated.
3. Live Loads: As indicaqted.
4. Wind Loads: As Indicated.
5. Seismic Loads: As indicated.
6. Design precast concrete units and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for
fabrication and construction tolerances, to accommodate live-load deflection, shrinkage and creep
of primary building structure, and other building movements as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement as indicated.

7. Thermal Movements: Provide for in-plane thermal movements resulting from annual ambient
temperature changes of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

2.3 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that provides
continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive with
concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.

1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced form-release agent that does not bond with, stain or
adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent surface or joint
treatments of precast concrete.

B. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration to match those used for precast
concrete design reference sample. Use with manufacturer's recommended form-release agent that does
not bond with, stain, or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent surface
or joint treatments of precast concrete.

C. Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of newly placed
concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.

2.4 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than 60 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

D. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars, with
ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coating and chromate treatment.

E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into
flat sheets.

F. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

G. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for
spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to
PCI MNL 117.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Precast architectural concrete shall be manufactured from aggregates and cement that
have been extracted or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use gray or white cement, of same type, brand,
and mill source.

C. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N.

2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

D. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33/C 33M, with coarse
aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish
from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with
cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: To match design reference sample.

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand compatible with coarse

aggregate; to match approved finish sample.

E. Lightweight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 330/C 330M, with absorption less
than 11 percent.

F. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-
reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.

G. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete
and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.

H. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required
admixtures.

I. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain
calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.

1. Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
7. Plasticizing Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type I.
8. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
9. Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture: ASTM C 1582/C 1582M.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.6 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C.

D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 or Grade 35028.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B or Grade C.

H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450).

I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496/A 496M or ASTM A 706/A 706M.

J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A or ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 (ASTM F 568M,
Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563
(ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.

K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts;
heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon-steel washers,
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M).

L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-
dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

1. For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less than 0.03
percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon and 2.5 times phosphorous
content to 0.09 percent.
2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94
percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-Paint 20.

M. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 304, Type 316, or Type 201.

B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M, Grade A1 or A4) hex-
head bolts and studs; ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4) stainless-steel
nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers.

1. Lubricate threaded parts of stainless-steel bolts with an antiseize thread lubricant during assembly.

C. Stainless-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 276, Alloy 304 or Alloy 316, with minimum mechanical properties
of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.8 BEARING PADS

A. Provide one of the following bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as recommended by
precast fabricator for application:

1. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene)
elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer hardness of 50 to 70,
ASTM D 2240, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa), ASTM D 412.
2. Random-Oriented-Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented synthetic
fibers set in elastomer. Type A durometer hardness of 70 to 90, ASTM D 2240; capable of
supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) with no cracking, splitting, or delaminating
in the internal portions of pad. Test one specimen for every 200 pads used in Project.
3. Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered cotton-duck
fabric bonded to an elastomer; Type A durometer hardness of 80 to 100, ASTM D 2240; complying
with AASHTO's "AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications," Division II, Section 18.10.2; or with
MIL-C-882E.
4. Frictionless Pads: PTFE, glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless or mild-steel plate, or random-
oriented-fiber-reinforced elastomeric pads; of type required for in-service stress.
5. High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Reglets: Specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

B. Reglets: PVC extrusions, Stainless steel, Type 302 or Type 304, felt or fiber filled, or with face opening of
slots covered.

C. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, high-density plastic or steel shims, and other accessories
required to install architectural precast concrete units.

2.10 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by volume, with
minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06
percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected
silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents,
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and
of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content
less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

1. Use a single design mixture for units with more than one major face or edge exposed.
2. Where only one face of unit is exposed use either a single design mixture or separate mixtures for
face and backup.

B. Limit use of ground granulated blast-furnace slag to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit
metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

C. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant
personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318
(ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

E. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at
fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with
materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

F. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to ASTM C 642, except
for boiling requirement.

G. Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data
methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on Project, to provide lightweight concrete with
the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa).

2. Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu. m), plus or minus 3
lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m), according to ASTM C 567.

H. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement
having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.

I. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's
written instructions.

2.12 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to
concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning
operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid
contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.

1. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and
supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form liner with form-release
agent.

B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions
indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.

1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
2. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.

2.13 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware
with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for
attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage
hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M
and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps,
hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and
adjacent construction.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on
the Contract Drawings.

D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or
prestressing strand without Architect's approval.

E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy
the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds limits specified in
ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy
coat bar ends after cutting.
2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete-
placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure
on finished surfaces.
3. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strands to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum
concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) when
units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and
securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct
wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
4. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining widths to
prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses and
specified in-place loads.

G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

H. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch (25 mm) or 1.5 times
the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.

I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from forming in
precast concrete units.

1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.

J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging
reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air voids on
surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.

1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for
the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."
Ensure adequate bond between face and backup concrete, if used.

K. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

L. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent
markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date
on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that does not show in finished structure.

M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by
accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until
compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or
appearance of final product.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 10

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

N. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including
structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117
and Architect's approval.

2.14 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each finished
unit complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.

B. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each finished
unit complies with the following product tolerances:

1. Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Exposed to View: As follows:

a. 10 feet (3 m) or under, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

b. 10 to 20 feet (3 to 6 m), plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), minus 3/16 inch (5 mm).
c. 20 to 40 feet (6 to 12 m), plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
d. Each additional 10 feet (3 m), plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

2. Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Not Exposed to View: As follows:

a. 10 feet (3 m) or under, plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

b. 10 to 20 feet (3 to 6 m), plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 3/8 inch (10 mm).
c. 20 to 40 feet (6 to 12 m), plus or minus 3/8 inch (10 mm).
d. Each additional 10 feet (3 m), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. Total Thickness or Flange Thickness: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
4. Rib Thickness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
5. Rib to Edge of Flange: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
6. Distance between Ribs: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
7. Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of the Two Diagonal
Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch/72 inches (3 mm/1830 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) total,
whichever is greater.
8. Length and Width of Block-outs and Openings within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
9. Location and Dimension of Block-outs Hidden from View and Used for HVAC and Utility
Penetrations: Plus or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).
10. Dimensions of Haunches: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
11. Haunch Bearing Surface Deviation from Specified Plane: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
12. Difference in Relative Position of Adjacent Haunch Bearing Surfaces from Specified Relative
Position: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
13. Bowing: Plus or minus L/360, maximum 1 inch (25 mm).
14. Local Smoothness: 1/4 inch/10 feet (6 mm/3 m).
15. Warping: 1/16 inch/12 inches (1.5 mm/300 mm) of distance from nearest adjacent corner.
16. Tipping and Flushness of Plates: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
17. Dimensions of Architectural Features and Rustications: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

C. Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on Shop Drawings.

1. Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
3. Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches (75 mm).
4. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) where position
has structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Reinforcing Steel Extending out of Member: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of plan dimensions.
6. Tendons: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm), vertical; plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm), horizontal.
7. Location of Rustication Joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
8. Location of Opening within Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
9. Location of Flashing Reglets: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
10. Location of Flashing Reglets at Edge of Panel: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 11

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

11. Reglets for Glazing Gaskets: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
12. Electrical Outlets, Hose Bibs: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
13. Location of Bearing Surface from End of Member: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
14. Allowable Rotation of Plate, Channel Inserts, and Electrical Boxes: 2-degree rotation or 1/4 inch (6
mm) maximum over the full dimension of unit.
15. Position of Sleeve: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
16. Location of Window Washer Track or Buttons: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2.15 FINISHES

A. Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints
shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units
to match approved sample panels or mockups and as follows:

1. As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces to match approved sample for acceptable surface, air
voids, sand streaks, and honeycomb.

B. Finish exposed top surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.

C. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units with as cast finish.

2.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If
using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, ASTM C 1610/C 1610M,
ASTM C 1611/C 1611M, ASTM C 1621/C 1621M, and ASTM C 1712.

B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete fabricator's
quality-control and testing methods.

1. Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment,
concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing agency and provide
samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for additional testing and
evaluation.

C. Strength of precast concrete units is considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M)
requirements for concrete strength.

D. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not comply
with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, precaster will employ an independent testing agency to obtain,
prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to
ASTM C 42/C 42M and ACI 318 (ACI 318M).

1. A minimum of three representative cores shall be taken from units of suspect strength, from
locations directed by Architect.
2. Test cores in an air-dry condition.
3. Strength of concrete for each series of three cores is considered satisfactory if average
compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive strength and no
single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
4. Report test results in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to Architect,
Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports include the following:

a. Project identification name and number.

b. Date when tests were performed.
c. Name of precast concrete fabricator.
d. Name of concrete testing agency.
e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core tests;
design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks, corrected for

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 12

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of
concrete as placed.

E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with requirements, clean
and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that has no coarse aggregate, and
finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.

F. Defective Units: Discard and replace recast architectural concrete units that do not comply with
acceptability requirements in PCI MNL 117, including concrete strength, manufacturing tolerances, and
color and texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's
approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not match approved samples, sample
panels, and mockups. Replace unacceptable units with precast concrete units that comply with
requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, bearing surface tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place concrete has attained minimum
allowable design compressive strength and supporting steel or other structure is structurally ready to
receive loads from precast concrete units.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast
concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances.
Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units
until permanent connections are completed.

1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims as precast concrete units are being erected. Tack
weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.
2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.
3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with
surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch (19 mm).

C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise
indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after
connecting and grouting are completed.

1. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.

D. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M for welding,
welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or
cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.
2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet as
specified by AWS.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 13

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply a
minimum 4.0-mil- (0.1-mm-) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according
to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
4. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and reprime
damaged painted surfaces.
5. Visually inspect welds and remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.

E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of
nuts after final adjustment.

1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections,
properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot.
2. For slip-critical connections, use one of the following methods to assure proper bolt pretension:

a. Turn-of-Nut: According to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or
A 490 Bolts."
b. Calibrated Wrench: According to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
c. Twist-off Tension Control Bolt: ASTM F 1852.
d. Direct-Tension Control Bolt: ASTM F 1852.

3. For slip-critical connections, use method and inspection procedure approved by Architect and
coordinated with inspection agency.

F. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain
flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff dry-pack
grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout and finish smooth, level, and plumb
with adjacent concrete surfaces. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects
finishes or hardens. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding the
noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment, without exceeding the
following noncumulative erection tolerances:

1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Plan Location from Centerline of Steel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
3. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:

a. Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

b. Non-Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
c. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
d. Non-Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

4. Support Elevation from Nominal Support Elevation: As follows:

a. Maximum Low: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

b. Maximum High: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

5. Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 100 Feet (30 m): 1 inch (25
mm).
6. Plumb in Any 10 Feet (3 m) of Element Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
7. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
8. Joint Width (Governs over Joint Taper): Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
9. Maximum Joint Taper: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
10. Joint Taper in 10 Feet (3 m): 1/4 inch (6 mm).

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 14

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

11. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

12. Differential Bowing or Camber, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design: 1/4 inch
(6 mm).
13. Opening Height between Spandrels: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.

B. Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E 165 or to ASTM E 709 and ASTM E 1444. High-
strength bolted connections are subject to inspections.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.5 REPAIRS

A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. Architect reserves the right to reject
repaired units that do not comply with requirements.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of
adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work,
when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet (6 m).

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to
ASTM A 780/A 780M.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with
requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.

B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and
adjacent materials immediately.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to
remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's

recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete
finishes or damage adjacent materials.

END OF SECTION 034500

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 15

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Mortar and grout.
3. Steel reinforcing bars.
4. Masonry joint reinforcement.
5. Ties and anchors.
6. Embedded flashing.
7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
8. Masonry-cell insulation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for masonry anchors.
2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry
anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.
3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for furnishing
manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.
1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to
ASTM C 1314.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with
ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers,
manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other
information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source
of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval
of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the
attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with
requirements.
b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing
average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according
to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and
ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.

E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to
be used to comply with requirements.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a
uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single
manufacturer for each product required.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for
exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or
producer for each aggregate.

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents.

D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for
mockups.

1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 60 inches (1500
mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness.
2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.
3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of
mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of
workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in
writing.

a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by
Architect in writing.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location,
cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install
until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination
avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos.
Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof
sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in
progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely
in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure
cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in
place.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days
after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or
painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on
ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral
finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing
mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing
conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4
deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after
completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain
chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such
defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance
ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or
by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of
adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and
other special conditions.
2. Provide bull-nosed units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units and where
indicated.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce
flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to
ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent
manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or
leaks on the back of test specimen.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc.

2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus.
3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of
2800 psi (19.3 MPa).
2. Density Classification: Lightweight unless otherwise indicated.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample.
5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster,
provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.

6. Colors: Where indicated on drawings, provide integrally colored CMUs. Color as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with
reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and
installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. Use open ended CMU for all built-in-place
masonry lintels.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be extracted, harvested, or
recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.
Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other
ingredients.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed
stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required
mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for
structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if
not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.

b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.

I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs
containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar.

b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.
c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture.

J. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

2. Exterior Walls: Stainless steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm).
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm).
5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side
rods.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with
the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interior, Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
2. Exterior, Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
4. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
5. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
6. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM a 666, Type 304.

B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel, interior and stainless-steel, exterior wire.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face,
made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel, interior and stainless-steel,
exterior wire.

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie
section; formed from 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication, 0.109-
inch- (2.78-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet].

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face,
made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) stainless-steel wire.

D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal
rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod
to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars [1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24
inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated
bent to configuration indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.

B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from
0.034-inch (0.86-mm), galvanized steel sheet.

C. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip
galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding
12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 3-inch
(76-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail) or Cheney 3-Way Flashing

(Sawtooth).
2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing.
3) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mechanically Keyed Flashing.

4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive
counterflashing.
5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

6. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending
metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to
form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
7. Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of
same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall with hemmed inner
edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so
that completed seam will shed water.
8. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and 1/2
inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
9. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and
out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm)
and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
10. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive

rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to
produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal.

2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru-Wall Flashing.
4) Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500.
5) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall
Flashing.
6) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing.
7) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash.
8) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing.
9) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 400.
10) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Sando-Seal.
11) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.

b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming
materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing.
3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing
with a drip edge, with a sealant stop or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge or flexible flashing
with a metal sealant stop].
4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.

D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim."

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.
3. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and
use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to
substrates.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to
35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with

ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and
designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration
as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15
asphalt felt).

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells
and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) steel wire, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout
stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or
damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer
and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-
repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. For all masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,
regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure
quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to
Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types
of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required
compressive strength of masonry.

1. For all masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M; All other shall be Type S.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply
with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day
compressive strength indicated, but not less than 3000 psi (14 MPa).
3. Provide grout with a slump of 10 to 11 inches (254 to 279 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.

E. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written
instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations
of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown.
Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment,
complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit
adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow
units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where
possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or
minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 10

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch
(12 mm).
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4
inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level
by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12
mm) maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3
m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20
feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8
inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16
inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of
units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm),
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8
inch (3 mm).
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm)
or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3
mm).
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more
than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and
for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-
size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do
not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course
below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove
loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly
with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire
mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 11

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items unless otherwise indicated.

H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure
above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs
solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm)
clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c.
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal.
Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to
comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings
where cells are not grouted.

B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness
unless otherwise indicated.

1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch (19 mm) or more in width.

C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint)
unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm)
on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150
mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets,
column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 12

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete
to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel
or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 16 inches
(406 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not
allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition
movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill
resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head
joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete
for application of sealant.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler
of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not
less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm)
for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other
supporting lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 6 inches (150 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FLASHING

A. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar
and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

B. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells
and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that
they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 13

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into
masonry.

3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated.
Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms
to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to
carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction, 28 days
minimum or until specified strength is achieved.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to
resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement,
including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and
inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 or Level 2 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes,
and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive
strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for
mortar air content and compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days.

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 14

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that
do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to
eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with
mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform
appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of
masonry.
3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of
stain on exposed surfaces.

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property.
At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

END OF SECTION 042000

UNIT MASONRY ` 042000 - 15

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 042113 - BRICK MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Face brick.
2. Mortar and grout.
3. Ties and anchors.
4. Embedded flashing.
5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 034500 “Precast Architectural Concrete” for installing precast concrete with brick veneer.
2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry
anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.
3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for brick masonry.
4. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and for
furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of four or more bricks.

2. Colored mortar.
3. Weep holes/vents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of four or more bricks.

2. Special brick shapes.
3. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients
to be used on Project.
4. Vents.
5. Accessories embedded in masonry.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers,
manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other
information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source
of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval
of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the
attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to
be used to comply with requirements in accordance with TMS 602 Art. 1.8C and 1.8D

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a
uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single
manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for
exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or
producer for each aggregate.

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup as indicated on drawings.

2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing surface.
3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.
4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and
sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically
approved by Architect in writing.
b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by
Architect in writing.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location,
cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install
until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination
avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos.
Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof
sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in
progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely
in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or
painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on
ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral
finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing
mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do
not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing
conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4
deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after
completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain
chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such
defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.2 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of
exposed faces of adjacent units.

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick
surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special
conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.
3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed
surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed
surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. “Emperor” face brick as manufactured by Interstate Brick, West Jordan, Utah.

2. Grade: SW.
3. Type: FBX.
4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per
ASTM C 67.
5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not
effloresced."
6. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-9/16 inches wide by 3-9/16 inches high by 15-9/16 inches long.
7. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated.
8. Where shown to "match existing," provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of
existing adjacent brickwork.
9. Texture: Match Architect's samples.
10. Color: Golden Buff.

2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.
Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other
ingredients.

D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar
mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in
masonry mortar.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.

b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
c. Solomon Colors, Inc; SGS Mortar Colors.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed
stone.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required
mortar color.

F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.

b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Morset.
c. Sonneborn Products; Trimix-NCA.

G. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete
masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar.

b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.
c. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.187-
inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel continuous wire and as per structural general
notes.

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with
the following unless otherwise indicated on structural general notes:

1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2
coating.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer
but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and
extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face,
made from 0.25-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.[ Mill-galvanized wire may
be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.]

D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs per structural
general notes, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in

both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch
(1.3 mm).

2. Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector
section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213S.

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; DW-10-X-Seismiclip.
3) Wire-Bond; RJ-711 with Wire-Bond clip.
b. Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 6 inches (152
mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom; top and bottom ends bent to form pronged legs
to bridge insulation or sheathing and contact studs; and raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch
(16 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) long, stamped into center to provide a slot between
strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard, self-adhering,
modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and extend beyond
pronged legs.
c. Connector Section: Triangular wire tie and rigid PVC extrusion with snap-in grooves for
inserting continuous wire. Size wire tie to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at
least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.
d. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 1.05-inch- (2.66-
mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
e. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.25-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter hot-dip galvanized,
carbon]-steel wire.

3. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex
washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 (4.83-mm) diameter by length required to
penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads, and with organic polymer
coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) ITW Buildex; Illinois Tool Works, Inc; Teks Maxiseal with Climaseal finish.
2) Leland Industries Inc; Master Drillers with DT2000 Longlife Coating and Master Seal
Bonded Washer.
3) Textron Inc; Elco Dril-Flex with Stalgard finish.

4. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill
point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with
hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 (4.83-mm) diameter by length required to
penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener.

2) ITW Buildex; Illinois Tool Works, Inc; Scots long life Teks.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive

rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to
produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.

2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru-Wall Flashing.
3) Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Perm-A-Barrier Wall
Flashing.
4) Heckmann Building Products, Inc; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing..
5) Meadows, W.R.,Inc; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing.
6) Polyguard Products, Inc; Polyguard 400.

b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming
materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyester-

reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Du Pont; Thru-Wall Flashing.

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Flex-Flash.
3) Hyload, Inc; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.
4) Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Total Flash.

b. Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
c. Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) thick, with a
0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of adhesive.
d. Self-Adhesive Sheet with Drip Edge: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch (0.64
mm) thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of rubberized-asphalt adhesive.
Where flashing extends to face of masonry, rubberized-asphalt coating is held back
approximately 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from edge.

1) Color: Gray.

e. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming
materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

3. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer,

complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.

2) Firestone Specialty Products; FlashGuard.
3) Heckmann Building Products, Inc; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing..
4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Epra-Max EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.
5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc; EPDM Flashing.

B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing
with a sealant stop or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge or elastomeric thermoplastic flashing
with drip edge or flexible flashing with a metal sealant stop.
4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim."

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and
use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to
substrates.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to
35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15
asphalt felt).

C. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89
mm) long.
2. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene
copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer
wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc; Mortar Maze weep vent.

2) BLOK-LOK Limited; Cell-Vent.
3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.
4) Heckmann Building Products, Inc; No. 85 Cell Vent..
5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Quadro-Vent.
6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

3. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of
head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from
manufacturer's standard.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Mortar Net Weep Vents.

4. Vinyl Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, offset, T-shaped units made from flexible PVC, designed to fit
into a head joint and consisting of a louvered vertical leg, flexible wings to seal against ends of
masonry units, and a top flap to keep mortar out of the head joint; in color selected by Architect.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; #343 Louvered Weep Hole.

2) Williams Products, Inc; Williams-Goodco Brick Vent.
3) Wire-Bond; Louvered Weepholes.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the
wall cavity.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc; [Mortar Break] [Mortar Break II].

b. CavClear/Archovations, Inc; Stone Mat.
c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.
d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Mortar Net.

2. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped notches 7
inches (175 mm) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.
b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dimpled
surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with
mortar.
c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.
d. Sheets or strips not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick and installed to full height of cavity with
additional strips 4 inches (100 mm) high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth
of cavity and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.

2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout
stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or
damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer
and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. Do not use muriatic acid.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. PROSOCO, Inc.

2.9 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-
repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.

2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,
regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure
quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to
Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless
another type is indicated.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do
not add pigments to colored cement products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

2. Mix to match Architect's sample.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Face brick.
b. Face brick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment,
complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit
adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow
units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where
possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq.
cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at
time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or
minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch
(12 mm).
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4
inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level
by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12
mm) maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3
m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 10

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20
feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8
inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16
inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of
units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm),
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm); do not vary from bed-joint thickness of
adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3
mm).
3. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more
than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and
for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-
size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond or
bond pattern indicated on Drawings if shown; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm)
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below;
do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose
masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly
with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness
unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete
to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel
or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches
(915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 11

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with seismic masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements:

1. Fasten seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated.
Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
2. Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less
than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 16 inches
(610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area.
Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8
inches (203 mm), around perimeter.

3.8 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials
to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches (100 mm) in direction
of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.
2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.
3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.
4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm)
for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler
of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not
less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges,
and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar
and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up
face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or
building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm).

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 12

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2
inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant
complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
5. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed
edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2
inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.
7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal
flashing termination.
8. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into
masonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip
of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
4. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.

E. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above top of
flashing, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), to maintain drainage.

F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage
material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

G. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to
form vents.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall
flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare
reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and
inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

C. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that
do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to
eliminate evidence of replacement.

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 13

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with
mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform
appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of
masonry.
3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property.
At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described
above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 042113

BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 14

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel.
2. Field-installed shear connectors.
3. Grout.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck.
2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not
defined as structural steel.
3. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface-preparation
and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303,
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid

lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections.

C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows:

1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
2. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches (50 mm).

D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone" on
Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited.

E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the
strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical"
or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and
coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible
with one another.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without

delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for
installation.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Energy and Environmental Submittals:

1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by
weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for
each product having recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment Drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show
size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental
fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify
pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
5. Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System.
6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.
7. Identify demand critical welds.
8. Provide two sets of hardcopy (prints) submittals on full size sheets in addition to electronic media
submittal.

D. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide
according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether
prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).

2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads,
include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, shop-painting applicators, professional engineer, and testing
agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that
shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Direct-tension indicators.
3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
4. Shear stud connectors.
5. Shop primers.
6. Nonshrink grout.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program
and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection
Program for Structural Steel (AC 172).

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and
is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass
the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and
FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
3. AISC 360.
4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground
and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to
members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852
fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents and
comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C. Construction: Moment Frame System

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50 (345).

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M .

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: See plans.

2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.

G. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.

H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-
washer type with plain finish.

B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts;
and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.

2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-
washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating or baked epoxy-coated finish.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head

assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and
hardened carbon-steel washers.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating.

D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon
steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Hooked.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
5. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
3. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

H. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.

I. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.

J. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

K. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide vertical transfer
of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane of expansion joint while resisting
movement within plane of expansion joint.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Amscot Structural Products Corp.

b. Fluorocarbon Company Limited.
c. R.J. Watson Bridge & Structural Engineered Systems.
d. Seismic Energy Products, L.P.

2. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and PTFE, PTFE and mirror-finished stainless steel.
3. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.06.
4. Design Load: Not less than 2,000 psi (13.7 MPa).
5. Total Movement Capability: 3 inches (75 mm).

2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with
MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application
and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to
AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until
structural steel has been erected.
4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming
operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal
surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1,
"Solvent Cleaning." and SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and
manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing
to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true
members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind
smooth.

H. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed
joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops
to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c.
unless otherwise indicated.

I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass
through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge
holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel
surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or Slip critical, see drawings.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a

depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or
flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written
instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038
mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change
color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00,
"Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

2.9 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes,
by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or
produced to perform tests and inspections.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the
following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks
or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements
in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or
welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if
weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing
plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to
design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are
in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place
concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and
AISC 360.

B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-
reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with
grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish
exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with
members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature
when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections
within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged
to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and
manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or Slip critical, see plans.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections,
and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, provide a 5/16” fillet weld and grind steel smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for
mill material.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.

2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.
3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the
following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

B. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements
in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests on shear connections.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if
weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing
and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up
shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings."

END OF SECTION 051200

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ` 051200 - 10

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. K-series steel joists.

2. KCS-type K-series steel joists.
3. LH- and DLH-series long-span steel joists.
4. Joist accessories.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete.

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry.
3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for field-welded shear connectors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for
Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform,
unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications."

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.

B. Energy and Environmental Submittals:

1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by
weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for
each product having recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.

2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and
connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.

STEEL JOIST FRAMING ` 052100 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Manufacturer certificates.

D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.

E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for its preparation.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with

applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing

special joists to comply with performance requirements.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." Protect joists from corrosion,
deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast-in-place concrete and masonry construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads
indicated.

1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than the
following:

a. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span, total load.

b. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span, total load.

2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists,
K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and
parallel top chord.

STEEL JOIST FRAMING ` 052100 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.

B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-
Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions where
indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated,
complying with SJI's "Specifications."

F. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications."

G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope
exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48).

2.3 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and
Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord
members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.

1. Joist Type: LH-series steel joists.

2. End Arrangement: underslung or Square, as indicated.
3. Top-Chord Arrangement: Parallel typically, see plan for curved top chord.

B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

C. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications."

D. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope
exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48).

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance
requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.

2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size,
and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish
additional erection bridging if required for stability. Provide bridging at first panel point on bottom of joists.

B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes and
thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint.

C. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications."

D. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough
strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished wall surface
unless otherwise indicated.

STEEL JOIST FRAMING ` 052100 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

E. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6),
carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel
washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

F. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M)
hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

H. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to
complete joist assembly.

2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories by power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry
paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick.

C. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction
according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this
Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are
stabilized during construction.
4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads are
applied.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and
procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

STEEL JOIST FRAMING ` 052100 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts.

E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research
Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490
Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor
ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field
welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection
reports.

B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following
procedures, as applicable:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.
c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.

C. Visually inspect bolted connections.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with
specified requirements.

E. Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust
spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and
accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning
according to SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that
ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 052100

STEEL JOIST FRAMING ` 052100 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Roof deck.
2. Composite floor deck.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill
over steel deck.
2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.
3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes.
4. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.
5. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Energy and Environmental Submittals:

1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by
weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for
each product having recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck
openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.

STEEL DECKING ` 053100 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding
Code - Sheet Steel."

C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide,
Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering
and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's
"North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.

2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.
3. CMC Joist & Deck.
4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.
5. Cordeck.
6. DACS, Inc.
7. Epic Metals Corporation.
8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.
9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.
11. Roof Deck, Inc.
12. Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries, Inc.
13. Verco Manufacturing Co.
14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and
Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180).
2. Deck Profile: As indicated.
3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
6. Side Laps: Interlocking seam.

STEEL DECKING ` 053100 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.

2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.
3. CMC Joist & Deck.
4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.
5. Cordeck.
6. DACS, Inc.
7. Epic Metals Corporation.
8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.
9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.
11. Roof Deck, Inc.
12. Verco Manufacturing Co.
13. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking
side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI
Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180)
zinc coating.
2. Profile Depth: 2 inches (51 mm).
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0474 inch (1.20 mm).
4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements
indicated.

B. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

C. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230
MPa), not less than 0.0474-inch (1.20-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as
deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same
material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for
overhang and slab depth.

E. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and
thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

F. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, with factory-
punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter, if required.

G. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as
deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94
percent zinc dust by weight.

STEEL DECKING ` 053100 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.5 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.6 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI
Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and
bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap
interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or
adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of
deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

2.7 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter
indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and
as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit
at each support. Space welds as indicated.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location, if required.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (305 mm)], see plans:

1. Mechanically clinch with Verco punch loc or equal.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38
mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld or mechanically
fasten flanges to top of deck. Space welds or mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches (305 mm)
apart with at least one weld or fastener at each corner.

STEEL DECKING ` 053100 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically
fasten.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and
reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to
substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install
with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.

2.8 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter
indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of
12 inches (305 mm) apart, but not more than 18 inches (457 mm) apart.
3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.
4. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location, if required.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (305 mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically clinch with Verco punch lok or equal.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38
mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure
according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according
to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.

2.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected

work with specified requirements.

2.10 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with
galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

STEEL DECKING ` 053100 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of
both deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 053100

STEEL DECKING ` 053100 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Delegated Design Responsiblities

2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
3. Ceiling joist framing.
4. Soffit framing.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
2. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-
stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.
3. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing
and ceiling-suspension assemblies.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication;
and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

a. All cold-formed metal framing for the exterior walls and others as indicated to comply with
design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional structural engineer licensed in Utah responsible for their preparation.

b. Stamped Drawings and calculation submittal(s) shall include a written descriptive narrative
of how the system functions to accommodate story drift and other building movements.

c. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,

bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and engineering qualifications submitted with bid proposals and
shop drawings.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified testing agency.

1. Steel sheet.

2. Expansion anchors.

3. Power-actuated anchors.

4. Mechanical fasteners.

5. Vertical deflection clips.

6. Horizontal drift deflection clips

7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet
complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total
elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

D. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two
Family Dwellings."

E. Designer Qualifications: Design and detail cold formed light gage framing systems under direct supervision
of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in the State
of Idaho. Engineer retained to design shall have a minimum of 10 years of appropriate framing design and
detailing experience equivalent or similar to the system proposed for this facility.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during
delivery, storage, and handling.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.

2. California Expanded Metal Products Company.
3. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc.
4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.
5. Craco Mfg., Inc.
6. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
7. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company.
8. State Building Products, Inc.
9. Steel Construction Systems.
10. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
11. Steel Structural Systems.
12. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
13. United Metal Products, Inc.
14. United Steel Manufacturing.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within
limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated.

2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater
than the following:
a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height.
b. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for
total loads of the span.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated
building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue
strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient
temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances,
and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of L/360 for floors, L/300 for roofs.

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard
for contribution of sheathing materials.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:

1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.

2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.
3. Headers: AISI S212.
4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with
AISI S100 and AISI S200.

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another
qualified testing agency.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating
weight as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.

2. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent.

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection or Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of
grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.

2. Coating: G90 (Z275).

2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with
stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.054 inch (1.73 mm), see plans.

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8” inches (50 mm).
3. Section Properties: As required, see plans.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with
unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.

2. Flange Width: 1-1/2 inches (41 mm)Minimum.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating
upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment
to stud web.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.

b. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc.
c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
d. MarinoWARE.
e. SCAFCO Corporation.
f. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
g. Steeler, Inc.

D. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested
inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to
support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) or stud thickness, whichever is
greater.
b. Flange Width: [1-1/2 inch (37 mm) plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1-1/2
inch (37 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) or stud thickness, whichever is
greater.
b. Flange Width: The sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1-1/2 inch (37 mm).

E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and
downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical
attachment to stud web and structure.

2.5 CEILING JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, punched
with standard holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0346 inch (1.37 mm).

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum.
3. Section Properties: As Required.

2.6 SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with
stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum.
3. Section Properties: As Required.

2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H,
metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated,
as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Anchor clips.
5. End clips.
6. Foundation clips.
7. Gusset plates.
8. Stud kickers and knee braces.
9. Joist hangers and end closures.
10. Hole reinforcing plates.
11. Backer plates.
12. Steel Network or equal.

a. Drift Track.
b. Stiff Clips HE.
c. Stiff Clips LB.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts;
and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design
capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater
than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill

screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B or ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio
of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and
hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected
silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing
agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of
same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections
securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written
instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is
not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating
joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or
screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses.
Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable
tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other
finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square
tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of
foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing
surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or
slab at stud or joist locations.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-
line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not
exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections
securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or
riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with
requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension
members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to
those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire
integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of
joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members,
such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of
framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or
standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing
materials.

3.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting
structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

2. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces
and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while
providing lateral support.
1. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to building structure.
3. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more
than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (305
mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid
blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-
track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and
secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,
continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-
formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that
ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 054000

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ` 054000 - 9

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.

2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other
Sections.
4. Elevator hoist beams.
5. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
6. Metal ladders.
7. Metal bollards.
8. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be
cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified
in other Sections.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-
channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.
2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into
unit masonry.
3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."
4. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and
coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible
with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.

METAL FABRICATIONS ` 055000 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products.
2. Grout.

B. Energy and Environmental Submittals:

1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by
weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for
each product having recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details
of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop
Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.

2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other
Sections.
4. Elevator hoist beams.
5. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
6. Metal ladders.
7. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards, steel edgings and loading-dock edge
angles.
8. Metal bollards.
9. Loose steel lintels.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that
shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal
fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

METAL FABRICATIONS ` 055000 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting
on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For
metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise
indicated.

F. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

H. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-
plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M),
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with
hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593
(ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy
Group 1 (A1).

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M);
and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is
indicated to be galvanized.

METAL FABRICATIONS ` 055000 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.

G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated;
galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel.
Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633
or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1)
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying
with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and
compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible
with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying

with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and
exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-
entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined
pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

METAL FABRICATIONS ` 055000 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners
unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to
secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel
strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-
inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600
mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the
Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partition
manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition
manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes
where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

2.7 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders.

2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.

2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12.7-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars.

METAL FABRICATIONS ` 055000 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded
to rung.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Harsco Industrial IKG, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.

2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a division of W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT.
6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or
bolted steel brackets.
7. Galvanize and prime exterior ladders, including brackets.
8. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.

2.8 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

1. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide cutouts for controls and
holes for wire.
2. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire.

B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate
welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm)
larger than OD of bollard.

C. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.

2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction.
Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete
construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded
steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding
surface.

2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron
hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

METAL FABRICATIONS ` 055000 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt,
oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in
concrete, masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or
abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or
screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications
are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and
masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or
similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including
manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

METAL FABRICATIONS ` 055000 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with
anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry,
install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates
as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space
around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written
instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward bollard.

B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings at landscaped areas. Center and align bollards in holes 3
inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond
to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been
positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off
flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing
surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.
Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS ` 055000 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads (Architectural Class).

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.
2. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for all pipe and tube railings.
3. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.
4. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm).
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads
specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever
is less.

C. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:

1. Paint products.
2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

METAL STAIRS ` 055100 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements
and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that
shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for stairs and railings.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal
Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
1. Ornamental Stairs: Architectural class.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and
coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible
with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required
stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

METAL STAIRS ` 055100 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For
components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), unless another grade is required by design loads.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M);
and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs, stairs
indicated to be galvanized or stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer.

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).

E. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).

F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).

G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining,

without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times
the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633
or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1)
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

METAL STAIRS ` 055100 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123
"Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible
with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying

with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior
applications.

F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi (20 MPa) unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates,
and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F. Weld connections to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish
Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where
possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts
unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where
water may accumulate.

METAL STAIRS ` 055100 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alfab, Inc.
2. American Stair, Inc.
3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The).
4. Other approved manufacturers complying with specification requirements.

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels or tubes as indicated on drawings.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to
comply with performance requirements.
3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.
4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to
support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they
will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for
erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

C. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet
of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm).

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.

2. Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet, where indicated.
3. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be
concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.
4. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with reinforced
concrete during fabrication.
5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads. Weld
subplatforms to platform framing.

a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to
produce smooth soffits.

2.7 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Steel Tube Railings: See Section 055213 – Pipe and Tube Railings.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron
hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep
holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

METAL STAIRS ` 055100 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure
conditions of installed products:

1. Exterior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes
and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
"Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry
inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set
units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free
of rack.

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless
otherwise indicated.

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or
similar construction.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or
abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or
screwed field connections.

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS

A. See Section 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780.

METAL STAIRS ` 055100 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

END OF SECTION 055100

METAL STAIRS ` 055100 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.

2. Steel tube handrails and guards attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
3. Steel tube handrails and guards attached to other adjacent materials.
4. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055100 "Metal Stairs" for metal stairs.

2. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.
3. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.
4. Section 061053 “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking for anchoring railings.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design
working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.

C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093
sq. m). Spacing to leave <4” clear.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting
on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ` 055213 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other
materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Fittings and brackets.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements
and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that
shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal
fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ` 055213 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and
coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible
with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,
that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings
temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:

a. Pisor Industries, Inc.

b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
c. Other approved local fabricators meeting the specification requirements.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported
rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). Size to match that specified in

1. Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch diameter top and bottom rails and 1/1/2 inch diameter posts.
2. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-1/2-inch diameter intermediate rails spaced less than 4 (100-mm) inches
clear.

3. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ` 055213 - 3

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and
capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other
work, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining,

without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times
the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633
or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1)
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying

with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior
applications.

D. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement

formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting
compound.

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation that is
resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof
coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes
and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes
where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ` 055213 - 4

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for
this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows
after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate
members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

J. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section
of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces of components.

L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns
unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant
fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent
bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work.
Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage
devices with supporting structure.

P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with
inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate
forming bottom closure.

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.

2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ` 055213 - 5

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep
holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease,
dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

C. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and
sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements
indicated below:

1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Phosphatize.

E. Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and
baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that
locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and
mark locations if not already done.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after
fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further
cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of
steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete,
masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing
railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ` 055213 - 6

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match
finish of railings.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply
with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop
or in the field.

C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to
accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond
joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of
post.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post
for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between
post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.

C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions,
connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
2. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends.

C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-
inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as
indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag
bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ` 055213 - 7

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings
approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 055213

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ` 055213 - 8

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

SECTION 05 7310 WET GLAZED GLASS RAILING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Tempered or Laminated Glass Wet Glazed Railing Assemblies.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications

B. Section 057300 - Handrails and Railings
C. Section 088000 - Glazing

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ESR-3269 ICC-ES Evaluation Report, International Code Council Standards for Glass Balustrade Guard
Rail Applications

B. ASTM C 1048 – Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass

C. NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual; national Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements for Handrail Assembly:

1. Support distributed load of 50 pounds per linear foot (0.73kN/M), applied horizontally at right angles
in any direction to the handrail.
2. Support concentrated horizontal load of 200 pounds (0.89kN), applied in any direction at any point
along handrail system.
2
3. 50 lbs (0.22kN) on 1 sf (0.093m ) perpendicular to guard at any location
4. Wind loads 25 psf or as otherwise specified.
5. Distributed loads and concentrated loads not to be applied simultaneously.

B. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.

B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s technical product data for railing components and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned drawings of railing assemblies indicating the following:

1. Elevations; include joint locations, transitions, and terminations.

2. Manufacturer’s installation and maintenance instructions.

D. Samples of manufacturer’s finishes (As selected by Architect.)

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Components and installation are to be in accordance with state and local building codes.

B. All components and fittings are furnished by the same manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

WET GLAZED GLASS RAILING SYSTEM ` 057310 - 1

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

A. Deliver materials properly protected against damage to finished surfaces during transit.

B. Inspect materials upon delivery for damage. Unless minor defects can be made to meet the Architect’s
specifications and satisfaction, damaged parts should be removed and replaced.

C. Store materials at building site under cover in dry location

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design”: C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. (CRL) or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Architectural Metal Works.

b. Architectural Railings & Grilles, Inc
c. Atlantis Rail Systems
d. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Components: Conforming to ASTM B 221/ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063- T52

B. Stainless Steel Components: Conforming to ASTM A 666, Type 304
C. Brass Components: Conforming to ASTM B 248, No. 260, Yellow Brass

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Glazing:
a. Laminated Safety Glazing: 1/2 inch (12 mm).
b. Color: Clear
c. Edge type on exposed glass edges: Beveled

01 Internal Handrail Cap Connection Sleeves: Metal tube, material compatible with handrail cap material.

02 Expansion Cement: Hydraulic, conforming to ASTM c 595, CRL Part # KWX50, used in conjunction
with EPDM Glass Railing Setting and Centering Blocks.

03 Shoe Base:
a. Profile: CRL Part # L25S; 3-3/8 inches (86 mm) wide by 4-3/4 inches (120.7 mm) high rectangular
cross-section. Designed to work with expansion cement with 1-1/16” (25.52 mm) laminated
tempered glass.
b. Material: Aluminum 6063-T52
c. Finish:
i. Base Cladding: Sheet metal cladding added to exposed shoe base sections. Adhere with
double-sided tape and/or silicone adhesive. Provide end caps where ends of shoe base
sections are exposed.

04 Fasteners: Types and sizes indicated in shop drawings.

A. For steel attachment, hole size in base shoe is to be 9/16” (14.3 mm), counter bore 7/8” (22.2
mm) x depth ½” (12.7 mm), center-to-center spacing of holes is 12” (304.8mm). Use ½” – 13 x
1 stainless steel socket head cap screw CRL Part # SHCS12X1.

05 Sill Angles for Glass Railing Assemblies: Steel angle profiles conforming to ASTM A 36, with anchoring
devices, sizes indicated in shop drawing of section 05 5000, drilled and tapped for fastener types, sizes,
and spacing indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate handrail assembly components to lengths and configurations complying with shop drawings.

WET GLAZED GLASS RAILING SYSTEM ` 057310 - 2

BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Bid Set | August 25, 2014

B. Machine joint edges smooth and plane to produce hairline seams when site assembled; supply concealed
sleeve connectors for joints.

C. Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action by applying primer to concealed surfaces of metal
components.

PART 3 INSTALLATION

3.1
A. Install handrails in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions and approved
shop drawings.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean glazing surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the manufacturer’s
instructions. Remove excess glazing sealant compounds, dirt or other substances.

B. Remove protective films from metal surfaces.

C. Clean railing surfaces with clean water and mild detergent. Do not use abrasive chemicals, detergents, or
other implements that may mar or gouge the material.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that all
the materials do not incur any damage or deterioration.

B. Repair components damaged by subsequent construction activities in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations; replace damaged components that cannot be repaired to Architect’s acceptance.

END OF SECTION

WET GLAZED GLASS RAILING SYSTEM ` 057310 - 3

Blank Page
Blank Page